VIDEO PRO X13

English language manual

Copyright
This documentation is protected by copyright law.
All rights, especially the right of duplication, circulation, and translation are reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced in form of copies, microfilms or other
processes, or transmitted into a language used for machines, especially data processing
machines, without the express written consent of the publisher.
All rights of reproduction are reserved. Errors in and changes to the contents as well as
program modifications reserved.
Copyright © MAGIX Software GmbH, 2009 - 2021. All rights reserved.
MAGIX is a registered trademark of MAGIX Software GmbH.
Other mentioned product names may be registered trademarks of the respective
manufacturer. MAGIX licensing conditions are made clear in the installation process and
can also be found at www.magix.com under EULA.
This product uses MAGIX patent pending technology.

2 / 313
Table Of Contents
Customer support 13
Before you start... 14
System requirements 14
Serial number 14
Uninstall program 15
What is MAGIX Video Pro X 16
Features 16
Record options: 16
Supported import formats: 16
Supported export formats: 17
Burnable disc formats 17
What's new? 17
Notes for MAGIX Movie Edit Pro users 19
Quick Start 21
ProjectsMovies and Objects 21
Program start 21
Select, load, and play back videos 22
Insert AVCHD material 24
The Media Pool, a short overview 25
Video editing 26
Video editing in Timeline mode 26
Remove unusable scenes 27
Regroup scenes 30
Burn videos to disc 31
Edit mode 33
Standard mode 33
Basic mode 34
Storyboard in basic mode 34
Export in basic mode 35
'Edit' interface 37

3 / 313
 Customizing the workspace 38
Program and source monitor 38
Setting up monitors 39
Transport control 40
Media Pool 42
Import 42
Effects 45
Templates 46
Audio 47
Store 47
Project window 48
Toolbars 52
Upper toolbar 52
Lower toolbar 53
Project folder 58
Functionality of the project temp folder 60
Settings and Managing video projects 64
Film and project settings 64
Movie settings 64
Synchronization 65
Movie information 66
Project settings 66
Proxy and preview rendering 66
Cleaning Wizard 68
Start dialog 68
Program settings 69
Playback 69
Folders 71
Video/Audio 71
System 73
Display options 74
Import/Export 75

4 / 313
 Project management 76
Backup copies 76
Copying movies, or project and media into folder... 76
Restore project from video disc 77
Record 78
AVCHD / DVCPRO / AVC-Intra 78
HDV Camera 81
DV Camera 81
Analog Video Recording 85
Audio 87
Single frame 90
Screen 92
Edit after recording 93
Objects 95
Insert object into the project. 96
Importing files 96
Load sections from longer video files 97
Select and group objects. 98
Duplicate objects 98
moving objects 98
Object handles 98
Object borders 99
Movie objects 99
Effects 101
Title 101
Create titles without a template 101
Creating titles using a template 101
Positioning titles and adjusting frame size 102
Title Editor 102
Timecode 105
Apply effects to objects 106
Video effects in the Media Pool 108

5 / 313
 Brightness and Contrast 108
Color 109
Color correction 110
Chroma key 111
Artistic filter 112
Distortion 113
Sharpness 113
Speed 114
VEGAS Video Stabilization 114
proDAD Mercalli 2.0 115
Shot match 116
Add Noise 117
Broadcast colors 117
Stamp forms 118
Gaussian Blur 119
Glow 119
LAB color 119
Lens reflection 120
Levels 120
Mask Generator 121
Unsharp mask 121
Standard 122
Position and animation effects 122
Position/Size 122
Section 123
Camera/zoom shot 123
Rotation/Mirror 124
3D distortion 125
Lens Correction 125
Movement templates 126
360° effects 126
Audio effects in the Media Pool 127

6 / 313
 Customized templates in the Media Pool 127
Design elements and image objects 127
Extra effects using plug-ins 128
Using video effect plug-ins 128
Create effects masks 130
Create an animated effects mask 131
Invert mask 132
Layer masks 132
Animate objects using keyframes (effects curves) 133
Preparing animations 133
Place keyframe 134
Display keyframes of individual parameters 134
Retroactively editing an effect's keyframes 135
Delete Keyframe 135
Keyframe Interpolation 135
Editing an effects curve in the object 136
Effects curves – additional functions 137
Making objects "fly" across the screen 138
Attach to picture position in the video 139
Image optimization for individual objects 140
Effect settings for the entire movie 140
Brightness/Contrast 140
Paint 140
Sharpness 141
TV picture 141
Film looks and lookup tables 142
Lookup tables (LUT) 142
Audio 145
Loading audio files 145
Adjust loudness of all selected objects 145
Edit volume curve 146
Audio mixdown 147

7 / 313
 Volume reduction 147
Audio effects 148
Using audio effects 148
The Audio effects dialog 149
Audio effects in the Mixer 153
Create mono objects 154
Audio cleaning 154
DeClipper 155
DeNoiser 156
DeHisser 157
Equalizer FX rack 157
Compressor 157
Stereo FX 158
MAGIX Mastering Suite 158
Mixer 162
5.1 Surround/Multichannel 165
Set multiple audio tracks 169
Scrubbing 171
Import audio CDs 171
Wizards 173
Slideshow Maker 173
Soundtrack Maker 175
Travel Maps - Travel route animation 177
Short description 177
General menu functions 178
Photos 178
Maps 179
Search 179
Path & Avatar 179
View & Animation 180
Finish your animation 181
Additional functions and tools 182

8 / 313
Markers 182
Playback markers 182
Project markers 183
Snap markers and transients 183
Delete all chapter markers 184
Range markers(In & out points) 185
Scene markers 186
Measuring instruments 187
Vectorscope 190
Waveform monitor 191
RGB Parade 193
Histogram 194
Split and trim 194
Simple cut 194
Separate sound from videos 195
Trim Objects 196
Move the contents of trimmed objects 198
Two-point edit 198
Three-point editing 200
Four-point editing 201
Transitions 202
Find gaps 204
Musical editing adjustment and BPM Wizard 204
BPM Wizard 205
Movie and editing templates 207
Automatic scene detection 209
Preview rendering 210
Automatic preview rendering 210
Manual preview rendering 211
Update preview rendering 212
Using proxy files, proxy editing 212
Multicam Editing 213

9 / 313
 Source tracks and preview images 214
Multicam edit functions 215
Synchronize video objects using the audio track 216
360° videos 217
Preprocessing / Stitching 217
360° editing 218
360° Scene Rotation 221
Stereo3D 222
The basics 222
Record 3D 223
Prepare for 3D editing 224
Turn camera movements into 3D videos 225
Export and burn 3D videos 225
Create Panorama 226
Batch conversion 227
Synchronization with external devices 229
MAGIX Video Pro X as master 230
MAGIX Video Pro X as a slave 230
Synchronizing Samplitude/Sequoia with MAGIX Video Pro X 231
16-bit Deep Color Support 232
Load backup project 233
MAGIX Update Notifier 234
'Burn' interface 236
Preview 237
Remote control 237
Menu 238
Templates 238
Editor screen 239
Navigation 240
Disc options 240
Designing a page 242
Designing buttons 243

10 / 313
 Menu entry properties 243
Burn Wizard 245
Burn dialog for DVD player 246
Disk space 247
Separate project onto multiple discs 248
Encoder settings 248
Create label and CD cover 250
Edit DVD menus with Xara Designer Pro X or Adobe Photoshop 250
Export menu 250
Menu text with external menu editing 251
Structure of a PSD file 251
Export movie, Menu 253
Video as AVI 253
Video as DV-AVI... 254
Video as MPEG video 254
Video as MAGIX video 254
Uncompressed movie... 254
Video as MotionJPEG AVI 254
Video as sequence of frames... 254
Video as Windows Media 255
Video as MPEG-4 video 255
Video as HEVC... 256
Audio as MP3 256
Audio as WAV 256
Export as transition... 256
Single frame as BMP file... 257
Single frame as JPG 257
Single frame as a PNG file 257
Shortcut 258
Playback functions 258
Scrolling and zooming 258
Monitors 259

11 / 313
 Project window view 260
Move view and start marker 261
Mouse modes 262
Mouse functions with modifier keys 262
Insert modes 262
Context menu 263
File menu 263
“Edit” Menu 265
"Effects” menu 267
Window menu 268
Help Menu 269
Edit keyboard shortcuts 270
Menus 271
File menu 271
“Edit” Menu 277
"Effects” menu 282
"Window" menu 285
"Help" Menu 288
Activating and using codecs 291
MPEG-2 Encoder (Intel) 292
MPEG-4 encoder settings (Intel) 294
MPEG-4 encoder (MainConcept) 297
Video 298
Audio 305
Multiplexer 306

12 / 313
 Customer support

Customer support
Dear MAGIX customer,
Our aim is to provide convenient, fast and solution-focused support, which is why you
can get unlimited web support and help through our online community at
www.magix.info.
As a registered MAGIX customer, you have unlimited access to web support offered by
the MAGIX service portal in the Support area at www.magix.info. You have access to an
intelligent help wizard, high-quality FAQs, patches and user reports that are constantly
updated.
The Online Community is available for free to all registered MAGIX customers in the
Forum area. The community enables you to ask members questions concerning MAGIX
products as well as use the search function in order to search for specific topics or
answers. In addition to questions & answers, the knowledge pool includes a glossary,
video tutorials and a discussion forum. The multiple experts, who are on www.magix.info
everyday, guarantee quick answers, which sometimes come within minutes of a question
being posted.
Note: A free registration is required for a support request at www.magix.info.

MAGIX Sales Department

You can reach the MAGIX Sales Department workdays for help with the following
questions and problems:
l Orders
l Product consulting (pre-purchase)
l Upgrade requests
l Returns
Phone: +49 5741 3455-31, Monday to Friday 10:00 am - 4:00 pm
Email: infoservice@magix.net
Address: MAGIX Software GmbH, Borsigstrasse 24, 32312 Lübbecke

Particularities for purchases made through Steam™

Different conditions apply if you have purchased the program through Steam™. You can
find more information at https://support.steampowered.com.

13 / 313
 Before you start...

Before you start...

Tip regarding special program versions: This documentation describes the full
functionality of MAGIX VIDEO PRO X. Depending on the program version/edition you
have purchased, the functionality and service may vary.

System requirements
For Microsoft Windows 8 | 10
64-bit systems

Minimum system requirements

l Processor: Dual-core processor with 2.4 GHz
l RAM: 4 GB
l Graphics card: Onboard, min. resolution 1280 x 1024, 512 MB VRAM and DirectX
11 support I
NFUSION Engine 2 supports video acceleration for AVC and HEVC* on Intel,
NVIDIA or AMD GPUs with 1GB VRAM or higher
Example: Intel Graphics HD 630, NVIDIA Geforce GTX 1050, AMD Radeon RX470
l Hard disk space: 2 GB free disk space for program installation
l Optical drive: DVD drive
l Internet connection required for registering and validating the program, as well as
for some program functions.

Recommended configuration for 8K editing

l Processor: Quad-core processor with 2.8 GHz or better
l RAM: 8 GB
l Hard drive space: 10 GB
l Graphics card: NVIDIA Geforce GTX 1060 4 GB VRAM

Serial number
A serial number is included in each product. This serial number is required for software
activation. Please store this number in a safe place.

14 / 313
 Before you start...

Use of a serial number

With a serial number your program license is clearly assigned to you and only you. This
allows you to use the free customer service via email.
Serial numbers also help protect against software piracy. This makes it possible for us to
offer our customers the most value for their money.

Where is the serial number located?

For boxed versions of the program, the serial number can be found on the insert card
inside the box.
If you have purchased a download version, you will receive a confirmation email
containing the serial number that you can use to activate the program. This will be sent
immediately following purchase to the email address you provided.

When is the serial number needed?

The serial number is required when you start the program the first time, as well as for
program registration.

Using the serial number on another computer

If you want to use the serial number on another computer or after reinstalling your
operating system, you must deactivate the program on your current PC.
This "releases" the serial number from the current computer so that it can be used on
another.
Note: You can also deactivate the program in the MAGIX Service Center, but it is much
more convenient to do this with the integrated feature in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.

Uninstall program
In Windows 10, you can uninstall MAGIX VIDEO PRO X under "Windows Settings" >
"Apps".
In older Windows systems, go to the Control Panel and select "Software" or "Programs
and Features" to uninstall MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.

15 / 313
 What is MAGIX Video Pro X

What is MAGIX VIDEO PRO X

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X is a professional video editing program for Windows PC systems.
All standard video formats can be directly imported onto the track without the need for
converting to a proprietary format. The editing options include realtime effect editing,
efficient three-point and four-point editing, intelligent mouse modes for intuitive editing
processes and a Multicam Mode with automatic synchronization on up to nine tracks.
Perfect synchronization of image and audio in realtime is made possible thanks to
technology based on the high-end audio engine in Samplitude. With effective batch
rendering you can export your finished projects in broadcast quality formats, burn them
to DVD, AVCHD and Blu-ray Disc or upload them directly to video hosting sites and
mobile devices.

Features
Record options:
l AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra/video DSLRs/XDCAM/NXCAM (and other drives)*
l HDV cameras: HDV camcorders
l DV cameras: Mini DV camcorders or DV video recorders
l Video: Analog TV, video input, VHS recorders, webcams
l Audio: Microphones, cassette recorders, MiniDisc players, turntables
l Screen: For the PC monitor.
l Single frame: Single and series images from webcams, video recorders, video
cameras, or TV cards
* AVC-Intra and DVCPRO import possible after fee-based activation.
Analog capture requires capture cards compatible with DirectShow. DV capture can be
performed through an OHCI-compatible IEEE 1394 host adapter (FireWire or iLink). A TV
card can be used to record programs from TV or from your video recorder.

Supported import formats:

Video: AVC-Intra**, AVI, DNxHD, DV-AVI, DVCPRO*, MJPEG, MKV, MPEG-1, MPEG-2,
MPEG-4, MVC, MXF, WMV
Audio: AAC, MP3, OGG, WAV, WMA
Photo: BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG, TIF, TGA, HEIF

16 / 313
 What is MAGIX Video Pro X

Supported export formats:

Video: AVI, DV-AVI, MJPEG, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, WMV
Audio: MP3*, WAV
Photo: BMP, JPEG, PNG, BMP image sequence
** This program requires an Internet connection for many of its functions. MP3 export requires
the installation of Windows Media Player version 10 or higher.
DVCPRO, AVC Intra, and HEVC encoding require fee-based activation.

Burnable disc formats

l DVD
l Blu-ray Disc
l AVCHD disc (on DVD and Blu-ray Discs)
Editable multimedia disc menus: A wide range of templates for DVD menus for film and
chapter selection on TV are included with the program. Many of these also come in 16:9
widescreen format. These may simply be applied during burning to give a disc a
professional appearance.
Every menu template may be customized with personal photos, themed animations, 3D
captions, sound, intro videos, etc.

What's new?
l High-DPI program interface for accurate 4K display and Windows display
settings over 100%. MAGIX VIDEO PRO X provides razor-sharp display of screen
elements such as taskbar, icons and dialog boxes, independently of the monitor's
DPI settings. All elements adjust their size in accordance with other desktop
elements.
l Redesigned GUI with new, clear icons arranged in a logical display that offers
faster access to functions.
l INFUSION Engine: New GPU resource management ensures the best utilization of
your computer's resources.
l New effect masks in the templates library for creatively combining two different
tracks or for cutting sections of an image: Easily create stunning collages by
selecting one of a range of layer masks and inserting it into the project between
two object that are placed on top of each other.
l New storyboard in basic mode: The new storyboard displays all imported images
and videos as scenes along with their audio tracks. The scenes are all displayed the

17 / 313
 What is MAGIX Video Pro X

same way, irrespective of how long they actually are in the movie. This way, the
new storyboard perfectly matches the fresh new look of MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.
l Redesigned transition menu: View all transition and settings options within a
single, clear context menu.
l Redesigned start dialog with new templates for your movie settings. Select a
video format (e.g. HD, UHD or social media) to see a number of preset options for
resolution. You can then choose frame rate separately.
l Social media templates for portrait videos and square video images for Instagram,
Facebook and other platforms can now be accessed in the new start dialog or under
"File > Settings > Movie...".

18 / 313
 Notes for MAGIX Movie Edit Pro users

Notes for MAGIX Movie Edit Pro users

For users who are used to working with MAGIX Movie Edit Pro, the user interface can be
switched to the "classical" MAGIX VIDEO PRO X view via "Window -> Window
arrangement -> Minimal".
For all others, we recommend the "Standard" window arrangement. Using this interface,
you have access to the most comprehensive possibilities. The following provides a
detailed overview concerning the differences between MAGIX VIDEO PRO X and MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro:

Video monitors
l In the "Minimal" display mode the program only has one program monitor which is
used for both program and source monitor. When the project is stopped, files in the
Media Pool can be selected and played back using the transport console. To play
back the project again you can simply click on the project window.
l The "Standard" display mode in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X offers two program monitors.
One is the program monitor for previewing the project in the project window and
one is the source monitor for previewing files in the Media Pool. Both program
monitors have their own transport consoles so you can separately control the
preview of the Media Pool and playback of the project. For more information about
the program monitors please refer to the section in the "Workspaces" chapter.

Keyboard layout
The preset keyboard shortcuts are different and can be displayed in both modes via "File
-> Settings -> Keyboard shortcuts".
In MAGIX VIDEO PRO X, you can load a preset using keyboard shortcuts from MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro, if you are familiar with working in the program using keyboard shortcuts.
For more information about this topic, please see the chapter "Keyboard Shortcuts".

Project folder
l In Movie Edit Pro, the project folder function is not available.
l MAGIX VIDEO PRO X features the project folder as a separate folder on the right
side, which serves as an intermediate store or catch-all for all kinds of project
material. More information about this is available in the section "Project folder" in
the chapter "Workspaces".

19 / 313
 Notes for MAGIX Movie Edit Pro users

Space bar behavior

In either program, use the space bar on your keyboard to start and stop. Pressing the
space bar again produces different effects according to the respective program:
l In Movie Edit Pro, the playback marker is placed at the last stop position.
l In MAGIX VIDEO PRO X, the playback marker is kept at the current position. This
works like a tape recorder.
Playback behavior may be switched via "File -> Settings -> Program" and then the
"Playback" tab.

20 / 313
 Quick Start

Quick Start
This chapter explains the basic functions of MAGIX VIDEO PRO X with a step-by-step
introduction. A systematic description of all program functions can be found in the
following chapters.
Tip: Use the online tutorial videos that can be accessed in the "Help" menu. This feature
requires an Internet connection.

The program keyboard shortcuts for commonly used processes and functions are also
very helpful.

ProjectsMovies and Objects

In MAGIX VIDEO PRO X you will be working with projects, movies and objects. In order
to work quickly and intuitively, it is important to know the differences between these
three hierarchically-ordered terms.
l A Project includes everything that you want to include on a disc. Normally this
means one or more movies and a menu structure for selecting movies for playback.
Projects can be saved as "Projektdatei" files on your hard drive and can be loaded
later to do further editing to the movies.
l A Movie can be one single video clip or a combination of clips and photos. It can
also include music, titles, transitions and much more.
Each movie can be exported individually as a video. The "project" can be considered
a type of drawer into which you can put multiple movies that will be edited
together and burned to the same disc.
l Objects are the individual units of the movie. There are different types of objects:
videos, photos, titles, transitions, decorative elements, audio (sound).

Program start
When you start MAGIX VIDEO PRO X for the first time, the start dialog will appear. This
dialog allows you to either Create a new project or Load an existing project.

21 / 313
 Quick Start

We're still at the very beginning, so let's stick with keeping an overview of everything.
Click on Create project to end the dialog and continue.

Select, load, and play back videos

In the beginning, it's probably best to load a video file for test purposes and to get to
know the program functions.
In the Media Pool top right, the Import tab provides access to all usable files (besides
movies, also photos, images, audio files, and even RTF text files for captions) in the
current folder.

Double-click to open folders. Arrow buttons allow you to go one level up or down. You
can also display a folder tree featuring the folder hierarchy and then use the search
function to locate files according to different criteria.

All files opened in the file list can be loaded and used. Find a video file, e.g. in the format
*.mpg, *mxv, or *.avi.
In the upper left area you will see two program monitors.

22 / 313
 Quick Start

l The left program monitor is responsible for playback of objects in the project
window.
l The right source monitor displays a preview of files in the Media Pool.
To enable playback of movie files from the Media Pool in the right source monitor,
double-click the file in the file list first. Double-clicking loads the file in the monitor. This
method enables you to select and play back different video files.
Drag the selected file (hold down the mouse button) from the Media Pool down into the
project window. An object appears at the location on the track where you release the
mouse button to represent this video file.
Each object in the project window can be moved with the mouse either horizontally on a
track or vertically between tracks. Drag the video object on the first track all the way to
the left to the beginning of the track.

Note: If the video also contains an audio track, it will be displayed in the same track. You
can learn how to separate image and sound in the "Objects" chapter.

Now the first file is in the project window where it can be cut, edited and exported. Now
you can load additional files and videos and combine audio files on the tracks.
To play back the project, click the play button on the transport console under the
program monitor to the left.
Tip: An even easier way to control playback is by pressing the space bar on your
keyboard.

During playback a vertical line will move across the project window. This is the playback
marker that displays the current position. It can be set directly with a mouse click in order
to jump to certain positions.
You can also define playback ranges, e.g. to freeze a certain position independent of the
playback marker.
Clicking in the range bar above the first track lets you define an in-point, i.e. the starting
point of the playback range. If you right-click further on, the end marker will appear to

23 / 313
 Quick Start

indicate the end point of the playback range. The length of the playback area is shown in
the center of the section display.

The in and out points can be moved with the mouse: Left-clicking positions the in-point,
and the right mouse button sets the out-point.

To play back the range, click the Play back range button on the transport control
under the program monitor.
Now you know how to load and play back media files in different ways. Would you like to
try to make your own movie now?
l If you want to continue with your own video footage, select the "New movie" 
option from "File" menu and read the following chapters about video import.
l If you want to continue working with the test file, read the "Video editing" section.

Insert AVCHD material

l Connect your storage devices (camera, USB stick, SD card and others) to your PC.
You may first have to turn your camera on.
l To open the recording dialog, click on the red "Record" button below the source
monitor.

l Select "AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra" from the recording dialog.

24 / 313
 Quick Start

l The AVCHD import assistant will then open. Select your connected storage devices
as video source. A file list will appear.

l In the file list, select the recordings that you have imported from the device.
l You can preview all your recordings using the program monitor in order to decide if
they are suitable for your movie.
l After selecting all videos, select in "Import options" whether the recordings should
be directly placed into your movie project or copied to your computer's hard drive
(select the location under "Save in folder"). You can also automatically delete your
recordings after import.

The Media Pool, a short overview

The Media Pool can be used to access and load media files of all kinds: videos, photos,
MP3 files, audio CD tracks, templates, effects and Internet media, etc.

Browse the drive folder to find media you would like to use. The navigation buttons for
the various drives and folders are located in Import above the main display area.
Note: The Media Pool displays the data on your hard drive under "Import". If you delete
data here, you will not be able to find it again using Windows Explorer.

Tip: You can create a link to your personal media folder in order to access the media it
contains with just a single click. You can do this by right-clicking on one of the entries and

25 / 313
 Quick Start

selecting Create link in the context menu. Select the media folder and click OK to
confirm.

Note: All links are automatically deleted if the function Reset standard program settings

("Edit" menu > "Settings") is used.

If you hover the cursor over a media file, three icons for the options (Preview, Trim,
Import) will appear.
l Preview : Click on the playback icon to play back the file. Video and image
files are displayed in the program monitor, and audio files through the sound card.
You can also preview the provided templates.
l Trim : Range import: You can define an import range on the source monitor
using buttons for the in- and out-point and then import it.
l Import: Click on the Import icon to load the selected media to the project
window completely. When importing using the import button, the insert mode that
is currently set will be used.

Video editing
Video editing in Timeline mode

All editing takes place in the project window. In Timeline mode your movies and scenes
are displayed proportionally to their size, i.e. the longer the movie, the longer the object
on the track.
Handles: All objects can be shortened by moving the mouse to one of the lower corners
of the object until it turns into a stretch icon. You can now shorten the object until it is
the length you want.
At the top corners of every object you will find two fade handles that can be adjusted to
fade an object in or out.

26 / 313
 Quick Start

The image and audio tracks of videos will be cut together in the same object. The handles
in the center can be used to adjust the transparency of the video object (up) and the
volume of the audio track (down). Image and audio can also be displayed independently
of each other on different tracks. You can read more about this under "Objects".
Object selection: For advanced effects editing, the objects must be selected first.
Individual objects can be selected with the mouse. Objects will change color to show that
they have been selected. Multiple objects can be selected by holding down the Shift key.
If you click next to an object, you can drag out a rectangle with the mouse button pressed
down. All objects contained in this rectangle will be selected.
Effects editing: Selected objects can be edited with the effects in the Media Pool.

The settings for each effect can be adjusted in the Media Pool.
You can see what the current effect setting looks like in the program monitor on the left.
The source monitor on the right displays the unedited image so you can compare the two
images.
Most effects can be controlled using keyframe animation and effect curves. The intensity
of the effect is controlled either dynamically with single points (keyframes) or drawn as a
curve (effect curve). All the buttons for keyframe and effect curve animation
corresponding to the selected effect can be found in the lower area of the Media Pool.
Note: A keyframe must first be selected before an effect curve can be activated.

Context menu: The context menu also offers a series of editing options for objects. This
dialog can be opened by right-clicking on an object. Different trim editors can be opened
which enable an exact cut with different transition parameters (for example). For video
objects there is a different context menu than the one for audio and title objects.

Remove unusable scenes

There are two ways to cut out unusable scenes from footage:
l Option 1: First, the complete material is loaded into your project and the unusable
scenes are cut out.
l Option 2: You can cut the material in the Media Pool before you import it, and then
proceed to import only the scenes you need. This process is recommended for long
movies where a lot of editing is needed.

27 / 313
 Quick Start

Cut videos in the project window

Let's assume that you have already imported your film material into a project and would
now like to edit it.
l Play back your video by clicking the play button on the program monitor's transport
control (or simply press the space bar on the keyboard).
l If during playback you have reached a scene that you would like to cut out, click the
playback button in the transport control a second time. The playback marker stays
near the start of the scene to be removed.
Tip: In the case of long films or to speed up searching, you can also fast forward the video
and follow the action on the program monitor. To do this, pull the playback marker across
the timeline (but not too fast!) while holding down the mouse key.

l Set the playback marker exactly at the start of the unusable material. The zoom
function is recommended to get a better view of longer videos (the +/- buttons in
the bottom right corner of the project window).

l Press "T" on the keyboard. This will split the current scene into two sections at the
position of the playback marker.
l Repeat these steps for the end of the unusable scene. Find the end of the unusable
scene, place the play marker as close as possible to the end point, and then press
the "T" key on the keyboard again.

Now you have "isolated" the unusable scene and can delete it from the video by pressing
"Del" on the keyboard. Before this, the scene must be selected by clicking it with the
mouse.

If you didn't work accurately during cutting, then don't worry; you can use the object
handles to stretch or shorten the remaining objects to recover or exclude material from
the deleted section.

28 / 313
 Quick Start

After deletion, a gap will appear in the film sequence where the removed material was.
How do you remove gaps from the movie? It's easy: Simply drag the later scenes up to
the earlier scenes until they "dock" with each other. Remember to drag all objects that
are further behind, otherwise the gap will just be passed on down the line. To drag later
objects, use the "All Tracks" mouse mode. This automatically takes the objects on all
tracks found later on the timeline along with the object being moved.

Note: If your project has an audio track in addition to the image track, it is usually
necessary to cut audio and video tracks synchronously. After import from the camera,
video and audio tracks are automatically combined in one object, i.e. all cutting and
moving actions have an effect on video and sound tracks simultaneously. If you have
added a separate soundtrack which has not yet been grouped with the image sequence,
you should group them before starting to edit. To do this, select the video object and the
audio object with "Ctrl" + click, and in the "Edit" menu select the "Group" option (or click
the Group Tool).

All of the cutting functions are non-destructive (as are all of the editing functions in
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X). This means that all original material will remain unchanged on
your hard drive.

Importing individual scenes from longer movies

If you have saved a longer video as a file on your hard disk and only want to use a section
of it for your project, you can proceed as follows:
l Double click the desired file in the Media Pool. The file will load to the source
monitor and can be played back there using the transport controls.
l Find the area you want to import. Position the play marker above the transport
control at the start position of the range and click the "Set in point" button.

l Next, position the playback marker at the end of the section and click the "Set out
point" button.

29 / 313
 Quick Start

l The currently selected range appears as a blue bar in the range display. You can
play back this range separately with the "Range playback" button.

l All range limits can be moved by holding down the mouse button and dragging.
Once the range matches the section that you want to import, click on the preview
image in the monitor and drag it onto the track. An object will appear,
corresponding to the selected area. If you're not sure where you would like to use
the section in the project, you can drag in into the project folder instead of the onto
the track.
Tip: You can also edit files that are located in the the project folder in the same way. A
shortened file also contains information in the project folder about in and out points so
that you don't always need to reset these in case the video needs to be re-imported at a
later time. You can also drag each file directly from the Media Pool into the project folder.

Regroup scenes
You will often want to move specific scenes or even groups of scenes to a different place
within a movie.
This can be done easily:
l Simply drag & drop single scenes by clicking on them and moving them to the
position you want.
l You can also create scene groups which can be moved together: "Ctrl" + mouse
click selects more than one scene, "Shift" + mouse click selects all of the scenes that
lie in between.

Finally, here are three tips for more extensive arranger work:
l The mouse modes All tracks or One track don't just move the selected scene, but
all objects that are located behind the object in the same track ("one track") or all
tracks ("all tracks").
l The commands Group and Ungroup let you join any scenes into groups which can
then be moved together as a block.
l If cutting and moving objects in your project has left it a little unorganized, try to
make more use of the project temp folder. You can use this folder as a clipboard to
store objects and use them in other parts of your project. You can either move all of
the objects directly from the project window into the project temp folder by
dragging them there (they will be removed from the corresponding track), or you
can copy the objects and paste them into the project temp folder. To do this, press

30 / 313
 Quick Start

the Ctrl key while clicking and dragging. You can also drag files or sections of files
directly from the Media Pool into the project temp folder.
Note: Be aware that the project temp folder is only available for the corresponding
project. The contents will be saved together with the project and made available the next
time the same project is opened, but not when another project is opened.

Burn videos to disc

You can burn your projects to DVD, Blu-ray or AVCHD with an interactive menu. The
disc selection menu is important for multiple films that are subdivided into individual
chapters, since it enables you to jump between films and chapters using your remote
control.
l Switch to the Burn interface by pressing the button top right.

If you have not set chapter markers for the film yet, a dialog that lets you set automatic
chapter markers will appear at this point.
To divide a film into chapters, you need to create chapter markers within the film. To set
them manually, place the playback marker at the location in the track where you want a
new chapter to start and choose the option Set chapter markers from the Edit menu
(keyboard shortcut: Shift + Enter).

The Burn dialog has two interfaces: Preview and Edit. Using the preview function is a
fast way to add a menu template and then burn the film. More detailed editing such as
activating/deactivating menu entries, creating new menu pages or customizing templates
can be done using the "Edit" interface.
Once the menu is finished, you can burn a disc of your project to watch on your player.

31 / 313
 Quick Start

Export video file

Your project can also be exported as a video file. When exporting the file, all of the
material in the project window is combined into a single file that can be saved to any
folder on the hard drive. The available export formats are listed in the menu File > Export 
movie.
To upload a video to the Internet go to File > Online to access direct connections to the
media hosting sites YouTube and Vimeo.

32 / 313
 Edit mode

Edit mode
The full range of function in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X isn't necessary for simple video editing
tasks, such as a rough cut or format conversion. For this reason, the MAGIX VIDEO PRO X
interface can be switched to a simplified, or basic mode.

Switch between Standard and Basic mode

To switch MAGIX VIDEO PRO X into Basic mode, go to Window > Editing mode > Basic 
mode.

To switch MAGIX VIDEO PRO X back to the Standard mode, go to Window > Edit mode 

> Standard mode.
Note: If you accidentally switch to Basic mode and your MAGIX VIDEO PRO X project
contains cut and edited audio and video on multiple tracks, this project will not initially
be changed. Simply switch back to standard mode.

Tip: If you switch back to standard mode from basic mode, you can reset MAGIX VIDEO 
PRO X to its default window arrangement by selecting Window > Window Arrangement 
> Reset window arrangement from the menu.

Standard mode
The standard mode offers all MAGIX VIDEO PRO X functions for advanced project
editing.

l Program and source monitor

l The project window, which can be activated as scene overview or in timeline mode.
l Disc menu editing functions
l Project folder

33 / 313
 Edit mode

Basic mode
In basic mode all control elements, menus and toolbars are reduced to a minimum.

l The window layout shows the program monitor, Media Pool and the project.
l The project window is replaced by a single track Storyboard. Here, imported movie
material can be cut and arranged into individual scenes. Controls and menu
commands for effects and audio editing are hidden.
l Next to the buttons used for switching between the main screens Edit and Burn,
there is an additional button Export. Along with the export dialog, the finished
movie can be saved in various formats and uploaded to Internet platforms.
l The Burn screen does not include the control elements for menu template editing.

Storyboard in basic mode

In Basic mode, the project window has been replaced with a Storyboard. Pictures and
video footage (including the audio track) are displayed as scenes in the Storyboard. The
scenes are all displayed the same way, irrespective of how long they really are in the
movie.
Note: With this kind of display, the playback marker moves in the movie at different
speeds during playback. Correspondingly, it moves slower in longer scenes.

You can load a video or image file by dragging it into the Storyboard from the Media Pool
using the mouse. To generate a preview of the video, drag the file into the program
monitor. The transport console no longer applies to the Storyboard, but plays the video
from the Media Pool.
A loaded file is made up of a single long "scene", which can be split into several smaller
scenes. You can do so manually using the Cut button in the lower toolbar or via
Automatic scene detection (Shortcut Shift + Z).
You can then re-arrange the scenes using drag & drop and delete unwanted scenes.

34 / 313
 Edit mode

The following buttons are found on every scene:

Add titles and text: Click on the T button to add a title. Enter your text straight into
the program monitor. You can also change the size of the title. The title is added at the
beginning of the scene and is displayed for 5 seconds.

Set volume: The volume in the soundtrack of each scene can be set with the
loudspeaker button.

Effects menu: Opens a menu with the functions "Copy and paste" and a few special
functions as well as the object properties.

Transitions/Fades: Click on the large button between the scenes and select a scene
transition (or "Fade").

Rotate image (only with image files): If an image or photo is on its side or upside
down, click on this button. The photo will rotate 90 degrees.

Display duration: The display duration for each scene is shown here in [Minutes]:
[Seconds]:[Frames]. With image files, you can click the time display and adjust the display
duration in the dialog that appears. This duration can be applied to all photos in the
movie.

Export in basic mode

Clicking on the Export button opens a selection menu with the most
important export functions.
Here the finished movie can be saved in various formats, exported to devices and
uploaded to Internet platforms. Please note that this applies only to the current film, not
the entire project.

35 / 313
 Edit mode

Upload to Vimeo: Uploads the film to film portal Vimeo.

Export as video file: Exports the film in standard formats MPEG 2, MPEG 4 or WMV.
Additional export formats are listed in the menu File > Export.
Export to mobile device: Transfers the film to a connected mobile device. The film will
be converted into a suitable format first.
Upload to the Internet: Uploads the film to Vimeo or Youtube.

36 / 313
 'Edit' interface

'Edit' interface
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X contains two program interfaces for working:
l The Edit interface is the main view. You can load your videos here and edit them in
a project window.
l The Burn screen is a special interface for burning discs. This enables you to design a
selection menu for use on DVDs, Blu-ray Discs and AVCHD discs.

Above right, you can switch between these interfaces.

"Burn" interface
You can find out more about this interface in the section "Burn" interface.

"Edit" interface

Upper toolbar: Buttons for basic commands.

Menu bar: Most functions in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X can be accessed via the

menu bar.

Program monitor and source monitor: The video and image objects are
displayed here. Both video monitors have their own transport console.

Media Pool: In the five tabs you can access the folders on your computer
("Import"), the "effects" and "templates" included within the program, sound
effects and background music ("Audio"), and the in-app Store.

Peak meter: Displays the current volume of the audio track.

37 / 313
 'Edit' interface

Scene overview, timeline and multicam mode: The scene overview displays
all objects on the first track and enables fast sorting of scenes. Multicam mode
enables you to edit synchronously recorded material from several video
sources.

Lower toolbar: The essential editing functions for objects in the project
window.

Timeline: You can define the range that will be played on a timescale here.

Project window: All files can be dragged and dropped from the Media Pool or
the project temp folder to the track you want. This turns the files into project
objects.

Project temp folder: Here you can store all of the files needed for the project
for quick access.

Scroll bars: The lower scroll bars can be dragged apart and pushed together
for zooming with the mouse. The vertical scroll bars zoom in and out of the
tracks or files.

Customizing the workspace

The source and program monitors, the project temp folder, the project window and the
Media Pool can be freely positioned or even completely deactivated. Your own
configurations in the "Edit" interface can be saved and retrieved at any time by going to
"Window" > "Window layout" > "Save...".
The first three custom window layouts are automatically assigned the keyboard shortcuts
F10, F11 and F12. By going to "File" > "Settings" > "Keyboard shortcuts..." you can assign
keyboard shortcuts to additional layouts.
Tip: The shortcut Ctrl + F9 can be used to switch between the current interface and the
last one you used, even if it wasn't saved.

Program and source monitor

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X features two video monitors: A program monitor for object image
output in the project window and a source monitor for previewing files in the Media Pool
or project temp folder.

38 / 313
 'Edit' interface

Setting up monitors
Program and source monitors can be set up in various ways:
l The size of each monitor can be adjusted. This can be done by clicking the screen
with the right mouse button and selecting the desired size from the context menu,
either from the presets submenu or user-defined (Other resolution).
l Every monitor can be positioned freely. To do this, click on the top bar of the
monitor window and drag it with the mouse button held down to the position you
want. This may be a separate monitor, for example, where you can maximize the
window.

Full-page view of image

The option Video monitor fullscreen in the context menu maximizes the monitors.
Alternatively, simply double-click on one of either monitors.
You can also shift the monitors in full screen mode and access the context menu (right
mouse button). There, you can also hide and display the transport control, apart from the
regular entries.
Tip: Using the option Edit video effects in the context menu, you can display the effect
settings of the Media Pool and perform editing on the effects directly in fullscreen.

Esc returns you to the normal view (or click on smaller button to the right in the
fullscreen mode).

Movie overview
The option Movie overview in the Window menu enables an overview of the entire
project. All objects in the project window are displayed in the program monitor. The
overview display is especially recommended for working on long movies because the
reduced overview in the program monitor can be combined well with the zoomed
detailed view in the project window.
The movie overview can be used for moving around in the movie and editing specific
parts:

39 / 313
 'Edit' interface

l When you click on a particular object in the program monitor, the project window
will zoom into the object.
l When you drag on a border in the program monitor, the project window will zoom
into the corresponding area.
l When you move the playback marker in the program monitor, the playback marker
in the project window will also move correspondingly.
Tip: If you use this option very often, try using the corresponding keyboard shortcut Shift 
+ A.

Monitor zoom
The preview images of both monitors may be zoomed in and out to examine specific
details in the image more closely (zoom in) or to reduce the image.
Click on the program monitor and zoom out of the video image by holding down Ctrl and
using mouse wheel.

Transport control
Both transport consoles enable, e.g. the video material to be played back.
To the upper left, there is the video monitor menu that provides the additional fader as
well as, e.g. the jog wheel and functions.

Range: Above the playback functions you can select the range between
the in and out points using the mouse.

Playback marker: This marker indicates the position of the image currently
displayed by the monitor.
Set in/out points: Defines the start and end of the playback range.
To range start: This button sets the playback marker to the start of the current range
for control purposes.
Playback around a Frame: A short area around the position of the playback marker will
be played back.

Playback/Stop (pause): The playback button in the middle starts playback. A second
click stops playback.
Tip: In the menu "File -> Settings -> Program -> Playback", you can set whether the
playback marker will go back to the start position (stop) after the second click or

40 / 313
 'Edit' interface

following the appropriate shortcut (space bar), or if it should stay at the current position
(pause function).

Range playback: This button plays the specified range.

To range end: This button sets the playback marker to the end of the current range.
Jog wheel: Using this wheel, you can move by single frames within the
video and zoom in for precise positioning of the playback marker.
Shuttle control: The further the slider control is moved to the side, the quicker the
arrangement is played in the corresponding direction. This way a specific position can be
reached quickly.
Note: Jog wheel and shuttle control are hidden if the corresponding video monitor is too
small. In this case, simply enlarge the video monitor until both control elements are
displayed.

Jump to movie start: Sets the playback marker in the preview to the start of the
movie. (Only in the source monitor.)

Preview quality switch: Activate Smooth playback if playback becomes choppy.

Preview Quality
You can "activate" a smoother preview if playback performance begins to suffer. This
setting does not have any effect on the quality of video files when exporting or burning
to DVD. Poor playback performance can be caused by the following:
l Under-performing hardware
l High-resolution source material (4K)
l A very complex project

In the context menu, you can set which options you would like to use for the
optimized preview.
The following options are then available:
l Reduce resolution
l Reduce frame rate: Reduces the number of frames per second.
l Deactivate effects: All effects and plug-ins will be activated/deactivated.
Note: "Reduce resolution" and "Reduce frame rate" are preset.

41 / 313
 'Edit' interface

Media Pool
The Media Pool can be used to import material from all folders on your computer. It also
lets you access effects and templates offered by the program as well as the MAGIX Store.

There are five tabs in the MAGIX VIDEO PRO X Media Pool.

l Import: For importing your media files.
l Effects: All effects, from image optimization and special effects to chroma key mix
effects, are located here.
l Templates: Offers templates in various categories (transitions, title templates etc.)
for immediate use.
l Audio: Displays all songs and audio effects that can be used for the audio track.
l Store: Here you can buy additional songs, templates and lots more.

Import
The structure and operation of the Import function in the Media Pool is similar to
Windows Explorer. The only difference is that the Media Pool only displays files that can
be used in the film. The Media Pool is used to access and load multimedia files of all
kinds: Photos and other image files, video files, audio files, transitions, effects, and also
complete projects.
Computer: All drives will be listed along with their drive letters and can be opened with a
double click.
User folder: Displays the folder for the user currently signed in on the computer (their
name is displayed).
My media:
l Projects: Here you can switch to the folder where your projects and videos are
usually stored.
You'll find the Show project contents function in the context menu of a project.
Using this function, you can display all objects of a project and copy them into the
current project, retaining the editing and effect state of the object. This means that

42 / 313
 'Edit' interface

you don't have to edit the objects again to keep the status of the "old" project. But
you can certainly continue editing the transferred object. These changes will be
then saved in the current project.
l My videos: Displays all files found in "My files\My videos" that can be used.
l My music: Displays the contents of the "My files\My music" folder.
l Slideshow music: This features the music that is included for dubbing audio.
l My pictures: Switches to the "My files\My pictures" folder. This folder is often
used by digital cameras and scanners by default to store transferred images.
l Recordings: MAGIX VIDEO PRO X stores all recordings here by default.
Travel route: Click here if you would like to create a travel route. This opens the MAGIX
Travel Maps tool.
Cloud Import: The Cloud Import feature lets you import media files into MAGIX VIDEO 
PRO X from cloud services such as Google Drive. Clicking on Cloud Import will open the
MAGIX Update Notifier tool.
Downloads: Use this button to access the media files that you downloaded with
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X. Also, all data received via Send Anywhere is stored here.
Note: The Media Pool displays the data on your hard drive under "Import". If you delete
data here, you will not be able to find it again using Windows Explorer.

Tip: You can create a link to your personal media folder in order to access the media it
contains with just a single click. You can do this by right-clicking on one of the entries and
selecting Create link in the context menu. Select the media folder and click OK to
confirm.

Note: All links are automatically deleted if the function Reset standard program settings

("Edit" menu > "Settings") is used.

If you hover the cursor over a media file, three icons for the options (Preview, Trim,
Import) will appear.
l Preview : Click on the playback icon to play back the file. Video and image
files are displayed in the program monitor, and audio files through the sound card.
You can also preview the provided templates.
l Trim : Range import: You can define an import range on the source monitor
using buttons for the in- and out-point and then import it.
l Import: Click on the Import icon to load the selected media to the project
window completely. When importing using the import button, the insert mode that
is currently set will be used.
You can also load files from the Media Pool by double-clicking them.

43 / 313
 'Edit' interface

Selected entries (including entire folders) can be selected by holding down the left mouse
button and dragging and dropping them into the film.
l Select multiple files individually: Hold down the Ctrl key while clicking on the
files you want to use one by one.
l Load files in sequence: Hold the Shift key and click on the first entry and then on
the last. All entries in between are marked.
l Select multiple files using the mouse (object lasso): Click on an empty space and
hold down the mouse button and move the mouse over the multiple files. A visible
frame is dragged by the mouse. All entries bordering this frame will be selected.
l Select all files in the current folder: Press the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + A.
Navigation buttons
Forwards/Backwards: These buttons access the previously viewed folders.

Folder tree: Here you can activate a folder tree to navigate through your computer
system.

Search:
The search function allows you to find specific files quickly. You may specify your search
according to file type, date, or certain folders.
l File name: Enter any part of the name of the file you are looking for in the "File
name" field. Clicking on the X symbol will delete the entry again. A "?" may be used
as a placeholder for a single character, and "*" for any number of characters
l File type: Here you can enter a file name extension. Multiple entries are separated
using a semicolon. Below the entry field, various presets may be selected for often-
used file name extensions.
l Date: For restricting your search to a specific time period. Choose an entry from
the list.
l Folder: If you want to search on certain drives or in a single folder rather than your
entire computer, you can define a certain search path.
l Search depth: Here you have various options that determine whether additional
locations should be searched.
"Indexed locations" are folders, which are searched and cataloged in Windows via
the index list. If the index list is activated, the files in the indicated folders will be
indexed while the computer is idling, so that the user's search query may be
completed faster.
l Search indexed locations and the selected folder
l Search indexed locations, the selected folder and personal files

44 / 313
 'Edit' interface

l Search indexed locations, the selected folder, personal files and the project
file.
Browse history list and path details: In the top center you will see the path of the
current folder. Use the arrow button to open the menu to find the folders you previously
visited.

Options: All functions of the context menu (switch views, rename, or delete files,
etc.) can also be accessed using the options button.

Up: This button brings you to the next highest folder level.

Zoom: A zoom slide can be used to set the number and size of visible icons in the
"Large icon" view.

Display options:
All supported multimedia files and subfolders of the currently selected folder are
displayed in the file list. You can define how detailed the entries should be listed here.
l List: Only file names are listed. This view mode displays the most files
simultaneously.
l Details: In the details section the type, size and date of modification are shown for
every media file beside its name.
l Large icons: These can be quite useful, since they show a preview frame for each
video and picture file in the file list. This allows you to sort through the material
quicker. As soon as you activate this view, the zoom function appears next to it.
This allows you to further enlarge the preview images.

Effects
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X offers numerous effects and effects settings options, as described
in detail in the section Effects.
l Title editing: You'll find the title editor for editing title objects here.
If you have selected a timecode display under "Templates > Timecode Basic" and
added it to the project, you automatically switch to this area as well.
l Video effects: Customizable effects for video and photo objects are located here.
The effects can be set only after selecting an object in the respective effects dialog.
For more details, see Video effects.
l View/animation: These are movement effects you can use to animate the frame
by using zoom or camera movements.

45 / 313
 'Edit' interface

l 360° video: This is where you'll find the 360° video editing effects. Learn more
under 360° videos.
l Stereo3D: This accesses the program's Stereo 3D functionality. See Stereo3D for
more information.
l Audio effects: You can find a wide range of audio effect presets for audio tracks
here. For more information, see Audio editing.
l Extra effects: Contains all available effect plug-ins. You can find out more under
Additional effects in the Media Pool.

Templates
Here you'll find additional content that can be used for your film. As well as the content
installed alongside MAGIX VIDEO PRO X you can purchase additional content in the Store
from directly within the program.
l Transitions: Opens the transitions section in the Media Pool. Click on a category to
see all the transitions in a list.
To load a transition, drag it with a held-down mouse key onto the selected object.
You can find additional information in the "Fades (transitions)" section of the
"Objects" chapter.
l Title templates: The title templates are sorted into various categories and can be
loaded by double clicking or dragging and dropping them. The text and placement
of the title template can be positioned directly in the program monitor.
l Film and editing templates: These templates enable you to create short movie
trailers by dragging sections out of your film material to pre-produced placeholders.
More information about this can be found in the chapter "Wizards and special
functions".
l Intro/outro animations: Intros and outros are short videos included in the program
that you can modify with text and add to the beginning or end of your film.
l Film looks: You can modify the visual aesthetic of your material by using lookup
tables. Find out more about this in the "Movie looks and lookup tables" chapter.
You can import and apply collections of lookup tables (.cub) in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X
by pressing the "+" button.
l Design elements and image objects: The design elements enable images to be
combined. Each design element offers a preview: We recommend browsing
through the selection and viewing the content for each one.
l Collages animate or interlace the image from a photo or video (in some
templates, several objects are faded into one another). Depending on the
collage, arrange the selected objects one after the other and drag the collage

46 / 313
 'Edit' interface

onto the first object.

l Image border effects scale down the image and trim image border areas to
display pre-produced animations there.
l Note: If you use border effects on video footage with audio, note that the
edge effect mutes the sound of that object.

l Picture-in-picture templates display several videos in a single image. To use

this, position the clips that are to be displayed simultaneously below one
another on the tracks and then apply a suitable picture-in-picture template.

Hover the mouse over a template and 3 icons will appear: Load content to the movie ,
Preview the template in the program monitor or bookmark the template as a Favorite.

Audio
Under "Audio", you'll find installed content and offers from the Store for background
music and sounds. The tab functions the same way as the "Templates" tab.

Store
Additional content for your projects can be purchased directly from the in-program
Store.

Above left, you can filter by category; or you can also select an option to view only new
or free items available in the Store.

47 / 313
 'Edit' interface

Buy new content

The price and size of the pack will be shown and you can preview the content by clicking
the playback button. You can purchase the specific content you need, rather than an
entire pack, in the program's in-app Store.
Click Purchase to open the Store window.
l When you make your first purchase, you will be asked to select a currency.
l Then, log in to your MAGIX account.
l In the next step, select the payment method and enter the required details.
l This step will be skipped for later purchases and you will go straight to the
"Purchase" window. You can also adjust the payment method afterwards by
clicking on the pen icon next to "Pay with".
l Click on "Buy now" to complete the purchase.
Your purchase will download immediately, as shown by the download progress on the
tile. You can use the content you have purchased in your projects right away.

Project window
The project window offers a professional editing screen for post-production.

There are various views in the project window that you can easily switch
between using the buttons in the lower toolbar.
By default, MAGIX VIDEO PRO X is displayed in Timeline mode, as seen in the image
above.

48 / 313
 'Edit' interface

Timeline Mode
In the Timeline mode, your movies and scenes are shown in proportion to their length:
The longer the object in the track, the longer the corresponding movie.
You also have direct access to all media files such as titles, effects, etc. currently being
used in the movie.

Scene overview

The Scene overview allows you to manage and categorize scenes. All scenes are
listed one after the other (in multiple lines, like in a text program) and can be copied, cut,
moved, deleted and inserted.

The "Overview" mode does not indicate start, playback, or end markers. The scene which
is currently being played has a frame around it.
The zoom slider enables the view to be enlarged or reduced. This
controller also specifies how many scenes are displayed. The smaller the preview
pictures, the more will fit onto the overview.

Maximize: Use this button to maximize the scene overview to fullscreen mode.

Multicam mode
The Multicam mode is an expanded timeline mode, where you can edit together scenes
shot with different camera perspectives, a process called Multicam editing. The top two
tracks serve as target tracks for copying sound and video from two different source
tracks.

Tracks
The project window is divided into tracks where the multimedia material can be
positioned and edited. Only when working in Scene overview are there no tracks
displayed.
In principle, any object type can be placed on any of the tracks. Video and image objects
can also be combined with audio objects within a track. The maximum length of a movie
is restricted to six hours.
At the beginning of each track there is a track header.

49 / 313
 'Edit' interface

Lock icon: Clicking on this icon locks the entire track and all of its objects
against editing.

Solo: This switches the track to "solo" mode. During playback, only this track
will be seen or heard.

Hide video, image and title objects: Makes all visible objects transparent.
Audio objects can still be heard.

Transparency controller: Here you can set the transparency for the entire
track.

Mute: Mutes all audio objects on the track. Video, image and title objects are
still played back.

Volume control: Sets the volume for all audio objects on the track.

Maximize/minimize track: Makes the track larger/smaller. This creates more

space on the screen, making it easier to edit details.

Track options (see below)

Add tracks: Click the plus icon to add a new track above the current track.

Track number: All tracks have a number to help differentiate them in the
project.

Track name: This is the track name. You can give the track a name by clicking
on the name field and entering it manually. Press Enter to confirm the name.

Click on the track options (8) or in the context menu of the track header (via right-click)
to find the following options:
l Add: Adds a new track above the current track. Clicking on the plus symbol also
performs this action.
l Delete/Cut/Copy/Paste: These commands let you delete, copy or cut an object
into the clipboard, or paste a track including all of the objects within it. The track is
inserted from the clipboard above the selected track when pasting.

50 / 313
 'Edit' interface

l Multicam > Source track: Here you can activate/deactivate a track as a source
track.
l Multicam > Master audio track: Here you can designate the master audio track
for multicam editing.
l DVD audio track: If you are planning to burn more than one audio track (e.g.
several languages) to a DVD or Blu-ray disc, you can specify the position for the
current track here. This option is meant for pure audio tracks. When you select an
option from the submenu, a dialog will open where you can give the audio track a
name (e.g. "English"). You can find out more about this in the "Audio editing"
section.
l Track height: Set whether the selected track or all tracks should be displayed as
small, large or in standard size. You can also adjust the size using your mouse. To do
so, use the mouse to drag the lower border of a track box downward.
l Track color: Here, you can assign the track a color to highlight specific tracks.
Assign a destination track when importing: You can define a destination track for
importing the objects. Simply click to mark the track header of the appropriate track.
From then on, all objects will be imported to this track. Clicking again on the selected
track disables this function.

Zooming

The vertical zoom function sets the number of visible tracks. On many tracks zooming is
useful for selectively editing a track or an object in full view.
Use the horizontal zoom functions to set up the visible section of the project on the
timeline. Clicking and dragging on the bottom border of a track header allows you to
adjust the height of the display.
Object zoom: Vertical and horizontal zoom stages are enlarged so that all of the
selected objects are displayed at maximum size.
Optimize view: Displays the full project. Zoom will be set to 100%.
When the function is turned off, the old zoom level will be reactivated.

Grid
The project window features a frame-exact grid. This ensures that video and image
objects snap exactly to the borders of a frame.

51 / 313
 'Edit' interface

The step size depends on the frame rate specified in the movie settings ("File -> Settings -
> Movie"). Choose between Europe's conventional frame rate for PAL (25 frames per
second) and America's and Japan's conventional frame rate NTSC (29.97 frames per
second) or any other manually set frame rate.

When moving an object, the position display indicates at which frame the first image of
the object is shown.

The position is displayed in the form of a tooltip when moving the

object. This information is displayed in the form "Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frame".
Note: Audio objects can be moved sample-exact. This means that they do not snap to the
frame grid if they are not grouped with a video object.

In addition to the constantly active frame grid, an object grid can also be activated. This
ensures that two consecutive objects will seamlessly snap together even if they are on
different tracks. This avoids undesired gaps or overlaps.

The object grid can be activated/deactivated using the magnet icon in the lower
toolbar.

Locking and preview rendering

You can use the lock button to prevent markers from being moved
accidentally.
You can reach the preview rendering features by pressing the lightning bolt
button next to the timeline.

Toolbars
Upper toolbar

The upper toolbar can be found above left in the program.

52 / 313
 'Edit' interface

New project:
Creates a new MAGIX VIDEO PRO X project. The start dialog will also open.

Load project:
With this option you can load a project or a media file. Please note that to load a project
fully, all of the files associated with the project must be loaded along with it.
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X will search for all used sounds and video files in the folders in which
they were located when the move was saved.

Save project:
The current project will be saved under the name you specify for it. If you have not yet
specified a name for your project, a dialog will open asking you to do so.
Note: The project file contains all information about the used media files, cuts, effects,
and titles, but not the picture and sound material itself. This is always contained in the
recorded or imported media files, which remains unchanged during editing with
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X. In order to save a movie in its own folder, e.g. for use on another
PC, go to "File > Backup" and use the function "Copy film and media to folder".

Lower toolbar

The lower toolbar is located above the project window.

Undo:
This command allows you to undo the last changes made. This way, it's no problem if you
want to try out critical operations. If you don't like the result, you can always revert to
the previous state using "Undo".
Right-clicking the button opens a list of changes made so far, allowing you to undo
several changes made in sequence.
Note: You can adjust the length of the list to your needs in program settings. A general
rule: The longer the list, the more RAM is used.

Redo:
This function undoes the previous "Undo" function.
Right-clicking on the arrow next to the button opens a list of changes made so far,
allowing you to restore several undo actions made in sequence.

53 / 313
 'Edit' interface

Delete objects:
This command deletes the selected objects.

Title Editor:
Opens the title editor for the selected title object.

Set chapter markers:

Places a chapter marker at the position of the playback marker. This creates a chapter
entry in the disc menu in case the movie is being burned to disc. You can rename the
chapter markers by right clicking and selecting "Rename" in the context menu. The new
name will also appear in the chapter menu.

Set snap markers:

1. To set a snap marker, select an object and place the playback marker at the position
where you want to place the snap marker.
2. Now click on the button "Set snap marker".
You can move a snap marker with the mouse using drag & drop.
Find more information about the topic of snap markers in the "Snap markers and
transients" chapter.

Object grid:
Use this button to switch the object grid on and off. When the object grid is switched on,
the objects snap into place beside one another so that everything fits in seamlessly.

Group objects:
All selected objects are assigned to a group which may then be selected and edited jointly
by clicking the mouse.

Ungroup objects:
This command splits an object group into separate objects.

54 / 313
 'Edit' interface

Paste modes:
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X offers various modes for inserting new objects from the Media
Pool. It can be toggled by right clicking on the icon.
Before inserting new files, the insert mode should be checked or set.
There are multiple possibilities for using the modes, which are better described under
Insert objects in the project".
Automatic application:
This inserts the currently selected object from the Media Pool or the project temp folder
and/or the selected area in the source monitor in the project. Video and image objects
will always be placed behind the last object into the first track, audio and text objects are
separated into different tracks.
Single track ripple:
This adds the selected object from the Media Pool, project temp folder, or from the
selected area of the source monitor to the position on the selected track where the
playback marker is located while moving the objects located behind it on the track.
l In contrast to automatic insertion, in a single-track ripple all objects are inserted at
the position of the playback marker. The objects on the target track are
automatically moved back on the track behind the inserted object. Bordering tracks
are unchanged.
l If another object is found at the playback marker position, then it will be cut and
continued at the end of the inserted object (so that the inserted object can start
exactly at the point of insertion).
Multitrack ripple:
This adds the selected object from the Media Pool or the project temp folder (or from the
selected area in the source monitor, respectively) to the selected track at the position of
the playback marker. All objects located on other tracks will be split at the playback
marker position and media from that point on will be moved down the length of the
inserted object.
l Objects located further along on all tracks will also be moved further down.
l In contrast to automatic insertion, the object will be inserted at the position of the
playback marker.
Swap:
This replaces the object selected in the project with the object selected in the Media
Pool, the project temp folder, or from the selected area in the source monitor

55 / 313
 'Edit' interface

respectively. Should the new object have a different length, all subsequent objects will be
shifted accordingly.
Overwrite:
This overwrites the project at the position of the playback marker on the selected track
with the currently selected object from the Media Pool or the project temp folder and/or
from the selected area in the source monitor.
Note: Unlike in "Exchange" mode, this will not cause ripple and existing objects will be
overwritten.

Note on track selection for paste modes: Pasting to a destination track (by clicking on
the track header) is possible in single track ripple, multitrack ripple and overwrite
modes. If no track has been selected, the destination track will be selected automatically.

Mouse mode for single objects:

The mouse mode for single objects is the preset mouse mode that is used the most often.
Left clicking selects an object. Holding down the mouse button moves the selected
object. Right clicking opens the context menu.

Mouse mode for single track:

This mouse mode behaves similar to the mouse mode "All tracks". When moving objects,
only those objects will be moved that are located on the same track after the selected
object.

Mouse modes for all tracks:

This mouse mode behaves similar to "Object" mouse mode. However, when objects are
moved, all of the objects behind the selected object are also moved.
The complete background component of the project, i.e., all objects and gaps on all
tracks, will therefore be maintained during any movement.
This is useful for moving a complete project, e.g. to insert new opening credits or to close
gaps.

Additional mouse modes in Timeline mode:

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X offers additional mouse modes for different kinds of editing. A
right-click opens the list.
Stretch:

56 / 313
 'Edit' interface

This special mode enables the length of objects to be adjusted. The object is played back
completely and the playback speed is adjusted to the stretched object length.
Video objects are therefore accelerated or decelerated accordingly. Audio objects are
stretched or pinched via timestretching, but without creating any changes to the pitch
itself.
Note: If you want to animate the object with effects curves, then the option "Connect
curve length with object length" should also be set.

Curve:
This mouse mode is used especially for drawing effects curves.
Effects curves control the level of the effect: The higher the curve point is, the more
intense the respective effect parameter will be at this position. These may be used for
the video and image objects of the image tracks as well as for the audio objects of the
sound tracks.
More information about this can be found in the chapter "Animating objects".
Preview:
This mode allows you to preview audio objects (as long as the mouse button is held
down) In this mode, objects cannot be moved or changed.
Move object contents:
The content of a selected object can be moved in this mode.
Objects are references to media files. As long as an object is only a clip and not the entire
footage of a file, the selected clip can be adjusted afterwards without changing the object
or its position in the track. This is helpful for advanced arrangements, for example, when
using a set framework of objects.
Split and trim:
Enable this mode to cut and trim objects at the cursor position.
You can do this in the following way:
If the mode is active, position the mouse over the object that should be edited. The
current frame, over which the mouse pointer is located in the object, is shown in the
program monitor to aid in editing.
Left click the mouse to cut the object at the mouse pointer's position.
If you also would like to trim the object, simply hold the mouse button. Move the mouse
to the left or right to trim the object on the left or right.

Cut button:
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X offers various editing functions. A right-click opens the list.

57 / 313
 'Edit' interface

Hint: If the commands "Split" and "Remove beginning/end" are applied without a
selection, all objects at the position of the playback marker are cut.

Split:
This command cuts a selected scene at the point where the playback marker is
positioned. Two independent objects are created.
Remove beginning:
This command cuts a selected scene in two at the point where the playback marker is
positioned and removes the first part.
Remove end:
This command cuts a selected scene in two at the point where the playback marker is
positioned and removes the second part.
Hint: If the commands "Split" and "Remove beginning/end" are applied without a
selection, all objects at the position of the playback marker are cut.

Remove scene:
This command allows you to completely remove selected objects. The parts that follow
will be automatically moved to the end of the object in front of the object to be removed.
Split movie:
Splits movie at the playback marker position into two sections within one project. These
can be individually controlled using the "Window" menu or the button "Select movie for
editing" (see above).

Mute and scrubbing:

This button mutes the sound output. Clicking the triangle provides access to settings
for scrubbing and selection of the audio track for multiple audio tracks.

Mixer:

This option can be used to open and close the mixer. Further information can be
found in the "Mixer" chapter.

Project folder
The project temp folder is a point for collecting all the files needed for the project as well
as all movies contained in the project. Entries that are used in the current project are
indicated with a small red mark.
The project temp folder is an essential tool for organizational tasks:

58 / 313
 'Edit' interface

l Footage storage: Files from the Media Pool can be combined in the project temp
folder before loading them from there into the project.
l Organization: The contained objects can be freely renamed and a description can
be added to each object. A virtual folder makes it possible to easily sort objects
according to your criteria.
l Search: A certain character string can be searched using the search box. This takes
entries under "Name" and "Description" into account.
l Edit: You can trim different sections from longer videos directly from the project
temp folder and then use them as separate objects in a movie or save them as new
entries in the project temp folder.
l Replace: Finished objects can be dragged from the project window to the project
temp folder. The project temp folder can be saved so it can be used in other
projects.

Opens the import dialog As an alternative to drag & drop from the Media
Pool, this dialog enables one or more files to be loaded into the project
temp folder.

Save or load the entire project temp folder here in order to use it in other
projects.

This adds a virtual folder to the project temp folder. Additional sub-folders
can be added to a folder.

This button accesses the next highest folder level.

Search: MAGIX VIDEO PRO X searches through all file names in the project temp
folder for the text entered and then lists the results.

59 / 313
 'Edit' interface

The display mode is set here. This determines how the entries will be listed
in the project temp folder, i.e., Details, List, Large icons, etc.

Detailed view: The detailed view can be customized:

l When clicking on a column, MAGIX VIDEO PRO X sorts the entries according to this
column.
l Repeated clicking on a column reverses the order of the entries.
l When a column is clicked on and dragged, it moves to the corresponding position.
l If an area between columns is clicked on and dragged, the width of the column that
lies before it is changed.
List view: All entries of a project temp folder are listed in the list view. The entries are
sorted according to their names in ascending order.
Each entry has a thumbnail. With video objects, the first frame is used as the thumbnail.
The following information is displayed: Name; vertical and horizontal resolution
(combination objects, video objects, and image objects only); frame rate (combination
objects and video objects only); aspect ratio (image objects only); sampling rate and bit
depth (audio objects only); and length.
Large icon: This view only displays the thumbnails. Title objects and audio objects
contain a corresponding icon graph. For video objects, the first frame of the video is
displayed. The size of the thumbnail is variable and can be set using the slider.

Functionality of the project temp folder

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X automatically creates entries in the following cases:
l Each film in the project is always displayed in the project temp folder.
l Each object that is dragged to the project window when loading a file creates and
entry in the project temp folder.
You can...
l add additional manual entries,
l remove unnecessary entries,
l rename existing entries,
l add metadata to existing entries,
l create a virtual folder.

Entries
The project temp folder supports all object types present in the MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.

60 / 313
 'Edit' interface

Objects that are dragged from the project window to the project temp folder are saved
with all settings in the project temp folder. This also includes the keyframe animation of
effects in these objects.
In addition, all movies in the project appear as entries in the project temp folder. This
makes it possible to use movies as separate objects.

Drag & drop functionality

The project temp folder supports drag & drop in both directions:
l From the project temp folder:
l to the project
l to the source monitor (playback and trim)
l To the project temp folder:
l Files from the Media Pool
l Objects or object groups from the movie
l Trimmed material from the source monitor

Quick functions
If the mouse pointer is located above a project temp folder entry, the following quick
functions are displayed:

The selected entry is played back in the source monitor.

The selected entry can be played back and trimmed in the source monitor.

The selected entry can be applied to the current movie. Please keep in
mind that the behavior of MAGIX VIDEO PRO X depends on which insert
mode has been set.

Virtual folder
In addition to the entries, you can enter as many virtual folders as you wish in the project
temp folder. A virtual folder cannot contain other virtual folders.
Virtual orders are used to sort project temp folder entries. For example, previously edited
and unedited material can be easily kept separate.

61 / 313
 'Edit' interface

Filling the project temp folder

Placing material directly in the project temp folder

1. Select the desired media files in the Media Pool.
2. Drag your selection to the project temp folder.
Result: All the selected media files will be added to the project temp folder as
individual entries.

Roughly edit the material and place in the project temp folder
1. Select a media file from the Media Pool.
2. Trim this media file in the source monitor.
3. Click on the image in the source monitor and drag it to the project temp folder.
Result: The range of the media file will be added as a new entry in the project temp
folder.
Note: You can also drag the image from the source monitor directly from a virtual folder
to the project temp folder. The entry is directly added to this virtual folder.

4. Repeat the procedure from step 2 for each additional section of this media file.
5. Repeat the entire procedure for each additional media file.

Placing objects from a movie in the project temp folder

Note: All media files added to a movie appear automatically as an entry in the project
temp folder.

1. Select one or more objects in the movie. You can also select a group.
2. If you want to copy the selected objects to the project temp folder: Press and hold
the Ctrl key and drag the selection to the project temp folder.
Result: All selected objects will be added as individual entries in the project temp
folder. The objects in the film remain unchanged.
3. If you want to move the selected objects: Drag the selection to the project temp
folder.
Result: All selected objects will be added as individual entries in the project temp
folder. The objects in the movie are removed.

62 / 313
 'Edit' interface

Using the project temp folder as a source

Using entries from the project temp folder in the movie

1. Select one or more entries in the project temp folder.
Note: Use the quick functions for the preview. The current selection does not
change when using the quick functions.
2. Drag the selection to the desired position in the movie.
Result: All selected entries appear in the movie in succession as individual objects.
The order corresponds to their order in the project temp folder.

Trimming entries from the project temp folder and using them in a movie
1. Select the desired entry and drag it to the source monitor.
2. Trim the range in the source monitor.
3. Drag the image from the source monitor to the move or use the insert modes.
Result: The trimmed section becomes an object in the desired position in the
movie.

Using the project temp folder as a source and target

1. In order to maintain a good overview, create a virtual folder in the project temp
folder and call it, for example, "previously trimmed".
2. Load the entry from the project temp folder to the source monitor in order to trim
it.
3. Trim the entry in the source monitor.
4. Drag the image from the source monitor in the project temp folder directly to the
virtual folder that was created called "previously trimmed".
5. Repeat the procedure from step 3 for each additional section you want to use.
6. Repeat the procedure from step 2 for each additional entry that you want to
previously trim.
Result: All trimmed sections are now contained in the virtual folder "previously
trimmed".

63 / 313
 Settings and Managing video projects

Settings and Managing video projects

Film and project settings
When you create a new video project, you can make settings for the new project already
in the start dialog. You can change these later at any time. All settings dialogs may be
accessed via "File > Settings".
Open the movie settings via "File > Settings > Movie..."

Movie settings
Play movie in loop mode: The movie will be played back endlessly. Playback starts at
the playback marker and after reaching the end of the project will restart at its beginning.
Use current settings as presets for new movies: If this option is activated, all new
movies will receive the settings that you have chosen in this dialog.
Crop new images to fit the screen automatically: Fits all images and videos inserted
into the project automatically so that they fit the screen.
Automatically create proxy files:Using proxy/preview rendering, you can render
complicated sections of your project in advance in order to produce a smooth preview.
You can start this feature in the context menu of the marker bar. More about this is
available in the "Proxy editing" section.
Number of tracks: Here you can change the number of tracks.
Audio sample rate: The preset sample rate is 48 kHz. This sample rate is used for all
recordings and is also the standard setting for DVD audio tracks. With this setting,
optimum sound quality is guaranteed. Audio material at different sample rates (e.g. CD
audio with 44 kHz) is automatically converted when loaded (resampling). Only change
this value if you want to use audio with a different sample rate or if your sound card does
not support this sample rate.
Note: The audio sample rate can only be changed in empty projects. When an object is
added to the project, this setting is locked.

Video settings: You can select the standard settings for the picture format and frame
rate for PAL or NTSC images or for your own format. Make sure that the entries for
aspect ratio and frame rate correspond to your target format so that your finished movie
will play smoothly on the intended screen, no undesired black strips are seen, and all
video/image objects are in their correct positions.
Note: MPEG encoding requires a width/height ratio that is divisible by 8.

64 / 313
 Settings and Managing video projects

Synchronization
Note: A description for all the synchronization dialog's control elements is provided here.
A description of how the synchronization is set can be found under "Synchronization with
external devices".

Input synchronization active

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X is configured as a slave and follows the MIDI timecode, which is
received from the set MIDI device.
Device: The driver on which MAGIX VIDEO PRO X receives MIDI timecodes can be
configured here. If you use a MIDI interface with an SMPTE input, set the port of the
SMPTE input.
Frame rate: Specify here the corresponding SMPTE frame rate, e.g. 24 for cinematic
films, 25 for PAL video and audio synchronization, 29.97 drop/non drop, or 30 for NTSC
video.
Pre-roll: Here you can enter a frame number that MAGIX VIDEO PRO X will ignore
before synchronization starts. This takes into account the fact that analog devices
normally require a certain amount of time before they reach the correct speed. In order
to prevent synchronization of MAGIX VIDEO PRO X to an invalid time, this can be skipped
by means of preroll frames.
Output synchronization active
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X is configured as the master and sends the MIDI timecode on the
selected MIDI device.
Device: The driver on which the MAGIX VIDEO PRO X> sends MIDI timecodes is set
here. If you use a MIDI interface with an SMPTE output, set the port of the SMPTE
output.
Start offset (SMPTE): Here, you can specify a period in milliseconds or in SMPTE frames
to be deducted from the incoming MIDI timecode before the time is applied for
synchronization. With an offset of 60:00:00 (1 hour), you can therefore synchronize a
tape with an SMPTE code that starts at 1 hour; MAGIX VIDEO PRO X will still start at 0 at
the tape beginning.
Send/receive MMC fullframe
Settings for remote control via MIDI Machine Control. MAGIX VIDEO PRO X supports the
control of external devices or through external devices through MMC.
With activated output synchronization (MAGIX VIDEO PRO X is master), additional MMC
commands are sent. If the input synchronization option (MAGIX VIDEO PRO X is slave) is
activated, MAGIX VIDEO PRO X receives MMC commands.

65 / 313
 Settings and Managing video projects

Movie information
This option opens an information window:
Name: Here you can enter the name of the current movie.
Date of creation: Displays the time the movie was created.
Last changed: Displays the time of the last save.
Number of used objects: Displays the number of all objects in the movie.
Used files: All files used in the movie are listed here.

Project settings
You can change project settings here. A project can consist of multiple movies and is
saved as an MVP file.
Name and path: Displays the name of the movie and the location where it is stored on
the computer.
Description: Here you can give your project a description – perhaps a few statements
about the state of the editing progress, etc. This is something like a notepad function.
Date: Here you can assign your project a specific date. You can choose between a date –
e.g. "December 25, 2020" - or a written description – e.g. "Christmas 2020".
Preview: This is the preview in a file manager such as Windows Explorer. You can use
the automatic selection for the preview image or choose an image from your hard drive.
You can also use a preview image from movie project.
Select preview image automatically: MAGIX VIDEO PRO X uses an automatically
selected preview image.
Use image file: With a mouse click on the folder button you can open a dialog for loading
image files. In this dialog you can navigate to the folder where the image file is found and
select it with a double click.
Use preview image from film: Select a frame from a film using the slider.

Proxy and preview rendering

The proxy/preview rendering settings affect the way in which MAGIX VIDEO PRO X
renders selected ranges in the project window. This dialog can be accessed through File >
Settings > Proxy and preview rendering.
The proxy and preview rendering function enables smooth preview playback by
rendering complicated passages in the project in advance. You can start this feature in

66 / 313
 Settings and Managing video projects

the context menu of the marker bar. More details are available in the "Preview rendering"
section.

Presets: Choose a preset that is suitable for your project. The rendered files will have a
correspondingly higher or lower quality, and the quality of the preview will be
determined.
l Playback: The lowest quality. Preview rendering should only be used for improved
performance during playback in the program and not during export or burning. This
is the default setting.
l DVD export: Playback in the program will be smoother and writing standard video
DVDs will be faster.
l HD export: Playback in the program will be smoother and writing Blu-ray/AVCHD
will be faster.
l Manual settings: This dialog includes the Format settings. You can specify here
which format should be used to render a set range. Advanced settings enables you
to adjust the selected format to suit your own particular requirements. Your own
custom presets can be saved for future projects.
Options:
l Use files created during rendering for export and burning: If the resolution of
the rendered files is sufficient for the finished movie, you can use them for the final
export. This shortens the time required for creating the movie.
This function is set as default when you select presets for DVD or HD export, since
quality is also optimized for export.
You cannot select this setting if you have activated the option "Best performance
during playback".
l Extract audio when creating proxy files: In addition to the proxy files for videos,
separate audio files (*.wav) are created in order to improve playback performance.
l Create Stereo3D files for preview rendering: You can also view the preview in
3D.

67 / 313
 Settings and Managing video projects

Note: Rendering may take longer depending on the selected format and size of the set
range.

Cleaning Wizard
The Cleaning Wizard helps delete disc images and entire projects from the hard drive,
including all of the media files used.
Use this function to free up disk space for future projects.
Caution: If the files you used in the film (such as trailers, opening music, etc.) are ones
you have used in other films, you should make copies of these files beforehand.

Delete certain files: Choose this option if you would like to select certain files for
deletion. In the file selection dialog, you can select the desired files. In the next step, the
Cleaning Wizard searches for other files which belong to your selection. Using this
method you can delete an entire movie with all of its accompanying media, help, project,
and backup files. Before deleting the files, you will receive relevant information in a
dialog and be asked to confirm deletion.
Find and delete unnecessary files: Choose this option if you want to find unnecessary
files or free up some space on your hard drive. The Cleaning Wizard then automatically
looks for extraneous files created while using MAGIX VIDEO PRO X that are no longer
needed. Before deleting the files, you will receive relevant information in a dialog and be
asked to confirm deletion.
Under Advanced you can define which files and folders should be included in the
cleaning process.

Start dialog
Presets for the project can be defined in the start dialog.
Note: These settings have no effect on the internal processing quality and can be changed
at any time by going to "File > Settings > Movie".

68 / 313
 Settings and Managing video projects

New Project Wizard

Project name: Choose a name for the new project.
Project folder: Select a location for saving the project.
Film settings: Standard film settings are included here in a range of categories.
Recommended presets appear for whatever category you choose. However, you can set
whatever frame rate you want regardless of the presets. The film settings now also
include presets for social media. This makes importing and editing square or portrait
videos easy.
Open movie settings: Check the box here if you want to view the movie settings and
adjust them. When you click on Create project, the "Project/movie settings" opens.
Copy media to project folder: Activate this option to save a copy of all files imported to
the project in the project folder so that they can be opened here in future for editing.
This option is meant to keep things centralized when files from various media devices
(e.g. hard drives, USB flash drives, SD cards) are being used in the same project. The
internal hard drive is the best option for working on projects in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X
because it allows faster access to files compared to external storage devices. If files
stored on external devices are used, this can lead to slow performance and lag while
editing. Storing on the internal drive also ensures that you can access all project files for
editing.
Load project
Here you can select and load a previously saved project.

Program settings
All basic settings for MAGIX VIDEO PRO X are made in program settings. Open the
program settings by going to "File" > "Settings" > "Program...".

Playback
Audio playback
Driver selectionHere you can specify whether the Windows Wave driver or the
DirectSound driver will be used for audio playback.
l WAV drivers are recommended if the CPU load is higher, as the larger buffers allow
better handling of the load peaks (otherwise this would cause crackling).
l DirectSound is a component of DirectX and, if necessary, is installed together with
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X. DirectSound has the advantage that the sound output (for all

69 / 313
 Settings and Managing video projects

modern sound cards or onboard soundchips) can also be used by other programs
open simultaneously.
Output device: Use this option to specify which sound card plays the wave audio
objects. This is especially important if you have multiple sound cards installed on your
computer, e.g. "onboard sound" as well as an additional sound card.
Audio buffer: In order to allow smooth playback of a complex project, MAGIX VIDEO 
PRO X creates a RAM data buffer into which the current data is loaded. This allows for
step-by-step preprocessing instead of preprocessing for the entire project.
l Number of buffers: Here you can specify how many buffers should be used. More
buffers increase reliability and improve playback performance, but they also
increase the memory requirements. When playback goes through DirectSound,
only one buffer is used automatically.
Note: As a rule, if response and loading times are too slow, reduce the number and size
of the buffers. Otherwise, increase the buffer size if you are still having problems with
playback performance. Since error-free playback is usually more important than fast
reaction times, the buffer size should be raised to 16384 or 32768 to avoid drop-outs.
The possible number of used buffer updates is between 2 and 10.
l Multitrack size/Preview size: Specify the buffer size used to play the entire
project or for previewing waves in the file manager.

Video playback
Overload prevention for realtime playback: Here you can activate or deactivate
overload prevention during realtime playback of the project. This feature is particularly
suitable for lower performance PCs.
Instant cache refresh in Multicam Mode: Activate this mode to empty the cache in
short intervals which will make the preview for multicam editing immediately visible in
the preview monitor. This may result in juddering during playback.
Number of tracks for parallel track optimization: It makes sense to limit the number
of tracks when the program is running low on disk space and the project has multiple
videos in parallel.

Arranger
Autoscroll during playback: If autoscroll is activated, the screen view automatically
shifts when the playback marker reaches the right edge of the screen, which is useful for
longer arrangements. You can select the size of the scrolling steps from either "Fast"
(whole pages) or "Slow" (half pages).

70 / 313
 Settings and Managing video projects

Note: Scrolling requires constant recalculation of the screen view which may lead to
interrupted playback if system RAM is too low. If this happens, simply deactivate the
autoscroll feature.

Update in background: The update of the object display after move and zoom
operations in the project window is performed in the background in order to let you work
smoothly.
Spacebar function: You can set whether the playback marker returns to its original
position or stays at its current place when playback is stopped with the spacebar.

Image playback
Load image material in background: Activate this option in order to load inserted image
material already before playback in background.

Folders
Here you can set the path where...
l you can save your projects (Projects),
l you want to store the exported or imported files and recordings,
l your downloads are saved,
l disc images are saved,
l where editors for audio, image and menu editing are found, which should be
opened by default,
l and where the VST plug-ins are installed.

Video/Audio
This tab contains all setting options for video and audio files.

Video standard
Normally, the right video standard is set up automatically. PAL is used in Europe; the
United States and Japan use NTSC.

timeline
Simple display of video objects (first and last image): Activate this function if you are
having performance problems. The preview images of a video in the project window will
only be displayed at the beginning and end of the video.

71 / 313
 Settings and Managing video projects

Half waveform display: Half of the waveform display (upper part) is enough for audio
editing. This is the default setting. For more detailed, professional audio editing, you can
display the complete waveform.
Video/Audio on one track: Activate this option if you want imported video footage to
be displayed as one object with video and audio on one track. You can always use the
options in the object menu to put the video and audio on separate tracks later to edit
them individually.
Display guidelines: If needed, you can display guidelines in the project window. The
spacing between guidelines is adjusted to the zoom factor set in the project window.
Audio -6 dB on import: When you load a file containing audio material (sound), the
loudness of the generated object will be set to -6 dB. This is particularly useful when
playing back several objects that contain audio material at the same time. This reduces
the risk of undesirable clipping. Object loudness can be edited at any time.

Import
Automatically create frame table during import: Sometimes, rebuilding a frame table
can get rid of problems in certain MPEG files. For example, problems can arise if the
navigation (positioning of the playback marker, transport) is bumpy or doesn't function at
all. Normally, when loading MPEG video, a frame table is not created in order to speed up
the loading process. If you do create one anyway, MPEG files are normally noticeably
faster and easier to edit.
Automatically create waveform when importing: Select this option to automatically
create a waveform display for the audio track. This can also be created at any time via the
context menu.
Import videos with audio: If a video file contains video and audio data, the audio track
of the video will also be imported if this option is activated. It will be displayed as a
combination object in the project together with the video. If you want to edit or replace
the audio track later, you must first display the video and audio object on separate tracks
(context menu "Audio functions" > "Video/Audio on separate tracks". Audio and video
objects are grouped to synchronize sound and image, if you want to edit the audio or
video separately, you have to first remove this grouping ("Ungroup" button in the toolbar
or via the "Edit" menu).
Standard display time: Specify how long an image in the project should be displayed
before moving to the next object.
Note: Adding transitions between the objects will reduce the actual display time. If you
plan on using transitions, it is best not to set the display time too short.

72 / 313
 Settings and Managing video projects

Trim videos: Sometimes video clips have damaged frames at the beginning or end. Most
often these are green, black or incomplete. Here you have the option of automatically
trimming your videos during import if your footage constantly has damaged frames.
Specify how many images (frames) should be trimmed at the beginning and the end of
the video.
Note: The frames are not lost due to the shortening. By adjusting the object length in the
project window you can make the trimmed frames reappear.

System
Program interface
Dialogs: When newly installed, MAGIX VIDEO PRO X displays a number of messages in
various parts of the program. Each of them can be switched off by clicking the small box
at the bottom that says "Don't show this message again". To display these warning
messages, select the "Reactivate dialogs" option. "Hide news" enables current messages
concerning MAGIX VIDEO PRO X to be deactivated, and the screen can also be set to
darken when dialogs are displayed.

Undo/Redo
Here you can set the maximum number of steps the "Undo" function can have. Please
note that memory requirement increases with the number of steps the program must
save.

Other
Automatic preview when changing transitions: When this option is activated, a short
preview of the transition effect will be quickly played between the two objects you
selected.
Move playback marker when selecting objects: This option automatically moves the
playback marker to the beginning of the selected object.
Send usage data to MAGIX: Anonymous data is sent to MAGIX for improving product
quality. This option can be deactivated here.

Save automatically
Here you can set up an automatic backup function, which saves the project as a backup
file with an "MV_" (instead of the normal project file "MVD") in the project folder. You
can choose whether or not your project should be backed up and at what intervals this
will take place.

73 / 313
 Settings and Managing video projects

Display options
Video output to external device
Activate video playback: With this option, you can display the project window view on
an additionally connected monitor. Without additional hardware, you can play a preview
in any mode in order to see how the final material looks.

Preview in the Arranger/preview window and playback in video

recorder/analog recording
You can set the playback mode separately for the project window (including all preview
windows and effects dialogs) and the program monitors during recording and in the video
recorder.
Video mode:
Hardware acceleration (Direct3D) is the default setting and as a rule should not be
changed, since it delivers the best results. If you notice problems, such as the image
turning black, you can try to see if picking another mode helps. The Compatibility mode
(VideoForWindows) completely turns hardware acceleration off, which should deliver the
best results. However, it is also the slowest mode and can result in choppy playback.
These options are irrelevant for data export or disc burning.
Note: Only change the video mode when there are problems with the presets, e.g.
choppiness or lengthy screen distortion.

l Standard mode (hardware acceleration, Direct 3D): This mode offers an extreme
speed advantage by letting the graphics card directly calculate mixing, many effects
and various transitions. Depending on the graphics card, performance can increase
by 300%. The graphics card is not used during export. If you activate this mode and
have multiple graphics cards installed, you can also select which graphics card
should be used.
Compatibility mode (Video for Windows): This is the standard mode that functions on
all systems.
Important: To use this mode the graphics card must have at least 128 MB memory
available. You'll need to install Direct 3D 9 or higher. The graphics card driver must
support "High Level Pixel Shader Language 2.0". MAGIX VIDEO PRO X checks the
corresponding properties when this mode is selected, and switches it off if necessary.

Realistic color conversion for monitors: Image formation takes place in the vertical
blank intervals of the monitor signal (or the connected TV signal). This helps avoid image
interruptions.

74 / 313
 Settings and Managing video projects

For digital displays like the TFT monitors you can deactivate the option.
Output on monitors in with higher bit depth: If this option is activated, you can display
video material with higher bit depth on an appropriate monitor in higher bit depths.
Because most monitors don't yet support output in higher bit depth, this option is off by
default.
Use dithering for output: Dithering improves display for color gradients and avoids
typical output errors (color lines), that appear as a result of bit depth reduction. To put it
differently: Dithering preserves the advantages of recording in higher bit depth when
displaying in normal 8-bit depth. You should therefore deactivate this option only in case
of problems.
Deinterlacing: In the DirectShow modes "Overlay Mixer" and "Video Mixing Renderer
9", you can activate hardware de-interlacing with your graphics card. For general
information about de-interlacing and the options "Top/bottom field first", please read the
corresponding article "De-interlacing" in the manual.
Comparison image during effects editing in the Media Pool: If this option is activated,
the "Selected objects without effects" comparison mode will be automatically activated
when switching into the Media Pool effects, and will be automatically deactivated when
the mode is exited. This serves to compare the original and edited image. This automation
will be suppressed if the option is deactivated.

Import/Export
Hardware Acceleration
Use hardware acceleration during playback where possible: Here you can enable
hardware acceleration as default during playback if your system supports it.
Hardware encoding during export where possible: Here you can enable hardware
acceleration as default during export if your system supports it.

Others
Automatically preview exported clips: This option starts the clip immediately after
exporting for verification.
Import Formats
File formats that you never use can be de-selected here. Once de-selected they will no
longer be imported. Please keep in mind that several import modules exist for some file
types (AVI, WMA); MAGIX VIDEO PRO X uses the fastest one in each case. If you
experience problems when importing certain files, you can experiment with deactivation

75 / 313
 Settings and Managing video projects

of certain import modules and therefore force MAGIX VIDEO PRO X to use the slower
but more compatible import module.

Project management
The Edit area can be used for creating films and also for managing your projects, i.e. here
you can sort the order of the movies, add new movies, remove existing movies from the
project or rename the movies.
Each film in a current project can be controlled through its own tab above the tracks.

To rename, sort, load or delete movies, the easiest way is to right-click on one of the tabs.
You can then select the action you want from the context menu that appears.

Backup copies
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X lets you quickly and easily create backup copies of your entire
project (including all video objects, all effects, etc.). We recommend making regular
backups, especially when working with very large projects. Doing this will allow you to
return to "old" versions of your project if, for example, your hard drive crashes or there's
a problem with your project. This function can be found in the "File" menu.

Copying movies, or project and media into folder...

With this feature, you can put a complete MAGIX VIDEO PRO X arrangement, including
all applied multimedia files, into one folder. This is especially useful when you wish to
reuse or archive such a project later on or when the files can be found on multiple CDs so
that on loading you continually have to change CDs. Furthermore, the effect files used
are saved in one folder with the other files.

76 / 313
 Settings and Managing video projects

If you select the option, "Copy disc project, movies, and media in folder", all movies in
the current disc project, including all of the related media, are put together, and then
copied into the selected folder.
Hint: <Programmname> also features DV logging. You no longer need (under the
circumstances) to save large DV-AVI and audio files, since MAGIX VIDEO PRO X saves the
position of this material on the DV tape and imports missing files automatically when
reloading the DV tape.

A dialog opens where you can specify the path and name of the video.
-> Keyboard shortcut

Restore project from video disc

This command restores a project backup that has been saved on a disc.
To do this, in the "Burn"interface, go to "Burn DVD" > "Add files..." and select and add 
the back up project. -> Burn to disc.
You can choose which of the movies contained on the disc should be restored by
selecting it in the list. You also need to indicate the folder where the project should be
saved. A subfolder "Backupxx" will be created in this folder where all project files from
the disc will be saved. All of the restored movies will be loaded into MAGIX VIDEO PRO X
for editing.
If you select the option Restore image files only only the original image files contained
on the disc are restored.

77 / 313
 Record

Record
Select the recording method

To start recording, click on the "Record" button under the program monitor. The
following selections are possible in the dialog window:

l AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra cameras, but also for digital cameras or video DSLR

featuring a memory card or hard drive as well as a P2 memory card for XDCAM.
This option may also be used to import media from removable storage devices, USB
devices, or hard drives as a clearly laid-out alternative to the Media Pool.
l Audio For microphones, cassette recorders, MiniDisc players, turntables, etc.
l Screen Records directly from the computer monitor.
l Single frame For single and series images from analog video cameras, analog TV,
VHS recorders, webcams, etc.
l HDV camera For HDV cameras
l DV cameras For mini DV cameras and DV video recorders
l Analog For analog video cameras, analog TV, VHS recorders, webcams, etc.

AVCHD / DVCPRO / AVC-Intra

This option accesses a universal import dialog that is not only suitable for AVCHD,
DVCPRO, or AVC-Intra cameras, but also for external hard drives, P2 memory cards,
photo and movie cameras that contain usable files. MAGIX VIDEO PRO X automatically
recognizes the folder structures and shows only individual takes, making import
convenient and easy.
Alternatively, these drives may also be controlled directly via the Media Pool. The import
dialog also features its own display filters and additional options for convenience.

78 / 313
 Record

If a less powerful computer is used, it may be helpful to transform AVCHD files upon
import to a MPEG-2 format. A corresponding query appears during importing of these
files.
Note: DVCPRO and AVC-Intra import is optional and must be activated subject to a
charge.

Note: When importing AVCHD videos it is necessary to activate the MPEG-4 codec and
download an audio package upgrade if necessary. MAGIX VIDEO PRO X offers this option
as soon as a codec is required.

Tip: The AVCHD import dialog is basically a universal import dialog, appropriate for
external hard drives, photo or video cameras, containing usable files. If you find the
display filters useful for your camera as well, nothing stands in the way of connecting the
camera to the computer and then activating AVCHD recording in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.

Connect Your Camera

Note: Refer to the camera's instruction manual for the proper procedure.

Import
The option AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra does not produce a recording as such, but it
makes it possible to transfer already created video files and their integration into the
existing project.
After selecting the import, the following dialogue will open:

Video source: Here you specify the hard drive that will be used to access the storage
medium or connected camera.

Save in following folder: Create a target folder for the files to be imported.

Advanced settings: Adjust various settings for the name and date of the files to be
created.

79 / 313
 Record

Select: This offers self-explanatory options for file display ("all", "only new", or
"none").

Preview monitor and transport control: Here you can play back, rewind or fast
forward clips in the file list.

Medium/General: An info area for the files is provided to the right next to the
preview monitor.

Options for displaying files, here you can also specify the criteria which will be used
to sort the files.

File list: The contents of the selected drive are shown here. Use the display filters
(10) to reduce the types of files shown. You can select every file separately using the
little check boxes in order to import them later.
Note: The files are color-coded. The same colors indicate roughly the same recording
times, so that you can quickly recognize which recordings were made at the same time.
Color assignments come with a certain "intelligence", which means they take into account
how far apart the displayed recordings are chronologically.

Import: Imports the selected file to the target folder.

Cancel: Closes the dialog without importing.

Display filter: The display filter can be used to define whether certain files should be
hidden.
When you uncheck a box, the corresponding files will be hidden.
l Videos: Hides all video files.
l Photos: Hide all photo files.
l Selected files: All files selected for import will be hidden. Only the files which have
not been selected will be displayed.
l Not selected files: All files which have not been selected will be hidden. This is
useful if you want to check your selection before importing.
l Imported files: All files which have already been imported by MAGIX VIDEO PRO X
from the specified device will be hidden.
Import options: Here you can define what happens after importing.
l Insert into movie: The media will be directly inserted as an object into the open
movie. When inactive, they will be simply copied into the target folder and can be
selected from the Media Pool at any time.

80 / 313
 Record

l Delete all media after camera import: This option deletes the selected media
after importing from the camera.
l Close dialog after import: The dialog closes as soon as the import has finished.

HDV Camera
Use this option to open the HDV camcorder record dialog. For this option, you need to
connect an HDV camcorder.

The options in this dialog can also be found above in DV recording.

DV Camera
Connect a DV or HDV camera
l Connect the digital output of the switched-off camera with the computer's DV
interface (also called FireWire or iLink).
l Insert a DV cassette or the storage device into the camera.
l Switch your camera’s operating mode to "Video recorder" or "Playback".
The camera is now ready to transfer video to the computer.
Note: You may also use a HDV camera in DV mode to, for example, transfer recordings in
the old DV format.Note: You may also use a HDV camera in DV mode to, for example,
transfer recordings in the old DV format. Problems have been noted with this mode in
many cameras, therefore it is recommended that the Record mode of the camera is also
switched to DV, switching the camera off and then on again.

81 / 313
 Record

Capturing from DV video recorders or cameras

l Select "DV camera" from the recording dialog. Uncompressed DV capture requires
approx. 220 MB per minute of video. If you would instead like to record using the
more space-saving MPEG format, then you should first activate the "Record DV as
MPEG" option.
l This opens the actual recording dialog. Check to see if a DV camera driver has been
selected.
l Name your recording. It's worth choosing a logical name which will allow you to
find it easily again on the hard drive.
l You can access the appropriate place on the camcorder tape by using the remote
control buttons: shuttle forwards, backwards, and start/stop playback. To start
recording, click on the "Record" button. Keep an eye on the remaining hard-drive
space.
l Cease capturing with the "Stop" button and exit the record dialog. You can see the
recording in the project window in the lower third of the screen.
Tip: In the DV recording dialog, you can set clips from the DV video which will then be
recorded one after the other (batch capturing). Find out more under "Batch recording".

Note: Keep an eye on the available hard drive space before each recording. DV capture
requires approx. 220 MB per minute of video!

Select DV device driver: The device driver for your DV device should be listed here.
When "Audio Recording" is deactivated, only video without sound is recorded. "Audio
preview" activates the audio output of the recording.
Note: The audio preview is deactivated at first, since DV cameras usually include built-in
speakers.

82 / 313
 Record

Save video file as/save in following folder: Enter the name of the movie to be
recorded. You may also select the folder where you wish to store your video file. The
default recording directory is set by default, but you can change the Path settings
settings in "File -> Settings -> Program -> Folder".
Edit after recording: Use this to access the automatic editing options.
Start device automatically: Starts the DV recorder or DV camera automatically when
the "Record" button is pressed. This does not function with all digital cards/video
devices.
Movie preview: On the program monitor you can see a preview of your movie.
Original size: This option allows you to preview the video in the original size, and where
applicable full screen mode. To return to the dialog use the "Esc" key.

Record list:
Here the start and end points can be set for the capture. This allows you to search the
entire video for all captures to be used and list them for planned capture. This is
processed in sequence when the recording starts (via the red button). That way you do
not need to record each scene individually. You simply determine recording time points,
and the computer takes care of the rest. To set the start and end points precisely, click
"Enter start/end point"
Recording list: Press this button to view the available list of already recorded videos and
scheduled recordings. All entries from the list may be selected and deleted. All entries
can be selected and deleted.

83 / 313
 Record

Every batch recording is automatically logged. Conversely, every "manual" DV and HDV
recording is transferred into the recording list in order to restore lost recordings without
much effort.
Batch recording: Here the start and end points can be set for the capture. This allows
you to search the entire video for all captures to be used and list them for planned
capture. This is processed in sequence when the recording starts (via the red button).
That way you do not need to record each scene individually. You simply determine
recording time points, and the computer takes care of the rest. To set the start and end
points precisely, click "Enter start/end point"
Record: Starts the recording process. Also contains the list of scheduled recordings.
These are processed step-by-step (batch capturing).
Stop: Stops the recording process.
Snapshot! This will create a frozen image directly from the program monitor. Start the
camcorder and watch the preview window. When the image you want appears click
"Snapshot". Or you can navigate using the remote control to the position you want, and
stop there in Pause mode. Stopped playback on the DV camera will not deliver an image.
The images are saved in the record directory as graphics files in the set resolution.

Remote control
Digital camcorders can be controlled remotely by MAGIX VIDEO PRO X. This does not
function with all digital cards/video devices. If your hardware does not support the
remote control function, the buttons will not be usable.
The necessary transport buttons can be found in the DV or HDV recording dialog.

Tape name: Enter a name for your tape here. MAGIX VIDEO PRO X requires this name
for the DV logging feature.
Recording information: Displays various information about your recordings.
Enter start/end point: Enter the exact start and end point or the recording length for a
scene. Both values can be entered as ATN (absolute track number) or as a timecode in
hours:minutes:seconds:frames.

84 / 313
 Record

Analog Video Recording

This option allows a video recording to be made from analog sources.

Connect analog video source

Connect the video out of your video camera, DVD player or VCR to the video in (TV,
video, or video-in graphics card) of your computer, and the audio out to the line in of
your sound card.
Due to the variety of device configurations, it is difficult to say which cable will function
best with your setup. If you’re not sure, check the manual of your VCR or your TV, video
or graphics cards.
Example: Many VCRs have a SCART output and most DVD players have three RCA
outputs (two for the stereo track, one for the image). In such cases, you will need a
SCART to RCA adapter, a cable with three RCA plugs at each end.

SCART/RCA SCART/RCA Stereo

adapter adapter with 3 RCA/mini
RCA jacks phone jack
adapter

Most sound card inputs are mini stereo jacks. To connect the audio out of your VHS
recorder to the sound card audio in, you will need a stereo RCA to 3.5 mm mini jack
adapter.
You will have to purchase a cable with three RCA plugs and a stereo RCA/mini phone
plug adapter.

Recording dialog

85 / 313
 Record

Video/audio drivers: Set the video card or sound card for recording here. In practically
every case the driver software supplied with the hardware must be installed.
Input/tuner settings: If your video capture card supports multiple sources, i.e. your card
also has a TV tuner or multiple inputs (SVHS, composite, etc.), then you can select the
proper recording source and the TV channel to be recorded here.
Save video file as/save in following folder: Enter the name of the movie to be
recorded. You may also select the folder where you wish to store your video file. The
standard recording folder is set as default. The location of this folder may be changed via
"Path settings" under "File -> Program settings -> Folders".
Edit after recording: Use this to access the automatic editing options.
Recording quality: The list box enables you to select various predefined levels of
recording quality, e.g. depending on the purpose of the image material and computer
performance. These are sorted according to picture quality. Use Configuration to fine-
tune the quality for the preset. Presets you have created yourself appear in this list as
long as you use the default folder provided as the save location.
l Presets displayed with MPEG record directly in MPEG format.
l The preset "AVI: user-defined" enables AVI videos to be recorded via the codecs
included with MAGIX VIDEO PRO X. There are several codecs for various
applications, e.g. "MSU Screencapture Lossless Codec", which is used for screen
capturing. Please also see the general information provided on AVI video.
Tip: Use the presets marked MPEG if you want to burn your recordings straight away,
since smart encoding helps omit laborious encoding after recording.

Advanced...: Opens the video driver settings dialog.

Capture controls: This provides access to the "Red" record and "Stop" buttons. These
start and stop recording.
Timer recordings active/time limit: Specify the recording start time and length to turn
your PC into a fully functioning VCR.
Snapshot!: This will create a still shot directly from the program monitor. The images are
saved in the recordings folder as graphics files in the resolution you have set.
Recording information: This shows statistical information such as the recording time,
available space on the hard-drive, the recorded frames, and the “dropped” frames.
Dropped frames are frames that have been left out because the computer is too slow for
the selected image format and recording quality and cannot accept all incoming frames.
Preview: Some graphics adapters allow you to reduce the system load by deactivating
the video preview. If you hear an "echo", deactivate the audio preview.

86 / 313
 Record

Advanced configurations in the video capturing dialog

These dialog boxes, so-called “property sheets,” come with the video card drivers. These
driver-specific performance properties may deviate depending on the cards. We also
have a very limited influence on the behavior of these drivers. If you encounter any
difficulties, please contact the video card manufacturer and ask for the latest driver
updates.
Input: Sets up the video card's so-called "crossbar".
The crossbar determines which video and audio input signal will be recorded. The
crossbars are connected in series to the video recording chip itself. In the output field,
the video output (for the crossbars) is the input for the recording chip (video or audio
decoder-in) of the video card. In the “Input” field, select the signal source that will be
used by the video card to capture for this input. Many video cards have separate
crossbars for audio and video. If you have a problem, try out the different configurations
until the right sound matches the right image.
o Composite in = the regular video input (i.e. RCA jack)
o S-video = S-video input (mini-din jack)
o SVHS-in = SVHS input (special cable)
o Tuner-in = TV signal of the integrated tuner
Image settings
Video decoder: If the picture only appears in black & white or it flickers, the video
standard may be set incorrectly. In mainland Europe, PAL_B is used.
VideoProcAmp: Fine-adjustment of colors, brightness, contrast etc. We recommend
against changing any of the manufacturer’s settings.
Format: Please do not change anything here. The recording format is set in the
"Recording quality" option in the video recording dialog.
Tuner
This option is only available if a TV tuner is integrated into your video card.

Audio
Songs, noises or instruments can be easily recorded in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X using the
audio recording function. A hooked-up microphone or various audio devices (especially a
stereo system) can be used as recording sources.

87 / 313
 Record

Connecting the recording sources

First, the recording source must be connected to the computer. There are several
possibilities depending on the equipment you are using:
l If you would like to import music from a stereo system, use your sound card's line-
in input. If the stereo system amplifier comes with separate line-out or AUX out
connectors, they should be used. In this case, they have to be connected to the
computer's line-in. Hi-fi amplifiers usually have RCA (composite) connectors and
the computer has mini stereo connectors. You need to then get a suitable cable
with two small RCA (composite) connectors and a mini stereo jack.
l If the amplifier comes without separate outputs (other than the speaker
connectors), you can also use the headphone jack for recording. Normally, you will
require a cable with stereo or mini stereo jacks. This type of connection has the
advantage of a separate volume control to set the headphone input signal level.
However, headphone jacks are often not very high-quality. For this reason, you
should use line-out outputs whenever possible.
l To record cassettes from a tape deck, connect the tape deck’s line-outs directly to
the computer's line-in.
l When recording LPs, the record player's outputs should not be connected directly
to the computer because the phono signal has to be pre-amplified. In this case,
connecting through the headphone jack or an external preamp is recommended.
Some record players also have normal line-out connections.
l If you would like to make recordings with a microphone, connect it to the computer
using the microphone input (usually a red jack).

Adjusting the signal level

Adjusting the signal level to the sound card is also recommend to get the best sound
quality when recording digitally.
Once a recording source is connected to the sound card, the Record button opens the
recording dialog and starts the recording source.
You can now adjust the recording level with the help of the LED display in the record
dialog. For this, you must first check off "Show levels".
If the adjustment is set too high, distortion occurs and the incoming signal must be
reduced. If you have connected the source through either an amplifier or tape deck
output to the sound card, you can only reduce the signal level in your sound card’s
software mixer interface. You can access the mixer directly from within the recording
dialog via the “Recording level” button.

88 / 313
 Record

If you reduce input sensitivity by using the input fader, the resolution at which the analog
signal is digitized is also reduced. Try to set these automatic controllers to the loudest
sound level possible!
The loudest part of the material is the yardstick for an optimal level. The loudest part
should be adjusted to the maximum. The actual recording begins when you press the
"Record" button. At the end of the recording you will be asked if you want to use the
recording. Upon confirmation, the newly-recorded material will be placed in the next free
track at the position of the start maker in the project.

Normalize after recording: This option raises your material to the correct volume level
after recording is completed. In order to achieve good audio results, you should try to
record the source as loud as possible without overmodulating it. The Peak Meter display
here helps in the recording dialog.
Audio driver: Selects the sound card for the recording.
Save audio file as.../Save in the following folder: Here you can enter the title of the
audio file you wish to record. You can also select the folder where you wish to store your
file.
Recording quality: Sets the sound quality of the recording. In the preset menu you can
choose between AM Tuner, FM Radio, CD Audio, and DAT (Digital Audio Tape).
Display volume control (Monitor): The volume control (peak meter) to monitor the
strength of the input signal. Please read more on this in the section 'Adjusting levels'.
Record: This button starts the actual recording.
Stop: Click this button to stop recording

89 / 313
 Record

Play while recording: This option is particularly important for spoken commentary and
the like. If activated, the selected movie (or selected scene if recorded in Edit screen) is
played while recording. This acts as orientation for the film.
Advanced: Use this button to open a window containing a selection of three special
functions.
Mono recording: This can be activated to record in mono. This reduces the required
memory space in half. Mono recordings are recommended for voice recordings made
using only one standard mono microphone.
Real-time sample rate adjustment: Automatically matches the sample rate of a new file
to be recorded with the sample rate of the current movie's sound track (set in the video
recording).
Ducking (reducing the sound volume): To add narration or other sound material to a
video that already has sound volume levels set, activate the option ”Automatic reduction
of sound volume of remaining audio tracks”. This automatically reduces the volume of
audio objects in the project during the recording session (”ducking”). This is achieved
using an automatically configured volume curve: Before and after the recording other
tracks will be faded in or out, resulting in a homogeneous total volume level. (Lowering of
volume level during spoken comments is also called "Ducking".)

Single frame
Single frame recording may be used to record snapshots from the connected video
source. This requires a DirectShow compatible video recording or TV card or a
corresponding USB device (e.g. a webcam).
The time control function allows you to automatically take snapshots. This is useful for
the following applications:
l Create photo stories from videos
l for animation films (stop-motion recording),
l for video surveillance,
l or in time-lapse photography.
The recorded images are added to the opened project.

90 / 313
 Record

Video source: You may set the video card used to take pictures here.
Save image as: Enter the title of the snapshot to be recorded here. Snapshots are saved
under this name and numbered consecutively. You can also select the file path for
storage.
Recording quality: Set the resolution for the recording here. This corresponds with the
resolution options offered on the camera. Use the slider to set the image quality. Using
higher resolutions results in larger file sizes for each recording. Simply press “Reset” to
return to the preset image quality.
Advanced...: Opens the video driver settings dialog.
Camera noise during recording: This causes the program to play a clicking sound each
time a snapshot is taken for monitoring purposes.
Recording controls: The red record button triggers a snapshot or alternatively a series of
recordings when using the time control function.

Time Control
Recording interval: When active, starting recording produces a sequence of images.
Snapshots are saved according to the selected time interval and numbered sequentially.
For example, if snapshots are taken every two seconds and then inserted every five
frames into the slideshow, then a ten-times time lapse recording will result.
Photo Length in Frames: Specifies how long the photos appear in the slideshow.

Advanced settings in the single-frame recording dialog

Here you can adjust certain settings for the video recording driver. These dialog boxes,
so-called “Property Sheets”, come with the video card drivers. The driver-specific
features may slightly vary from driver to driver. The MAGIX team has little direct
influence on the performance of the various drivers. If you encounter any difficulties,
please also contact the video card manufacturer for the latest driver updates.
Input: Sets the crossbar of the video card. This lets you define which video and audio
input signal is used in the recording. The crossbars are connected in series to the video
recording chip itself, in the output field, the video output (for the crossbars) is the input

91 / 313
 Record

for the recording chip (Video or Audio Decoder In) of the video card. In the “Input” field,
select the signal source that will be used by the video card to capture for this input.
o Composite in = the regular video input (i.e. RCA jack)
o SVHS-in = SVHS input (special cable)
o Tuner In = the TV signal of the built-in tuner
Video Decoder: If the picture only appears in black & white or it flickers, the video
standard may be set to the wrong standard. In mainland Europe, PAL_B is used.
VideoProcAmp: Fine-adjustment of colors, brightness, contrast etc. We recommend
against changing any of the manufacturer’s settings.
Format:Format: Do not change anything here! The recording format settings can be
changed under Resolution in the Recording dialog box.

Screen
Use screen capturing to record everything that moves on your monitor. This process is
called "screen capturing".

Under Recording quality, you will find various presets for different applications. You can
either record the entire monitor ("fullscreen"), a frame of variable size (e.g. to film the
Windows Media Player display), or a different video player. Click "Configuration" to make
custom size adjustments.

92 / 313
 Record

Hint: Because many video players work with overlay, it is recommended to open each
player before starting the capture. This way switching into "Overlay" mode can be
prevented.

Tip: Use the fullscreen presets under "Recording quality". This will use MXV format, which
is a particularly well-suited video codec for screen capture.

l Click on the "Record" button of the recording dialog. An additional dialog with a red
record button, a black stop button as well as a frame with dashed bordering
appears.
l Activate "Record mouse pointer" to record the movements of the mouse pointer.
l If desired, deactivate "Animate mouse click" if this should not be visually recorded.

l Now select the screen area you wish to record, i.e. the screen of the video player in
which the video is playing. Drag the frame over the area you wish to record and
adjust its size as required by dragging the edges and corners.
Hint: If you selected "fullscreen", the frame will appear outside the visible area.

l The actual recording process can be started by pressing the red record button. The
recording starts; the record symbol appears in the task bar (tray).
l Once the video you wanted to record has come to an end, click on the
"Record/Stop" button to stop the recording. Recording ends and the recording
dialog is visible once again.

Edit after recording

The "Edit after recording" dialog can be opened from the "HDV Camera", "DV Camera"
and "Video" recording dialogs:

93 / 313
 Record

l Automatic scene recognition: This divides the footage into scenes. Please also
read the section "Automatic scene recognition".
l Automatically set chapter markers: Please also read the section "Set chapter
marker automatically".
Burn project immediately after recording: You can use this option to record and burn
to a disc in a single step. Simply select the format you would like to burn, insert a suitable
blank disc into the drive, and press record.
Note: Make sure that the selected recording quality corresponds with the disc type (for
DVDs the preset "MPEG DVD").

If you use your own settings for MPEG encoding (e.g. half image resolution for long-play
DVDs) make sure that settings for recording and later for burning are the same so that no
new encoding is necessary (Smart encoding).
After recording, the program automatically switches to the "Burn" screen, the burn
window opens and the disc is burned. The last set layout is used for the menu layout for
the DVD.
Tip: This function is particularly suitable for handling lengthy projects in one go. You can
start recording in the evening and have the finished DVD by morning.

Export for mobile device: The recorded movie is immediately converted into the format
of the selected mobile device and transferred. The preset in the list field is the device
which has been selected in the Export video/audio dialog.
Settings: Opens the Export settings for the selected target device.

94 / 313
 Objects

Objects
In the MAGIX VIDEO PRO X project window you are dealing with objects. The general
term "object" includes all media types that can be positioned on the arranger tracks. The
following are all object types:

Combined objects:
Combined objects are video objects with an image track and an audio track. In the
context menu, you can add the waveform display of the audio track or add the sound as
an independent audio object.

Video objects:
Video objects include a file extension typical for videos (e.g. *.mpg, *.avi, *.mxv).
Depending on the length of the video object, you will see several frames representing
various positions in your video.

Image objects:
Image objects are photos or other static images. They have a file extension typical for an
image (e.g. *.jpg, *.png, *.bmp). In contrast to video objects, you will always see only one
frame.

Movie objects:
Movie objects contain entire movies. This enables you to position repeating movie
sequences or complex sections as simple objects. Changes to the movie are applied to all
of the corresponding movie objects.

Audio objects:
All objects that contain only sound are considered audio objects. They have an extension
typical for audio (e.g. *.ogg, *.mp3, *.wav). With a right-click you can add a waveform
display to any audio object.

Title objects:
Title objects are created using the title editor and contain the text that appears in your
projects. They have no file extensions.

95 / 313
 Objects

Insert object into the project.

Importing files
Files from the Media Pool can be loaded into the project window in various ways:
l The fastest way: Click on the "Paste" option that appears when you move the
mouse pointer over the media file in the Media Pool. Or you can simply drag and
drop the file from the Media Pool onto a track. If an object is already present at this
position, the file is inserted at the desired time position on the next empty track
below.
l Load several files: If you want to load several files from the folder, hold down the
Ctrl key while clicking on the entries you want to use. If you want to load a
sequence of files, hold the Shift key and click on the first entry and then on the last.
All entries in between are marked. Then you can drag all of the selected files onto
the track with the mouse button pressed.
l Use insert modes: You can also use the menu commands of the "Insert modes"
button. For more about this, read the section "Insert modes" in the chapter
"Workspaces".
l Insert through source-destination edit: These professional insert techniques will
be dealt with separately later on.
l Project temp folder: If you want to combine your material separately, it is
recommended to use the project temp folder. It can be used as a sort of clipboard
where files that can be used in the project are sorted ahead of time for possible
future use. This creates a better overview and saves repetitive, time-consuming
navigation through folders in the Media Pool.
l Movie as Movie Object: All of the movies in the project appear in the project temp
folder. These movie objects can be loaded into the current movie using drag &
drop.
Note: You can define a destination track for importing the objects. Click on the track
header to select a track. All objects you import will now be inserted into the selected
track. Clicking again on the selected destination track disables this function.

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X also loads VOB files that contain multiple audio tracks. After the
VOB file loads, simply click the audio object created and select the desired audio track.
Note: To view and select audio objects in the project, Timeline mode must be active.

96 / 313
 Objects

Load sections from longer video files

Videos can be trimmed in the source monitor before being imported. To use automatic
crossfades, follow these steps:
1. Select the desired file:
l by double-clicking in the Media Pool,
l from the Media Pool using drag & drop in the source monitor,
l click the middle icon in the Media Pool
(the icon appear as soon as the mouse pointer points to a file in the Media
Pool).
2. If you want to have an overview of the video material, first locate the edges of the
range. Play back the selected file in the source monitor and determine the range
you want to use in the project.
3. Set the range edges (In Point and Out Point):
l Move the range edges by holding down the mouse button,
l set the range edges with the buttons
or
l set the range edges with the keyboard shortcuts I(= In Point) and O(= Out Point).
Tip: You can also set the range edges with the keyboard during playback. This keyboard
shortcut is especially useful when setting precise positions with the shuttle and jog wheel.

4. If you want to check the range: press the buttons for the range playback (keyboard
shortcut: #).

Result: The set range will be played back in the source monitor.
5. Apply the range as follows:
l Click on the image in the source monitor and drag it into the project window
by holding down the mouse button.
l Use the Insert modes to apply the selection to the project window.
l Click on the image in the source monitor and drag it into the project temp
folder by holding down the mouse button.
Result: An object corresponding to the selected area will appear on the track.
Tip: You can also use the insert modes keyboard shortcuts!

6. If you want to load several ranges from the same video file, repeat steps 3 and 4
until all desired ranges have been applied.

97 / 313
 Objects

Select and group objects.

To edit or delete objects using the menus, you must first select them. Click on the object.
Objects will change color to show that they have been selected.
When the Shift key is pressed, multiple objects are selected. You can open up a rectangle
positioning the mouse over the object, then holding down the mouse button and marking
all objects within the rectangle (”elastic band selection”) by left-click-dragging.
Any object can be combined with others to make up a group,to avoid the objects being
unintentionally moved out of relation to each other. Once they are combined, clicking on
one object of a group will select the entire group. To group or ungroup objects, use the
buttons in the tool bar or the corresponding commands in the "Edit" menu.
Tip: You can modify the color of a selected object in its context menu in order to mark it
and make it easier to locate. Right-click on an object to open the context menu, then
select a color for the object.

Duplicate objects
Objects can be duplicated easily. Click on the object you want to copy while holding
down the Ctrl key. This generates a copy that you can immediately drag to the desired
position or cut separately.

moving objects
Hold down the mouse button to move selected objects to any tracks and positions per
drag and drop. It is recommended to place objects that belong together on neighboring
tracks and create separate tracks for audio and video objects. For this reason, videos that
should overlay each other should usually be placed on the same track.
If the Shift key is pressed, objects can be moved from one track to another, without the
time position being changed.

Object handles
All objects can be re-sized with their lower edge “object handles”. Move the mouse over
one of the lower corners of the object until the mouse pointer becomes a double arrow.
You can now can shorten the object until it is the length you want.

98 / 313
 Objects

l An object can be faded in or out with the handles to the left and right upper corners
of the object. Cross-fades between different objects can be created by overlapped
positioning of objects that are fading in and out. The length of the cross-fade can
be adjusted with the handles.
l Using the transparency handle located centrally at the top of the object adjusts the
transparency of video and Bitmap objects, or the volume of audio objects.

Object handles for Combo objects

Combo objects have an additional sixth handle.

l The four outer handles have the same functions as with normal objects.
l The lower middle handle controls the volume for the object's audio track.
l The upper middle handle controls the transparency of the object's video track.

Object borders
When you place the mouse pointer on a vertical object border, it will turn into a double
line.

If the object doesn't border any other objects, the functionality doesn't differ from
bottom handles, which means that you can stretch or compress the object. With a hard
cut or a crossfade, the object transition will be moved, meaning that the object start and
end of both neighboring objects will remain coupled to each other.

Movie objects

99 / 313
 Objects

The movie that forms the basis of a movie object

Movie object in the rest of the movie

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X enables you to use entire movies as single objects in other movies.
Movie objects offer the following advantages:
l Complete sections are transferred without having to be rendered and imported
again.
l Frequently required scenes can be prepared and used as objects multiple times.
l If changes are made to the corresponding movie, they are immediately applied to
the movie object.
Note: If you are using several movie objects that belong to the same movie, any changes
to this movie will immediately be applied to the corresponding movie objects.

l Movie objects behave the same as video objects. The editing workflow for a movie
object is also the same as the workflow for a video object.

Create and import a movie object

Note: Video files saved separately on the hard drive first have to be opened as a normal
movie project in order to be used as movie objects.

1. Create or open new movie to be used as a movie object.

Result: The new movie appears in the project temp folder (see illustration).
Tip: Give the movie a distinctive name to make it easier to find in the project temp folder.

2. Insert the movie from the project temp folder into the "main movie" using drag &
drop.
Result: The movie appears as a Movie object. The Movie Object can be edited in
the same way as a Video Object.

100 / 313
 Effects

Effects
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X offer a huge palette of diverse video effects. The video effects used
most frequently can be found directly in the Media Pool, while others can be accessed in
the context menu for an object or in the Effects menu.

Title
Titles can be used for many applications: as a running text (ticker), subtitles, speech and
thought bubbles, to display date and time, and much more.

Create titles without a template

1. Select the object to which you want to add a title.
2. Place the playback marker at the position in the object where the title should
appear.
Note: You can always change this position afterwards by dragging and dropping the title.

3. To do this, click the "Title" button in the toolbar.

4. Enter your text and click the check in the input field of the program monitor.
5. Click in the program monitor and movie the title to the position in the image where
it should appear.
6. Format the title via the title editor in the Media Pool.

Creating titles using a template

There are a wide range of title templates for fonts, opening and closing credits, captions
etc. under "Title Templates" in the Media Pool.
l Select any title template. Start a preview or add a title to a playback marker location
using the quick access feature.
Note: Templates may be applied to an existing title object. Only the text will remain when
the template is applied; all other formatting settings will be replaced by the template
settings.

Dynamic titles
This category "Dynamic titles" contains standard text animations, such as flying letters
which combine to form text and wave animations which move through the individual
letters of words.

101 / 313
 Effects

After selecting a template, you can enter text and then customize font type, font size,
color and emphasis (bold, italics, underlining).
1. From the Media Pool, select the desired title under "Title templates > Dynamic
titles". Once you've imported it to the film, you will automatically switch to the area
"Effects > Title editing".
2. Adjust the text, as well as font, size, color and style in the title editor as desired.

Fade in date as title

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X is also able to insert the time and date into the image material. To
do this, select the option "Show date as title" in the video object's context menu.
If a DV-AVI file is involved (e.g. a digital recording from a camcorder), then the recording
date for the selected position will be used. If another type of file is involved, then the
creation date of the file will be used as the timecode. The title editor is then opened in
order to customize the entry.

Positioning titles and adjusting frame size

l Click once on the title in the program monitor to access the positioning frame.
Simply move the positioning frame using drag & drop.

l The size of the positioning frame can be adjusted at the corners, and the size of the
text will also change accordingly. If "Adjust font size to title field" is activated, the
text size will also change.

Title Editor
You can determine the appearance of your titles in the title editor (in the Media Pool
under "Effects > Title editing").
You can customize the text properties for multiple selected text objects at once. The
settings will only be applied to the text objects you have selected. The individual
properties of each text object remain unchanged.

102 / 313
 Effects

The following editing options are available for selection:

Here you can enter text for your title instead of editing it directly in
the program monitor.

Title Object

The left button vertically centers the title object on the monitor; the right centers
it horizontally.
Delete: Deletes the selected title object
Use the arrow keys in the title editor to move from one title object to the other
without having to search in the project window. Captions are not included in this.

Type
Here you can determine the font type and size of the title. If you click on the small arrow
next to the font size, you can change the font size using a smooth slider.
You can set format properties in the toolbars below.
Bold/Italic/Underlined
Left-aligned/Centered/Right-aligned

Shadow
Transparency: Controls foreground transparency levels.
Soften: Makes the edge of the shadow harder or softer.

Outline
Width: Enter the width of the frame in points.

103 / 313
 Effects

Filled in: The text will be filled with the color selected in the Title Editor. If the option is
deactivated, only the frame will be visible, and the background will appear instead of the
color fill.

3D
The text appears with a 3D-style outline. The width and thickness of the 3D contour (H)
can be set in points.
X3D: If MAGIX 3D Maker is installed on your computer, another button will appear
for 3D titles.
The title object will now be turned into a MAGIX 3D Maker object and 3D Maker will
open to begin editing..
Font color

Line spacing: Cannot be applied to only one line. When applied to multiple lines, this
alters the spacing between the lines. Line spacing always applies to the entire line.

Tracking: Controls the spacing between characters. Negative values move the
characters closer together, positive values move them apart.

Animation
Here you can set four movement directions to move the title on the image. You can also
set any course of movement. See Working with Keyframes for more information.

Other text settings

Automatic text break: Separates text automatically when the end of the text field is
reached.
Note: The result will be seen once you have confirmed the entered text by ticking next to
the selection box or by pressing the Enter key.

Adjust font size to title field: Changes the font size according to the text field size. You
can activate or deactivate this option temporarily by pressing the shift key while dragging
the text field handles.
Only apply visible TV area: The text will be zoomed so that it will always be within the
TV's screen area, which is specified in the Movie effect settings.

Notes on background color

To add background color for text with no other video or image objects as background,
click "Background design" in the context menu for the text object.

104 / 313
 Effects

Timecode
Under "Templates > Title templates" in the "Timecode Basic" section, you will find various
presets that you can use for displaying the timecode. This function adds a special
timecode object to a free track under the video object.
You can adjust the position of the timecode by moving the timecode object in the
program monitor. The handles on the borders can be used to adjust the length.
Presets can be customized in "Effects > Title editing > Timecode".

Timecode source: The type of timecode can be selected here. The following options are
available:
l Movie time: The time position in the MAGIX VIDEO PRO X Arranger.
l Object time: The time position within the timecode object independent of the
movie length and the position in the arrangement.
l Recording date/time: The date and time when the footage was recorded. This
timecode information must be saved in the video, otherwise the display will be
empty.
l Recording timecode: The timecode for the video that is created by the camera.
This timecode information must be saved in the video, otherwise the display will be
empty.
Note: If the recording date/time and the timecode are not saved in the source material,
only placeholders in the form of "-" will be displayed.

Add variable: The date/time format of the selected preset will be displayed as variables
in the format line (square brackets define a variable). These can be deleted or additional

105 / 313
 Effects

ones can be added. You can also add your own text and adjust the separators between
variables.
Font: Select a font.
Fixed character width: For fonts with variable character width (proportional fonts), the
display will change during playback because, for example, "1" is narrower than "0". Here
you can hide these types of fonts from the selection list.
Color: You can set the font and background color here. If "transparent" is activated, the
background will be transparent.
Adjust to project length: Adjusts the length of the timecode object to match the length
of the project to ensure that it is displayed at all times.
Counter start/Progress: If you have inserted a counter as a variable or are using a
preset, you can regulate how it behaves here. For example, the counter can start with 10
and continue in intervals of 5. If you would like the counter to count backwards, enter a
minus sign in front of the number in the "Progress" field.

Apply effects to objects

There are various methods for applying effects.
l Video and audio effect templates are loaded into the corresponding object from the
Media Pool using drag & drop.
l Effects that can be animated (in Media Pool under "Effects" > "Video effects /
movement effects") will be applied directly to the objects selected earlier, as soon
as changes are made in Media Pool.
This button resets all of the current effects settings.
Note: If you animated the effect using keyframes, resetting will affect the entire
animation. Click on a specific keyframe to select it and then delete it by pressing the Del
key.

Transfer effects settings

The items video effects, movement effects, and Stereo 3D on all effects pages provide
the option to transfer the current effects settings to other objects or to load previously
saved settings. Use the above right arrow button to open the video effects menu.

106 / 313
 Effects

Save/load video effects: The current effects settings may be saved for use later in other
projects or previously saved settings may be loaded. A dialog allows the effects to be
selected.
Reset video effects: Resets the effects settings for the selected object.
Copy/paste video effects: Copies (likewise pastes) the current settings to a new object.
Use the dialog to select which settings should be copied.
Apply video effects to all: Copies the current effects settings to all objects in the
project. Use the dialog to specify which settings should be copied.
Apply video effects to all following objects: Copies the current effects settings to all of
the following objects in the project. Use the dialog to specify which settings should be
copied.
Load effects mask (additional in the Plus version): An effects mask may be loaded for
a selected object.

Comparison image in the source monitor

When editing effects in video and image objects, MAGIX VIDEO PRO X offers a
comparison mode which lets you compare the before and after state directly.

Selected object without effects: Outside of effects pages, the object is displayed
completely without effects; inside effects pages, the object is displayed without effects
from the current effects page. The "Color" effects page remains open and all of the

107 / 313
 Effects

effects except "Color" are applied. This options synchronizes the playback marker
between the program and the source monitor.
Selected object: The selected object is displayed with all of the applied effects. The
playback marker may be moved through the project, for example to compare the
beginning with the end of an edited object. This option synchronizes the playback marker
between the program and source monitor.
Before selected object: Displays the object before the selected object in the same track.
This enables edited effects on sequential objects to be compared more easily.
Following the selected object: The object located on the same track after the selected
object is displayed for comparison in the source monitor. This enables edited effects on
sequential objects to be compared more easily.
Select object...: Clicking selects the desired object. An object may therefore be edited
and then used as a reference for the following effects processes, for example.
Remove comparison image: The comparison image is removed from the source monitor.
Note: Program settings enables you to activate "Comparison image in source monitor for
editing effects in the Media Pool". If this option is activated, the "Selected objects without
effects" comparison mode will be automatically activated when switching into the Media
Pool effects, and will be automatically deactivated when the mode is exited. This serves
to compare the original and edited image. This automation will be suppressed if the
option is deactivated.

Video effects in the Media Pool

The desired video effect can be opened in the Media Pool regardless of the selected
object. The corresponding image is displayed at the position of the playback marker in
the program monitor. To see the impact of the effect settings, you must always set the
playback marker to the position where the selected object is located. The playback
marker also enables you to jump to a specific position in the video object in order to
check the results of the effects by starting and stopping playback.

Brightness and Contrast

You can adjust the selected object's brightness, contrast, saturation and temperature
using the curve effect.
l You can choose between RGB for brightness/contrast and the individual color
curves Red, Green and Blue as the gradient curve channel to modify.
l Additionally, you can decide how these curves should behave: Standard mode
draws soft curves. In manual mode, you will see handles on the curve points that

108 / 313
 Effects

can be used to draw soft, linear and freehand curves. In addition, you can
individually set how the curve behaves at each position under "Selected point".
Keyboard shortcut:
l Mouse left click adds a curve point
l Mouse right click deletes the selected curve point
l Ctrl and selected point = movement along the x-axis
l Shift and selected point = movement along the y-axis
l Ctrl + Shift + click on curve point = switch between curve modes
l Ctrl + Shift + click on curve handles = changes curve behavior of this curve point

Auto-exposure
With this button you can automatically optimize brightness and contrast with a click. Use
the fader in the dialog for finer adjustments.
Brightness/contrast: Use the sliders to increase or reduce the brightness and the
contrast of the picture.
Gamma: Set the mean gray value that can be calculated from the various color ranges. In
the preset list, you can select different areas to edit only the dark, median, or brightest
areas of the image.
Using the fader, you can also set the level of brightening or darkening.
HDR Gamma: Unlike "Gamma", very dark areas are selectively lightened.
HDR Blur: This changes the transition between light and dark areas together with "HDR
Gamma".

Color
Saturation: Use the saturation slider to increase or reduce the hue proportions in the
image. A newly developed algorithm is applied which makes color changes related to
other parameters (for example contrast settings) in order to achieve the most natural
coloration possible. With some experimenting, you can achieve some amazing results –
such as turning summer images into autumnal pictures, or creating funky pop art...
White balance:A n incorrect white balance can lead to an unnatural blue or red hue. To
use the white balance, click on the "White point" button and then select a point which
represents white or a neutral gray to the "outside world". The color temperature is then
corrected automatically.
Tip: Interesting color effects can be achieved by setting a color other than white. There is
definitely room for experimentation!

109 / 313
 Effects

Color: Select a color for coloring the image from the color chart.
Red/Green/Blue: Changes the color portion mix.
Red Eye removal: Using this photo function you can remove unnatural red eyes that are
the result of using a flash. Click on the eye symbol and then select the red pupils in the
preview monitor using the mouse.

Color correction
Secondary color correction allows individual colors in video and image objects to be
adjusted. "Highlights", "Midtones" and "Shadows" ranges can be adjusted individually.
This includes essentially two layers, the fore and background. The master layer may also
be used to influence the overall image. The foreground layer corresponds with the mask
created, and editing in the background changes all of the areas outside of this mask. The
mask may be assigned to a certain color or to multiple colors simultaneously.
Note: Before using complex color correction, you should first check if
"Brightness/contrast" and "Color" functions can help you.

1. To open color correction, click the video or image object and open the entry Color 
correction > Video effects in the Media Pool.
2. Insert allows a color to be selected with the pipette tool to create a mask.
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X displays the mask in black and white stripes to highlight the
current selection.
3. Click with the pipette tool on the color in the program monitor that you would like
to add to the current layer until your selection is complete.

Unwanted colors can be removed from the selection again by selecting "Remove"
and clicking the corresponding color.
4. Select the layers to edit: Foreground or background.
5. Shadows, mid tones and highlights of the selected color and level may now be
edited separately in the normal way.

Color angle: Determines the color on the color wheel, with which the image should

110 / 313
 Effects

be colored in with in each brightness area.

Correction intensity: Sets the intensity of the coloration of each brightness range.
Saturation: Sets the color saturation for the corresponding brightness range.
A classic example: Saturation of all brightness areas on the background layer is reduced,
and colors in the foreground are adjusted as desired.

Chroma key
This section contains the effects for chroma keying used to mix together two videos into
a foreground and background.
Note: The background video must be placed in the track above the foreground object.
E.g.: Track 1: Background, Track 2: Foreground

Mode
Stamp: The currently selected object is "stamped" onto the video on the track above the
object. This is only possible if the bottom video takes up only a part of the image.
Otherwise only the bottom (currently selected) video would be visible. Normally, the
object should be reduced or moved first. This is done with the help of "Position/size"
effect or via the submenu "Section" in "Effects -> Video object effects".
Color: In the program monitor, drag the cursor over the color that should be transparent
and select a section. The video is made transparent in the sections with this color and the
video on the top track will show “through”. You can use the "Threshold value",
"Transition area" and "Antispill" controls to fine-tune your results, e.g. to remove
reflections of hidden colors on surfaces or to sharpen the transitions to objects.
Mix: This button mixes the two videos together based on their brightness. Brighter areas
accumulate and quickly appear white; darker areas have less of an effect on the result.

Colors to be hidden
Green/blue/black/white: All green/blue/black/white areas of the video below appear
transparent. This makes it possible to "place" a person who has been recorded in front of
a blue background into any type of landscape.
Water: Only the contours of the upper video are mixed, which results in something like a
water effect..

111 / 313
 Effects

Alpha: This video effect uses the brightness of a video to control a cross-fading effect
between two other videos on neighboring tracks. The additional videos should be
situated directly above and below the alpha-keying object.
In all black parts of the alpha-keying object, the top video is faded in, while in all white
passages the bottom video is shown. Gray passages are permeable for both videos and
create a mixture of the two. In the case of colored passages, the brightness of the color is
used for control purposes.

Video level
Changes the brightness of the video before additional video effects are applied. This can
have a serious influence on the effects, in particular on Chroma keying. The level setting
may be automated so that two videos can be mixed dynamically with each other. Read
more about this in the chapter "Animating objects".

Anti-spill
Smoothes edges in order to minimize artifacts.

Artistic filter
Erosion: The image is broken-up by means of small rectangles and resembles a
"patchwork".
Dilate: Similar like Erosion, but uses light surfaces instead of dark ones to form the
rectangle.
Emboss: Creates a relief of the image edges, in which case strong contrast differences
are interpreted as edges.
Substitution: Parts are exchanged using the rainbow spectrum red, green and blue.
Quickly create surreal landscapes and green faces.
Shift: The color values are inverted increasingly. Blue colors turn red, green ones appear
purple.
Quantize: Depending on the setting, colors are either rounded up or down so that the
overall number of colors is reduced. This creates grids and patterns.
Color fill: Using this slider, color in the video with red, green, and blue colors (the basic
TV colors).
Contour: The image is reduced to its contours in two sizes (3 x 3 or 5 x 5). It is possible to
select either vertical or horizontal contours.

112 / 313
 Effects

Distortion
Motion: Moving parts of the image are enhanced and warped.
Echo: The moving images create an optical "echo"; previous images stand still and
gradually turn paler until they completely disappear.
Whirlpool: The image is twisted into an "S" shape.
Fisheye: The perspective is distorted as if the image were viewed through a fisheye lens.
Mosaic: The video is depicted as a mosaic.
Lens: The image is dynamically distorted at the edges.
Sand: The image is depicted in a granulated manner.
Kaleidoscope: The left upper corner is mirrored horizontally and vertically.
Mirror horizontal/vertical center: The object is mirrored vertically or horizontally – it
appears on its side or upside down.

Sharpness
Sharpen: This fader allows you to increase the sharpness of the image.
Blur: This fader allows you to reduce the sharpness of the image, making it blurry.
l Apply to: This allows you to set just how much the sharpness or blur should be
applied to surfaces or edges. This enables you to effectively reduce ongoing image
distortions (noise).
Artificial blur: Here you can blur the image in an alternative manner. The achieved
effects are much stronger compared to simply sliding the "Blur" fader.
l Quality: Enhances the artificial blur.
Tip: Artificial blur is useful for creating transitions. To do so, you can animate the first
video so that it is strongly blurred and let the second video begin with blur and slowly
return to normal focus.

Directed blur: Select between linear, radial and zoom-blur. Depending on the type of
blur, you can specify the angle and its direction or the center.
Intensity: Lets you specify how distinct the effect should be.
Quality: The higher the quality, the more precise and finer the effect.
Note: The higher the quality of the effects, the longer the calculation will take.

113 / 313
 Effects

Speed
The playing speed can be adjusted with the slider control. The range between 0 and 1
plays the video slowly; values above 1 accelerate playback. If the playing speed is
increased, the object length in the project window is automatically shortened.
Frame rate: Here you can set the video's frame rate directly. Changing it directly affects
the speed factor, while moving the slider conversely results in changing video frame rate.
Algorithm: Here you can determine how to adjust the soundtrack. "Timestretching"
changes the playback speed, without influencing the pitch: "Resampling" changes the
playback speed together with the pitch (the faster the playback, the higher the pitch).
Reverse playback: With this button the playback direction will be reversed (with the
same tempo).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this option if your video lags as a result of
being slowed down. MAGIX VIDEO PRO X then automatically fills in missing frames so
that your video can be played back more smoothly.
Maintain length: If you shorten an object in the arranger, you can play a video faster
without reducing the object length. The shortened footage is used to maintain the object
length.

VEGAS Video Stabilization

Video stabilization "VEGAS Video Stabilization" smoothes out undesired frame
movements by negating inadvertent movements in the image. This produces unusable
edges in the footage that can be automatically cropped off by zooming into the picture.
The result: A more stable picture at a nearly imperceptibly increased zoom level.
"VEGAS Video Stabilization" can be found in the Media Pool under "Effects > Video
effects".
1. Mark the object in the video, which should be stabilized, and click "Apply effect".
Use and adjust the following parameters prior the motion analysis of the video to affect
the results of the analysis:
l Accurate method: The analysis takes longer, but is more precise and offers a
better result.
l Reduce video size: Scale down video objects that are Full-HD and larger before
analysis, so that the analysis takes less time. The result will be marginally more
imprecise.
l Movement correction: Select which types of motion should be assessed during
analysis.

114 / 313
 Effects

2. Click Analyze Motion to start the analysis. The process will take some time depending
upon the selected mode, the length of the file, and other factors. When the analysis is
complete, the stabilization is automatically applied to your media.
Note: If you wish to change the analysis parameters, the analysis must be performed
again. In this case, click "Clear Motion Data" to discard the motion analysis, do your
changes and run the analysis again.

After completing the analysis, 2 parameters are available for adjusting the final
appearance of the video object:
l Smoothing Magnitude: The camera movement always consists of many small, fast,
and unintentional movements and shaking, along with any intentional movements
like pans, zooms or travel that must be kept. This parameter defines how much
"unsteadiness" should be kept in a scene; the higher that factor is, the more the
movements are smoothed.
l Autoscaling: Borders: When the picture is moved in one direction to compensate
for an unintended camera movement black borders will appear at the opposite
edge. To avoid this the picture is zoomed by a certain amount. Autoscaling is
activated by default and ensures that all black borders are completely removed.
The parameters Scaling, Rotation, Movement X and Movement Y do not affect
stabilization, but rather can be used to further adjust the object. These parameters can
also be animated using keyframes.

proDAD Mercalli 2.0

proDAD Mercalli V2 is an effect plug-in from the company proDAD, which is included
with this software. Remove shaking and jerking from your video recordings. Uneven
panning and zooming shots can also be "calmed" and improved.
o Click on "Apply effect" to activate the Open FX plug-in.
Note: Before its first use, free registration is required.

Profile: Select the right camera type for analyzing and correcting your video data. It is
necessary to select the right camera here to get the results you want, regardless of how
the original video was filmed. The universal camera profile will improve any video data,
but try out different camera types to get the best result for your material.
Run analysis... : Analyzing your video data is always the first step before starting detailed
improvements.
Rolling shutter correction: Balances any distortion (only with CMOS) that appears in
moving images - in other words, videos.
Note: For this effect to work correctly, the correct field setting for the video must be used.

115 / 313
 Effects

View camera dynamics: Activate this feature if camera movements have not been
smoothed or stabilized.
Enhance panning shots: Entire panning movements in a video can be balanced,
Smooth zoom: This balances shaky zooms.
Reduce tilting: This can be used to reduce horizontal and vertical tilting of the camera
when the recording was made.
Border editing: Through balancing unwanted movements in film footage, it's also
possible to edit borders. Here, you can specify how to deal with borders:
l Optimal stabilization: A black border appears in the stabilized video. This border
can differ in appearance from image to image, depending on the extent of shaking.
l Without border: No border appears in the stabilized video. A border can be
avoided by zooming the video. This depends on the extent of shaking in the video
and the desired level of correction.
l Image area: A static border appears in the stabilized video. The form of this border
is characterized by the strongest shaking in the video.
Zoom: The border can be minimized by zooming in the video.
Fill with edge color: This option lets you fill an existing border. However, this means
that the video content will look slightly blurred.
Comparison view: The stabilized video can be shown in the preview window.
l End result: Only stabilized video will be displayed in the preview.
l Vertical split screen: This vertical screen displays the source material and the
stabilized video.
l Horizontal split screen: This horizontal screen displays the source material and the
stabilized video.
Show evaluation grid: A grid to help you evaluate stabilization appears.

Shot match
Match the appearance of two video clips to each other. The colors and tonal values of
two separate photos are aligned fully automatically.
You can do this in the following way:
1. Click on 'Start comparison mode' to switch the source monitor to preview mode.
2. Then select a source image from the program monitor (left) and a target image from
the source monitor (right).
3. Now click on "Apply shot match" to transfer the source image characteristics (left)
to the target object (right).

116 / 313
 Effects

Tip: Remove checkmark in front of the "Shot match" button in order to hide the shot
match. Set the check mark again, and the shot match will reappear. You can also use this
for comparison during color assignment under "Manual adjustments".

You can adjust the result by activating "Manual adjustment“ and then picking and
assigning individual colors.
1. Using the pipette, select a color that should be matched from the source monitor
(left).
2. In the target monitor (right), select the color that should be replaced. MAGIX VIDEO 
PRO X replaces the color.
Tip: You can conduct color assignments without a preliminary shot match.

Shot match works best under the following conditions:

l The same scene has been filmed with multiple (different) cameras from various
perspectives.
l The same scene has been filmed in different lighting conditions.
If the conditions are different, the result may be suboptimal.
Note on multiple selection: If multiple objects are selected as target objects, then the
object selected last will serve as the target. The target image is set as usual in this target
object. This sets the Shot match result which can be applied to other clips.

Add Noise
Use the Noise filter to add static or noise to a video sequence. When applied to a simple
background with a monochrome setting and then animated, it can produce a pattern
similar to that on a television when no transmission signal is obtained.
o Click on Apply effect to activate the Open FX plug-in.
Noise level: Determines the strength of the effect.
Monochromatic: Select this option to make the noise all one color. When this option is
not selected, the static will appear with random colors.
Gaussian noise: A method for creating more intense noise.
Animate: Check this box to make the noise move randomly.

Broadcast colors
Computer monitors can display 16 million colors, while televisions display roughly two
million colors. This difference means that through editing video on a computer, you can
create colors that are out of range for a television display. The visual effects can range

117 / 313
 Effects

from color variations to noticeable ghosting artifacts.

The broadcast colors plug-in can be used to adjust luminance and chroma values where
color may be an issue (especially with titles and still images).
l Click on Apply effect to activate the Open FX plug-in.
Luma/Chroma/Composite Min/Max: Enter the minimum/maximum value for
luminance, color and composite and drag the Smoothness slider to control how smoothly
the luminance values are blended.
7.5 IRE settings: Select this check box if you want to a value of 7.5 for the color black, as
is used in the United States for NTSC video.
Studio RGB: Limits RGB values to the studio standard of 16 - 235 respectively

Stamp forms
Apply the "Stamp forms" effect to punch simple geometric shapes and create picture-in-
picture effects in a video.
l Click on Apply effect to activate the Open FX plug-in.
The selected object will be punched in circular form as default. You can also
customize these presets the way you want.
Color: Use the values r, g and b for red, green and blue to set the colors for the borders
(only visible when borders > 0).
Shape: Select a shape in the drop down list to define the cut form.
Methods: Specify whether part of the video image is visible/masked:
l Cut everything apart from section: The cutout shape forms a window which
displays your video.
l Cut section: The cutout shape covers your video and the area outside the shape is
visible.
Feather: Drag the slider to determine how smoothly the cutout border fades into the
background.
Borders: Drag the fader to determine the size of the frame around the cut shape.
Restore X/Y: Drag the slider to repeat the cutout shape along the horizontal axis by the
number of times specified.
Size: Drag the fader to determine the size of the cut shape selected.
Middle: Drag the slider to set the center of the cutout within your project's video frame:
0.00, 0.00 represents the lower-left corner of the frame, 0.50, 0.50 represents the
center, and 1.00, 1.00 represents the upper-right corner.

118 / 313
 Effects

Gaussian Blur
This alters the apparent focus of the video, blurring and softening the appearance. It can
also be used to smooth out some types of noise and can also be used as a corrective
filter.
l Click on Apply effect to activate the Open FX plug-in.
Horizontal range/Vertical range: Drag the slider or enter values in the editing fields to
specify the number of pixels in a block.
Color channels: Select individual color channels (Red, Green, Blue or Alpha) to which you
want apply blur. If the video or image has an alpha channel, basing the blur on that
channel can sometimes improve transparency and mask blending.

Glow
This effect produces a halo effect around bright image objects.
l Click on Apply effect to activate the Open FX plug-in.
Glow percent: Changes the quantity of light emitted (similar to Blur effect) Light
intensity, Effect intensity, and Suppression all work together. Adjust the settings to get
the desired effect.
Intensity: Sets the intensity of the glow color.
Suppression: Drag this to reduce the glow so that it can only be used for highlights.
Color: Use the values r, g and b for red, green and blue to set the colors for the glow
effect.

LAB color
LAB color allows you to manipulate colors in the Lab (L*a*b* or L*, a*, b*) color space.
Adjusting colors in the LAB color space allows you to:
l Adjust lightness (brightness) without affecting colors.
l Perform luminosity inversion without affecting colors.
l Change colors without affecting brightness.
l Produce high-quality desaturation and black-and-white conversion.
l Change subsets of colors without affecting their opponent colors.
Brightness: The Brightness control allows you to gradually adjust the brightness of the
image without changing the colors in an image. Drag the slider to the right to brighten the
image, or drag to the left to darken the image.

119 / 313
 Effects

Channel a: The a channel contains green and magenta color information. Moving the
slider all the way to the left (-1) shifts the green and magenta colors to green; moving the
slider all the way to the right (1) shifts the green and magenta colors to magenta.
Channel b: The b channel contains blue and yellow color information. Moving the slider
all the way to the left (-1) shifts the blue and yellow colors to blue; moving the slider all
the way to the right (1) shifts the blue and yellow colors to yellow.
Invert luminance: Select the check box to invert all luminance values, creating a negative
image.
Desaturate: The Desaturate control allows you to gradually adjust the a and b color
channels to black and white. Moving the slider all the way to the right (1) removes all
color from the image, converting it to gray scale.

Lens reflection
Apply the "Lens reflection" effect to simulate the light reflected by a camera lens.
Light color: Set the color value to which you want to apply the effect.
Light position: Set the position of the light source that creates the Lens Flare effect.
Lens type: Click on a lens in the drop down list to select the number of light flares to be
created.
Tint: Drag a fader or enter a value in the field to set the strength of the tint that will be
applied to the light source.
Intensity: Drag the slider or enter a value in the field to set the strength of the effect.
Blend: Drag the slider or enter a value in the field to set the transparency for the light
flare effect. a setting of 0 is completely transparent; a setting of 1 is opaque.
Size: Drag the slider or enter a value in the field to set the size of the light flare effect.
Perspective: Drag the slider or enter a value in the field to set the angle of the light flare
effect.

Levels
Levels is a correction filter used to adjust color and brightness in video. By matching your
input source with your output, you can precisely compensate for differences and
standardize your video signals. This is a very effective method of remapping the total
range of the colors and improving the overall quality of the video.
l Click on Apply effect to activate the Open FX plug-in.
Channel: Select the particular color channel (red, green, or blue) or alpha channel that
you want to adjust, or adjust all (which corresponds to adjusting the brightness).

120 / 313
 Effects

Input Start/End: Use the slider to set the darkest and lightest values in the source
material.
Output Start/End: Use the slider to set the darkest and lightest values for the output.
For optimal contrast, leave the values at 0 and 100.
Gamma: Gamma compensates for difference in brightness between different sources
and corrects the output brightness.
Tip: To use this effect properly, you require the measuring instruments Histogram and
RGB parade.

Mask Generator
This effect lets you create a mask from any video or image. The video or image is
converted to gray scale and made partially transparent. Brightness (Luminance), one of
the color channels red/green/blue or an alpha channel (for image files in PNG or TGA
format) can be set under Type as an information source for transparency.
l Click on Apply effect to activate the Open FX plug-in.
Invert: Reverses transparent and opaque areas in the mask.
Low in/High in: Lets you determine a range between the minimum and maximum
brightness values for the source (independent of type) for which the image/video will be
opaque. If both values are the same, the mask created will have hard borders (threshold
value), whereas if the second value is higher, a graduated fade will appear at the mask
borders.
Low out/High out: Lets you set the minimum/maximum transparency value. If lows are
increased in value, the entire image will become brighter (less transparent)
Note: 1.0 corresponds to maximum white, therefore maximum opacity.

Unsharp mask
This filter lets you achieve high-quality sharpness. It's named after the process of
sharpening an image by comparing it with a blurred copy, where the differences between
the two images are used to increase contrasts.
l Click on Apply effect to activate the Open FX plug-in.
Amount: Lets you specify how distinct the effect should be.
Radius: Set a radius for the filter to search for details to help it sharpen the image.
Threshold: Sets the minimum value for difference in brightness between original pixels
for replacing them.

121 / 313
 Effects

Standard
Pre-configured effect combinations for direct use can be found here.

Position and animation effects

Position/Size
Values in: Set whether the values are displayed in percent or pixels.

Position
Left: Enter the start position from the left image border.
Top: Enter the start position from the top image border.
Center: Based on the current image size, the image starting points (left and top) will be
positioned in such a way as to center them.
Note: Negative values can, of course, also be entered. The image borders will then be
outside of the visible area.

Size
Width: Enter the width of the image here.
Height: Enter the height of the image here.
Maximize: The image is maximized to the resolution of the film.
Set original size: The image will be scaled to its original size.
Fix proportions: This option makes sure that the image will not be stretched or
distorted. The ratio between width and height will always stay the same.
Note: In the program monitor you can use the object handles on the sides of the
decorative element to adjust its size. The additional handles for rotation located at the
top can be used to tip the element and align it with a background object.

Zoom
Use the zoom slider to enlarge the complete section proportionately (values greater than
100) or to reduce it (values less than 100).
Note: When zooming, the image will be centered automatically, i.e. anchor point = center
point.

122 / 313
 Effects

Section
Sections may be used to display only part of the image.
l You can specify an image section in the program monitor. Use the eight handles to
reduce the frame displayed in the monitor and move it to the desired position.
Preview: With this button you can preview how segment will look like in the movie. Click
on this button a second time in order to keep editing this segment.
Movie size: The section will be adjusted to the size of the movie. This way if your raw
material is, for example, in 4K quality, you will get a section in top HD resolution.
Keep proportions: In this menu, you can select the format for the section. The format of
the original picture is used as the default.
Fullscreen: If this check box is selected, the opened section will be zoomed to fullscreen.
If this option is deactivated, only the section of the image within the frame will be
displayed and the edge will remain black or filled with the object behind it.

Camera/zoom shot
With this effect, you can move a previously selected frame inside the image, creating an
impression of camera movement or zoom.

Direction of movement
Determine the direction in which the selected section or image will move during the time
selected under "time period". In addition to horizontal and vertical movements, diagonal
movements are also possible.

Preview: Displays a preview of the section at the playback marker location.

From section: The selected picture section is displayed and is then zoomed out
to display the entire picture according to the time set in "Duration". If no portion is
previously set, a central portion of 50% of the picture is set.

To section: The entire picture is displayed and then zoomed in to show only a
smaller picture section according to the time set in "Duration". If no portion is previously
set, a central portion of 50% of the picture is set.

123 / 313
 Effects

Direction and time

The option selected here sets the position where the keyframes of each movement effect
are set by default. You determine the positions where a movements begins and ends.
Note: The automatically set keyframes can be edited, then the option will be set to "User
defined". Read the section "Change the keyframes of an effect after the fact" in the
chapter "Animate objects".

Reset: This button resets all of the current settings.

Rotation/Mirror
Rotation

Rotates the image on the horizontal axis.

Rotates the image on the vertical axis.

Rotates the image around its center point.

Straighten horizons
The image can be rotated around the axis using the slider. The image is automatically
zoomed to avoid black edges.
Show guidelines: Activating this check box displays a grid in the program monitor for
orientation during horizontal straightening.
Zoom automatically: This function is preset to active. Unwanted black borders that
result from horizon straightening are eliminated by zooming in on the image.
Note: If the image format does not completely conform to the current movie format and
already has black borders, these cannot be eliminated with the horizon straightening
function.

Rotate/Flip

Mirrors the image on the vertical axis.

Mirrors the image on the horizontal axis.

Rotates the image 90° clockwise.

124 / 313
 Effects

Rotates the image 90° counterclockwise.

Rotate image on monitor

In addition to the settings options in the Media Pool, you can also rotate a video object
directly on the monitor.
To do this, move the upper middle handles that are located within the monitor image.

3D distortion
This enables the perspective of images to be distorted and moved. This produces a 3D
impression by causing several components of the image to appear further in front of
others.

Enter the individual corner points numerically or move them in the program monitor
using the mouse here.
Note: Unlike Stereo3D, this does not involve genuine 3D positioning. The image is only
distorted so that it appears three-dimensional on a normal two-dimensional monitor.

Lens Correction
With the lens correction you can remove image distortions caused by certain lenses.
Even "converging lines" can be easily straightened. Here is an example:

125 / 313
 Effects

Original and picture after lens correction

Setup

Lens: Affects the curvature of the image

Section//zoom: Corrects the black edges that appear around the image when changes
are made to the "lens" parameter.
Automatic: Automatically sets the "Section/zoom" parameter to remove black edges
caused by changes to the "lens" parameter.
Note: Manually changing the "Section/zoom" parameter will automatically deactivate
this.

Perspective: Strongly upward or downward facing image material often contains

distortions which are unnatural for the human eye and causes so called "converging
lines". This parameter balances out these distortions, allowing images with "converging
lines" to appear more natural.
Tip: The lens correction parameter can be animated. This is particularly useful in videos
where the perspective changes, causing, for example, converging lines to also change over
time.

Movement templates
This is where you can find finished templates for movement effects that can be applied
to objects.

360° effects
This is where you'll find the 360° video editing effects. You can learn more about this
topic in the section 360° videos (⇗217).

126 / 313
 Effects

Audio effects in the Media Pool

The Media Pool offers various creative options for adding effects to audio objects.
Another advantage of these "object-oriented" effects is that the effect settings, including
automations are moved automatically with objects when they are moved, since they are
attached to the object and not to the track itself.
Under "Effects" > "Audio Effects" > "General" you'll find other audio effects besides
volume and panorama, including DeClipper, DeNoiser, DeHisser, equalizer, compressor
and StereoFX (these are all contained in the Audio Cleaning Editor), echo/reverb,
timestretch/resample, a sharp filter, a soft filter and distortion.
The faders AUX 1 and AUX 2 control the volume at which the object's signal is sent to
the corresponding FX tracks in the mixer.
Note: Volume and balance curves are also present in the track. The set values of the
curves add up respectively.

For more information see "Audio effects“.

Audio effect presets

In the Media Pool you'll find a broad palette of effect settings which you can apply to
audio objects via drag & drop.

Customized templates in the Media Pool

Your custom effects configurations in the Media Pool can be saved and used again later.
You can access your custom configurations in the Media Pool effect dialogs by clicking
on the arrow. This folder will be empty at first because you still have to create your own
configurations.

Design elements and image objects

The tab "Templates" contains a wide selection of decorative elements: templates for
collages, color fields for your own backgrounds or test images and image objects that can
be freely positioned and animated.
l Open the categories one after the other to get a general impression.
A simple example for use are the frames under the image objects. These are virtual
picture frames that can be modified by video mix effects. Simply drag them directly onto
an object, which will then appear as if inside a picture frame.

127 / 313
 Effects

The design elements create own objects on a different track. You can use the lower
handles to adjust the size of the borders to fit any length of the video. You can also
achieve interesting effects by fading in and out.
Note: Some design elements require a free track 6. In the case of these elements, you will
be informed by a dialog before you can use them.

Extra effects using plug-ins

Video effect plug-ins are additional programs from third-party manufacturers that can be
used to apply additional video effects to video objects. MAGIX VIDEO PRO X supports
the plug-in format of the freeware video editing software VirtualDub, as well as the
"VitaScene" and "Adorage" programs by proDAD and effects based on OpenFX standard.
Install the OpenFX plug-ins and click on "Scan" under "Effects" > "Extra effects" in the
Media Pool. Then restart MAGIX VIDEO PRO X. OpenFX plug-ins appear directly below
and are ready for use.
Important applications for plug-ins:
l Removal of broadcast logos
l Removal of interference
l Addition of special effects

Using video effect plug-ins

First select the video or image object. Then open the Plug-in manager in the Media Pool
(under "Effects -> Additional effects -> Plug-in manager"). This opens the manager dialog
for video effect plugins, which lists all available plugins on the right side of the dialog.
Note: In order to use plug-ins, you have to install them first. After you install the plug-ins,
they will be displayed.

Video plug-ins manager

128 / 313
 Effects

Effect templates for plug-ins: MAGIX VIDEO PRO X does not include plug-ins due to
licensing reasons.

You can save your settings by pressing the "Save" button and remove them
by pressing "Delete".

Available plug-ins: All available plug-ins are listed here.

Add plug-in: The selected plug-in is added to the editing chain (plug-ins on the current
object list is on the right). You can load as many plug-ins as you like simultaneously. They
are then edited subsequently according to the list sequence. You can load as many plug-
ins as you like simultaneously. They are then edited subsequently according to the list
sequence. The plug-in order can be changed using drag & drop in the list.
Plug-in settings: Here you can open the settings dialog for the selected plug-in. All plug-
in settings on the entire list can be saved as a preset (effect templates for plug-ins) .
Advanced...: Opens the Advanced settings dialog.
Navigation buttons: Switch to the previous or next movie via the navigation buttons in
the lower part of the dialog of a movie.
Apply from previous: Uses the settings of the most recently set movie. This option is
only active if you are editing objects with the navigation buttons (see above).
OK: The adjustments made to the settings will be applied to the current object.
Apply to all: The effects will be applied to all objects in the movie.
Cancel: Closes the dialog, the settings will not be applied.

Advanced...
In the "Advanced" dialog, you can specify the search path for plug-ins. MAGIX VIDEO PRO 
X checks in these folders for available plug-in files at program start and adds these to the
list of available plug-ins. With "Add path" you can add new search paths, Delete path
removes them from the list again.
Check for file extension only: This accelerates the search for new plug-ins when a
larger number of plug-ins are available, as only the file extension is checked for validity,
not the actual plug-in.
Search subfolders:The search will be extended to include the subfolders.
Local settings
Dynamically recalculate video effect plug-ins for bitmaps for every frame: If you
have to apply a plug-in to a bitmap (image) object, you have to activate this option if the
plug-in creates moving effects.

129 / 313
 Effects

Create effects masks

Effects masks help you to apply effects in different areas of one video image with varying
intensity. A specific image is used as a mask to determine the specific areas where the
effect should be applied.
Typical application include:
l Image optimization: A typical example is a horizontal pan across a horizon, in which
case the upper or lower area of the image is brightened or colored in.
l Eye-catching color gradients, colorations, etc.
l Special effects such as pixelation of a car license plate.
Effects masks are regular image objects, and as such may be animated or attached to a
certain image position to use them as moving video images. Here's how to do it:
1. Select the object in the arrangement to apply the effects mask to.

2. Open the desired effects page in the Media Pool. These must be parameters from
the "Video effects" area (without "speed" and "Chroma Key").
3. Set up the effect parameters in the Media Pool that should be applied using the
effect mask.
4. Click on the menu button on the effects page and select the "Load effect mask"
entry from the menu.

5. Now, find the template for SD and HD material in the folder that opens. Double-
click the mask you want to apply. The brighter the area in the effects mask, the
stronger the effect will be. Black indicates no effect, and white indicates full effect.
When using your own color images, the brightness values are used.
6. In the effect overview, you can define if effects mask should also be used for other
effects Click on the masking button for every effect the mask will be applied to.

7. Click on the down arrow button again and select the "Delete effect mask" entry
from the menu to remove the effect mask.

130 / 313
 Effects

Create an animated effects mask

You can also create animated effect masks in Flash format to adjust the effect regulation
to the moving video images. To do this you will need to have either Xara Photo &
Graphics Designer 2013 (or newer) or Xara Designer Pro X (or newer) installed on your
computer.
To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Select the image or video object for which you would like to create an effect mask.
2. Open the effects page in the Media Pool that will be used as the effect. Click on the
down arrow button and select "Create effect mask" from the menu.
Here you will also see the option for deleting the effect mask if necessary.

MAGIX Foto Designer or Xara Designer Pro X will start with the animation document and
the opened frame gallery. The first frame will be added automatically and will display the
selected image or video object from MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.
3. Create effect mask:
Note: Be aware that the lighter the effect mask, the stronger the effect will be later in
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X. Black indicates no effect, and white indicates full effect. The best
option is to color the object that will be used as the effect mask white and to adjust the
intensity of the effect yourself in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.

a. Use the tools in the editor to create the desired mask form. Add an object that
marks the area where the effect should later be applied. It will automatically be
assigned to the first frame.
b. With the "Invert mask" function in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X you can use an object to
indirectly select the precise area where the effect should not be applied.
c. Color the object white.
d. Give the object a name by clicking on "Names..." in the layer. Enter the name under
"Names" and click on "Add" and then "Close".
e. Create additional frames by clicking on "Copy" in the Frame Animation Gallery. The
object that should move will automatically be added to the new frame.

131 / 313
 Effects

f. With each new frame the video moves to the corresponding position making it
easier for you to adjust the objects directly on the video image by moving them to
the right position.

Invert mask
You can also invert masks: Click on the arrow in the mask effect's object, which appears
when you position the mouse over this object. This makes all dark areas light, and all light
areas dark. To revert the masks, click the arrow again.

Layer masks
You'll find various layer masks in the Media Pool under "Templates" > "Image objects".
These masks can be imported directly into your project as an object. The mask
automatically applies the chroma key effect "Alpha" and can be used to crop objects in a
particular form. This can be used to create interesting collages with two overlapping
objects that blend into one another with a layer mask.

The black area of the mask contains the top object, the white area is the object
underneath. If you apply a gray scale mask, the two object will be mixed according to the
desired transparency.
You can also invert masks: Click on the arrow in the mask's object, which appears when
you position the mouse over this object. To revert the masks, click the arrow again.

132 / 313
 Effects

Animate objects using keyframes (effects curves)

The Media Pool's "Effects" tab under "Video effects" and "Movement effects" provide
you with the effects which can animated using keyframes.
The following objects can be animated:
l Combined objects
l Video objects
l Image objects (still images and panoramas)
l Title objects
l Audio objects (in the Media Pool under "Effects" > "Audio effects" > "General")
l MAGIX 3D Maker objects (3D texts)

Preparing animations
l First, select the object in the project window to animate. For complex animations,
we recommend placing a marker beforehand for orientation.
l In the Media Pool, open the "Effects" tab and click on the effect you would like to
animate under "Video effects" or "Movement effects".
l If necessary, set up the effect however you would like it for the start of the
animation.

l Using this button, at the bottom of the Media Pool, a timeline may be shown or
hidden. You can see here which animated effects are currently applied to the
selected object. Keyframes can be placed, selected, moved and deleted.
There are two stippled lines in the timeline to help you orientate yourself while you edit
movement. These lines will help you recognize the start or end of the transition.

133 / 313
 Effects

Place keyframe
Click the timeline to set the playback marker at the locations where a keyframe should be
added.
Tip: You can also use the timeline in the project window for exact positioning. Using
project markers is recommended in this case.

This button places keyframes for all parameters required in the animation.
l Additional keyframes may be added simply by placing the playback marker at the
next keyframe location and changing the effects parameters directly.
The positioned keyframes may also be retroactively moved via drag & drop.

Copy a keyframe

Select the keyframes to be copied by clicking them and then press the "Copy" button.

Next, set the playback marker at the location for insertion and click the "Insert"
button.

Display keyframes of individual parameters

Multiple keyframes are added simultaneously to an effect if it includes multiple
parameters.
l Click the small arrow beside the name of the animated effect to display all of its
parameters.

l All keyframes of the effects parameter can be individually moved, deleted,

activated, and deactivated.

Note: Only those parameters are listed which are used for the animation. As soon as
another parameter is required for editing the effect, it becomes visible to you here.

134 / 313
 Effects

Retroactively editing an effect's keyframes

Previously set keyframes can be retroactively and temporally moved and their
parameters can edited.
l Keyframes can be moved using drag & drop. Simply click on the keyframe to be
moved and drag it to the desired position.
l To change an effects setting for an already positioned keyframe, click the keyframe
and adjust the effect in the Media Pool.

Delete Keyframe

Select the keyframe to be deleted by clicking it.

This button removes the selected keyframe.

Keyframe Interpolation
Keyframe interpolation refers to the process of how the transition is made from one
keyframe to the next. This can either be constant ("linear") or flattened ("Bezier"). The
interpolation type for each animated effect can be set using the interpolation buttons in
front of the keyframe bar.

In addition to the standardized curve progressions you can also create any kind of curve
progression you like.

Linear interpolation is the default setting. This transfers the values evenly as a
straight line to the following keyframe.

The automatic Bezier interpolation applies an approximation curve at the

keyframe. This makes the movement progression softer and more natural.

Manual Bezier interpolation enables you to set the value for each keyframe
separately.

135 / 313
 Effects

To do this, right-click on one of the keyframes in the keyframe bar. This will open a
context menu with four options.

Linear (default setting): Keyframes set to "Linear" are entered and left with a constant
parameter change.
Ease In: In this setting the parameter change slows down just before the keyframe. The
effect curve before the keyframe is slowly flattened. The effect curve after the keyframe
proceeds in a linear fashion. This setting is not suitable for the first keyframe.
Ease Out: In this setting the parameter change starts after the keyframe and becomes
slowly more intense. The effect curve after the keyframe starts off flat and becomes
progressively steeper. The effect curve before the keyframe proceeds in a linear fashion.
This setting is not suitable for the last keyframe.
Ease In/Ease Out: This sets the options "Ease In" and "Ease Out" in combination.
Note: Please keep in mind that the settings for two keyframes that follow one another
always work together. This means that if you set one keyframe to "Linear" and the next
one to "Ease In", the effect curve will still be slightly bent. In this case, a complete linear
change of the parameter can only be achieved by setting the second keyframe to "Linear"
or "Ease Out".

Editing an effects curve in the object

Activate effects curve: For each animated effects parameter, a curve is created and
placed over the object. Click this button to display the effects curve on the object.
Edit curve points: The curve point can either be edited with the individual curve points
(in "Standard" mouse mode) or by freely drawing the effect curve (in "Curve" mouse
mode).

New curve points can be added to the curve in "Standard" mode via "Ctrl + Shift" and
clicking; existing ones can be deleted in the same way. Every curve point can be moved
with the mouse horizontally and vertically.

136 / 313
 Effects

Note: The buttons for activating effects curves are first displayed once the first keyframe
has been placed.

Effects curves – additional functions

The context menu can also be opened via the small arrow beside
the effects indicator.
Delete effects: Removes the selected effect completely.
Delete effects curve: Removes the effects curve to be created again.
Copy effects curve: The effects curve is copied to the clipboard to be used at other
positions.
Insert effects curve: A previously copied effects curve can be inserted elsewhere with
this function at any time. This may be in the same object or in another object.
Note: If you would like to insert the curve into a longer or shorter object, then think about
setting the option "Connect curve length with object length" correctly before copying.

Connect curve length with object length: If this option is set, then changes to object
length will affect the effects curve accordingly.
Load effects curve: A previously saved effects curve may be loaded via this menu item.
This is useful, for example, if you have added your own default animations.
Note: The current effects curve will be overwritten as another one is loaded.

Save effects curves: Effects curves can be saved as a separate file. This is useful if you
want to add your own default animations and load them again at other positions.
Tip: Be aware that during saving the setting "Connect curve length with object length" is
saved as well and applied during loading.

Edit effect curve

This dialog serves to stretch, compress and move effect curves within an object. The info
bar of the dialog will display the effect, whose automation curve is currently being edited.
Move position
Time axis: With each click on the arrow, you can move the effect curve forward or back
by the displayed time value.
Effect: Every click on the arrow up or down moves the effect curve by the entered value.
Depending on the effect, it is possible to enter exact or percent values.

137 / 313
 Effects

Stretching & compressing

Time axis: The effect curve will be stretched or compressed by the entered time value.
Invert reverses the curve on the time axis and reinserts it in "reverse". The entire object
duration will be considered.
Effect: The effect curve is stretched or compressed in its values, no time-related editing
takes place. The selected option (see table) is decisive in editing.
Mirror: The entire curve is mirrored along the X-axis, whose position is determined by the
following option (see table).

... around the object center: The X-axis lies exactly at the center
of the object.

... at the center of the curve: The X-axis lies between the upper
and lower automation point.

... at the curve minimum: The X-axis lies at the level of the lowest
automation point.

... at the curve maximum: The X-axis lies at the level of the
highest automation point.

Making objects "fly" across the screen

The effect "Position/Size" can be used to animate objects or titles appear to "fly" across
the screen. In this case it is recommended that the start and end point of the animation
are placed outside of the image.
You will need a video object and a second object to be animated, for example a title that
is to fly through the video image. Here's how to do it:
1. Click on the program monitor and zoom out of the video image (Ctrl + mouse
wheel). This displays the workspace at the edges of the reduced preview image.
2. Select the effect "Position/size".
3. Move the object to be animated to the position on the workspace where the
animation should start. For example, to the left of the preview window.

138 / 313
 Effects

4. Position the playback marker at the location where the animation should start.
5. Create a keyframe for the animation start.
6. Position the playback marker at the position where the object to be animated
should disappear from the image.
7. Move the object to the position on the workspace where the animation should end;
for example, to the right of the preview image. This will place a second keyframe
for the end of the animation automatically.
8. Play back the result. The object to be animated should now fly from left to right
through the video picture.

Attach to picture position in the video

You can attach an image object or a title to moving image content of a video, which is
known as object (or motion) tracking. The attached object automatically completes the
movement of the image content from the video. For example, you could use this method
to insert a hat that stays on someone's head throughout, even if the person hops through
the picture.
l Place the desired image object (e.g., a photo of a hat), on the track below a video
with moving image content (e.g., a walking person).
l Right click the image object and select the "Attach to picture position in the video".
l Read the dialog and then click "Continue".
Note: If you want to attach two objects, e.g. a title and a speech bubble, an additional
dialog appears, which lets you select the objects you want to attach to your video.

l The next dialog asks you to draw a frame around the image content to be tracked.
l Then, the movement of the object will be tracked automatically.

139 / 313
 Effects

Image optimization for individual objects

The context menu features various adjustment options for selected video and image
objects.
Interpolation for interlace source material: Select this option to remove interlace
artifacts from the (video) image. If, for instance, you extract still shots from a video,
interlace artifacts appear in sequences which feature movement.
Anti-interlace filter: Select this option for freeze frames with very fine structures and
high contrast. This filter reduces line flickering during TV playback.
Border cropping offset: Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback on
your television. Values stored in "Film effect settings" will be applied.

Effect settings for the entire movie

You can open the effects from the the settings via the "Effects" menu.
All of the settings made here influence the entire movie. Settings are made separately for
each individual movie in the project. On the right, you'll see a preview of the current
setting. Use the position slider to jump to different positions in the movie or to various
scenes in order to see how the selected setting affects the image material.

Brightness/Contrast
Brightness: Use the sliders to reduce or increase the object's brightness.
Selective brightness (gamma): “Gamma” determines the mean gray scale that can be
calculated from the various color ranges. "Selective brightness" is the most important
function for enhancing images. In the preset list, select the various envelope curves to
edit only the dark, median, or brightest areas of the image.
Using the fader you can also set the power of the brightness/darkness adjustments.
Contrast: You can increase or lower the object's contrast.
Adjust color space: This option is effective for correcting extreme colors that violate TV
standards and can no longer be displayed properly on-screen. The color saturation of the
affected material is thereby reduced until the maximum permitted value is reached.

Paint
Hue: Use the palette to select a hue for coloring-in the picture.
Saturation: Use the saturation slider to increase or reduce the hue proportions in the
image. A newly developed algorithm is applied which makes color changes related to

140 / 313
 Effects

other parameters (e.g. contrast settings) in order to achieve the most natural coloration
possible.
Red/Green/Blue: Changes the color portion mix.

Sharpness
Use the slider to adjust the sharpness or blurriness of the entire film.
Apply to: Set whether the sharpness should only affect edges or whether the blurriness
should only affect surfaces. This enables you to effectively reduce ongoing image
distortions.
Presets: Try out the presets from the preset menu.
Temporarily switch off all effects: With this option, you can temporarily deactivate all
effects. This way, you can quickly compare the original with the edited version.

TV picture
This option ensures that the image size is adapted to fit the real television picture (anti
cropping). Without this adjustment, the screen could cut off edges of the image in some
cases.
Fade in TV display area in the program monitor: This option displays the image
borders of the television as lines in the program monitor. The four image borders of the
TV display area can be set by means of the 4 input fields. Here, it is of course necessary
to know the actual size of the TV picture. To determine it, proceed as follows:
The four input fields also enable the borders of the four sides to be adjusted freely in
percent. It is important to find the optimal balance between distortion, reduction, bar
formation, and image cropping:
l If the same value is entered for every margin the image size is reduced
proportionally. In this case no distortions will occur, but there will be bars along the
edges.
l If different values are entered for the 4 fields the image size will not be reduced
proportionally. This will distort the image.
Apply border range to:This option enables the input values for the four image borders
to be applied to the respective photos in reduced form. The result can immediately be
viewed on the program monitor.

Determining the visible TV frame size

To determine the picture properties of your television as well as optimal image size editor
settings, you should perform a test run:

141 / 313
 Effects

l Load the project "Visible TV image" from the folder "My Media -> Projects ->
Visible TV image" in the Media Pool.
l Play back the film and read the instructions on the program monitor.
l Burn the project to DVD
l Place the disc into your player and play back the movie. Compare the TV picture to
the picture displayed on your program monitor by MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.
l Determine the proportional value of the borders cropped by the television with the
4 measurement scales along the edges of the test picture.
l Enter the values in the “Full TV size” editor.
The image size is now optimized to your TV picture. Please note: Depending on device
settings and disc carrier type, the cropping values may vary slightly.

Film looks and lookup tables

With lookup tables, you can apply specific color and contrast settings to raw camera
material.
Lookup tables are provided by camera manufacturers. This means the camera material
will be processed as the camera manufacturer had intended it. The image contains
saturated colors and strong contrasts. Lookup tables also enable you to modify visual
aesthetics. Certain film genres each have their own characteristic color properties: Crime
thrillers often use strongly saturated, almost monochrome colors, whereas romantic
comedies often have bright, saturated colors.
For many film productions, you can find their lookup tables online to download. You can
also use such external lookup tables in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X to increase your stock of
lookup tables. The lookup tables provided can be found in the Templates tab in the
Media Pool. There is a preview for each lookup table. To load a lookup table, drag & drop
the object into the Timeline.

Lookup tables (LUT)

Lookup tables (LUT) contain predefined values, which can be called up without having to
be calculated first. They are implemented in various industries, including image editing,
such as in color render improvement.
You can use lookup tables in creative areas to give your movies a certain look, for
example "Matrix style".
But lookup tables can also be used to calibrate log/flat formats. Some cameras offer
these formats to create low-contrast original material, for easier editing later. Often,
manufacturers of such camera models offer corresponding lookup tables for conversion.

142 / 313
 Effects

Currently, MAGIX VIDEO PRO X supports lookup tables in cube format.

Some lookup tables for specific film looks are already included and can be set. See if you
can find the right look.
Tip: You can search the Internet for terms like "color grading lut" and "cube lut" for
corresponding lookup tables and save these on your PC. You can then load and use them
in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.

Camera lookup tables

Lookup tables from different camera manufacturers will adjust the image to appear as
they intended it. With these tables, you can achieve a saturated, neutral image with rich
contrasts.

Effect lookup tables

This folder contains lookup tables which you can use to give your video image a certain
atmosphere.

Object properties
In the dialog "Object Properties", the video material properties will be listed in more
detail.
l Right-click on the the object to open the dialog in the context menu.
l In the "Video" tab, you can see the color depth, color sampling and the color profile
for your original material. Here, you can also access the camera lookup tables from
the Media Pool.
l You can access the save destination folder for the lookup tables using the folder
symbol. Here, you can see the path information, add further lookup tables or create
your own.

Create your own lookup tables

l To create your own lookup tables, first load the film material.
l Now, use the individual color and contrast effects until you are satisfied with the
image.
l Use the arrow button in the effect dialog to open the effects menu. Gradation
curves from the contrast dialog and color properties can be saved as a lookup table.
In the following dialog, all the active effects that can be saved as a lookup table will
be listed.
l Click on "Next" to open the save destination folder for the lookup tables.

143 / 313
 Effects

l Choose an appropriate name.

l Your new lookup table can be accessed later by going to the lookup folder in the
Media Pool.

144 / 313
 Audio

Audio
For more comprehensive editing of the audio track beyond adjusting volume, the audio
must be displayed on a separate track.
1. To split the audio onto a separate track, right-click on the object you want to work
with.
The context menu will open.
2. Select Audio and waveform display > Audio on its own track. The audio track of
this object is now displayed on its own separate track directly below and can be
edited.
In principle, any track in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X can be used as an audio track. There are no
specific track types. This means that you can also assign different kinds of audio, e.g. as
background music, to other tracks. But it is easier not to mix object types within one
track.

Loading audio files

l All importable audio files can be accessed in the Media Pool.
l Double-clicking on a file name loads it from the Media Pool into the source
monitor. You can then preview them using the transport console on the source
monitor.
l The files can be moved to the project window or the project folder using drag &
drop. Tracks from audio CDs can also be integrated using drag & drop.
l A waveform display can be activated by right-clicking on the audio object. This
shows the volume progression.
l Edits, fine positioning, volume settings, and fading in and out can all be adjusted
directly in the project window using the object handles.
l Various effect curves can be selected for audio tracks, dynamically controlling
selectable effects, volume or stereo panorama.

Adjust loudness of all selected objects

This function adjusts the loudness values of all selected objects according to the
"reference object". The object that has just been activated is used as the reference
object.
What you'll need
l Objects need to be at least 5 seconds long for a reasonable calculation. An object
length of 10 seconds or longer will provide better results.

145 / 313
 Audio

l Background music provides the best results. In the vast majority of cases, music
provides a homogeneous sound image and minimal volume changes (of course, very
good results can also be obtained with video material).
Open
1. Set the object loudness of the reference object to the desired value.
2. Select all objects (including the reference object) whose loudness you would like to
adjust.
3. Right click the reference object to open its context menu. Select "Adjust loudness
of selected objects" (for Combo objects in the submenu „Audio functions“).
Or:
Press the Shift key and click on the reference object. Then go to "Effects > Audio
object effects" and select "Adjust loudness of selected objects".
Result:
l MAGIX VIDEO PRO X determines all loudness values for the selected objects und
adjusts them to fit the reference object. The object loudness of the remaining
objects will also be adjusted accordingly.
l If the adjustment results in an object loudness which is so high that it could possibly
cause clipping, MAGIX VIDEO PRO X will provide an automatic correction. This will
lower the volume of all objects (including the reference object).
Problems & solutions
For objects containing large loudness differences or noises (e.g. in video camera
recordings) the result may not always be satisfactory. Prepare these objects as follows:
1. Split the object at the corresponding transitions before carrying out the
function.Loud
2. Open the function (see Open).
3. Afterwards transition the objects with simple crossfades.

Edit volume curve

You can use volume curves to easily edit the audio track of an object as you wish.
1. In a project, select an object whose volume you would like to adjust.
2. Open the volume curve by going to "Effects" > "Audio object effects" > "Volume
curve".
You will now see an additional line in the audio track; this is the volume curve.
3. When you touch this line with your mouse cursor, the cursor is transformed from a
hand symbol to an arrow. Now if you click on the line, you will create a point

146 / 313
 Audio

(keyframe), which you can grab with the mouse cursor and drag to a lower position.
This lowers the volume of the overall object.

4. Create another point. Move this point down too and make sure you don't lower the
entire volume curve, but simply a section of it.
You can create as many keyframes a you wish, adjusting the volume curve section by
section, untill all segments play at the appropriate volume. Check whether the keyframe
are positioned right by playing back the track (spacebar starts and stops playback) and
listening to hear the effect of the keyframes.
If you would like to move a keyframe to the left or right, grab it with the mouse cursor
and move it to the right position.
If you would like to delete keyframes, use the effect overview in Media Pool under
"Effects" > "Audio effects" > "General" as described under "Animate objects, effect
curves". Select the keyframe that you wish to delete and click on the Delete button.

Audio mixdown
This option combines all audio objects in a single audio file (mixdown). The audio material
in the project then occupies a single track, so you have a clear overview of other objects
and more space for them.
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X automatically normalizes the audio file, i.e. the loudest point of the
wave audio object is identical to the highest value of the 16-bit resolution ceiling. This
guarantees the same sound quality, even if you repeat the mix down procedure in the
project window or you combine the mix down file with other wave audio objects again
and again. The mixdown function is very helpful if you want to keep on using the
mixdown object.

Volume reduction
The Volume reduction command from the audio object context menu automatically
dampens the volume for the length of the audio object on all other tracks. The volume on
the track of the selected object thus remains unchanged.

147 / 313
 Audio

Only original sound: Here you can also specify whether you want to dampen only the
original sound of the video or all audio tracks.
Transition Length: In the dialog you can set the dampening and the length of the fade in
and out. You can use this command while recording audio (Audio recording, advanced
options).

Audio effects
Using audio effects
Object effects
Individual, customizable effects or preset effect templates are also available for audio
objects. These are only applied to the corresponding, selected object. These effects can
be found in the Media Pool under "Effects" > "Audio effects" or in the menu under
"Effects" > "Audio object effects".

Track effects
Track effects always apply to all audio objects of a track. They are set in the mixer. Open
the Mixer using the M key.
Tip: You can adjust the volume for an entire track directly in the track header.

Audio effect plug-ins

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X supports VST effect plug-ins. These are usually effect modules such
as reverb, equalizer, dynamics compression, etc.
Installation:
The relative plug-ins must be installed before before using the audio effect plug ins. The
installation of the plug-ins is carried out depending on the type of plug-in that is used.
VST plug-ins are usually stored in a certain folder.

148 / 313
 Audio

In MAGIX VIDEO PRO X, you need to enter the folder for the VST plug-ins in their path
settings. After the path has been indicated, MAGIX VIDEO PRO X scans it for working
plug-ins and makes them available for use.
Using plug-ins:
Plug-in effects can be used in an audio effects rack at the track, object, and master level.

Clicking this button lets you insert plug-in effects. The effects user interface will then
be opened and active. After having closed the user interface, you can reopen it by
double-clicking the plug-in name.

This button removes effects from the rack. Since deactivated effects don't use up
any computing power, this option is used mostly for maintaining an overview.

Master effects
Master effects influence the mixed sum of all audio tracks. To this end a Master Audio
Effects Rack and additional plug-ins are installed in the Mixer window. Additionally there
is the special MAGIX Mastering Suite for the perfect sound.

The Audio effects dialog

Some of the following effects can be opened individually (context menu) or occasionally
as part of the track or master effects rack. However, the functionality remains the same.

Effect devices controls

Some effect options (e.g. options from the "Echo/Reverb" or "Time stretching" effects
menu) open a graphic interface that recreates an audio studio effect.
These virtual effects are controlled in the conventional way by using slider controls,
turning knobs, or buttons, or alternatively using the graphic sensor fields.
Sensor fields: You can control sensor fields intuitively with mouse movements. The
graphics and the respective effect setting change in response to each other.

Power switch: Every effect device in the rack may be switched on or off separately.
This button allows you to directly compare the neutral, unedited sound of the audio
object with the effect setting you have chosen.

149 / 313
 Audio

Reset: Every effect has a reset button that restores the effect device’s initial default
state. In this starting point, no computing power is required and no effect is added to the
sound
Each effect device features a selection of presets that can be selected via the drop-down
menu.
A/B: The A/B button compares two settings with each other. If you have selected a
preset for the effect and make manual changes to it later, you can compare the original
preset sound with the new settings by using the A/B button.

Timestretch/Resample
This effect device changes the object’s speed and/or pitch.

Tempo: This control changes the tempo independent of the pitch ("time-stretching"). The
object acts as if it were compressed or stretched on the track.
Pitch: This control changes the pitch independent of the speed of the object ("pitch
shifting").
+/- buttons: Use this feature to change the pitch in semitones.
Setup: This button opens a setup dialog where you can select various pitchshifting and
timestretching procedures.
l Standard: Time stretching and pitch shifting in standard quality. The method is
suitable for audio material without a pronounced beat. Existing beat markers are
evaluated to improve audio quality.
l Smoothed: Time stretching and pitch shifting for audio material without abrupt
elements. The method is suitable for several voice orchestra instruments, surfaces,
speech and singing. Beat markers will not be evaluated. A significantly more
demanding algorithm is used for this, which requires more processing time. The
material may also be used with very large factors (0.2... 50) without causing severe
artifacts. To do this, the material is "smoothed" to give it a softer sound and a
different phase length. This smoothing is hardly audible, e.g. with speech, singing,
or solo instrumentation. More complicated spectra — such as a sound mixture
containing different instruments or a finished mix — can cause problems.

150 / 313
 Audio

l Beat marker slicing: Beat-synchronous time stretching and pitch shifting via
splitting and temporal repositioning. Exactly set beat markers are required at the
beats or transients. Markers can be generated in real time (automatically) or read
out from the source file, as long as they are available (patched). The MAGIX Music
Editor contains a patch tool which allows the user to set markers manually. The
algorithm is suitable for rhythmic material that can be divided into individual beats
or notes. This requires that the material contains low levels before and after the
individual beats or notes.
l Beat marker stretching: Beat-synchronized time stretching and pitch shifting in
high audio quality. The material is stretched between beat markers positions so that
the impacts or attacks at the beat markers positions are not impaired by stretching.
The markers can be generated in real time from the audio material (automatically),
provided they are present (patched). This method is suitable for rhythmic material
that cannot be divided into individual beats or notes because the beats or notes
overlap each other.
l Beat Marker Stretching (smoothed): Beat-synchronized time stretching and pitch
shifting in high audio quality, even with more intense time stretches. Beat markers
are used at the beats or transients. The markers can be generated in real time from
the audio material (automatically), or read out from the wave file, provided they are
present (patched). This method is suitable for rhythmic material that cannot be
divided into individual beats or notes because the beats or notes overlap each
other. This method requires a relatively high amount of processing time. If you have
a slow system, you should only use it if needed.
l Universal HQ: A universal time stretching and pitch shifting method for very high
audio quality. Suitable for all types of audio material. Existing beat markers are
evaluated to improve audio quality. This method requires so much processing time,
that a real-time application is recommended only in exceptional situations.
l Monophonic voice: Time-stretching and pitch-shifting for vocal solos, speech or
solo instruments. Your material should be free of any background noises; strong
reverb can also make it difficult to apply this method. With suitable material the
audio quality is very high. In addition, the formants remain when pitchshifting. Beat
markers will not be evaluated.
l Resampling: Pitch shift and tempo can not be changed individually. This method
requires comparably little CPU time.

Reverb
You can control the sound of the reverb effect using the following parameters:

151 / 313
 Audio

Room Size: Defines the size of the room (or the system for the plate and spring). The
larger a room, the longer the sound travels between walls or objects. With some low
"size" settings you can also reduce the distance between the individual reflections. This
allows resonance to develop (accentuated frequency ranges), which can sound
oppressive if the reverb sustain is too long.
Tone Quality: You can manipulate the sound characteristics of the effect to an extent.
The effect of this controller depends on the preset used. In rooms, "Color" controls the
dampening of the highs in the reverb (from dark to bright) as well as pre-filtering of the
signal. With plate and spring presets, this fader determines the dampening of the basses
as well.
Reverberation Time: With this knob you can adjust the reverberation time and
determine how much of it will be absorbed and, simultaneously, the reverb's decay.
Pre-Delay: The reverb portion ("Mix") and the early reflections play a big role in the
spatial perception of the sound. Here the time required for the perception of the early
reflection is know as "pre-delay". For sound sources that are close, the reverb portion is
usually low, and the early reflections reach the ear noticeably later than the direct sound.
By contrast, sound sources that are far away usually have a high reverb portion, and the
early reflections reach the ear almost simultaneously with the direct sound. The length of
the pre-delay can be used to influence the perceived "distance" between the sound
source and the listener.
Mix: This controller sets the mix ratio between the original and the edited signal. For
rooms, you can move a signal further into the room by increasing the effect share. The
last four presets are intended for use in an AUX channel of the mixer and are set to
100%.
Presets:
The presets represent the basic settings for the various room algorithms, which can be
varied along with the other parameters. In this respect, they are more than just parameter
sets.

Echo
This effect is like an echo which delays the signal and repeats it.
Delay: This sets the period of time between the individual echoes. The more the control
is turned to the left, the faster the echoes will follow each other.
Feedback: This adjusts the amount of echo. If you turn the dial completely to the left,
there is no echo at all; if you turn it completely to the right, there are seemingly endless
repetitions.

152 / 313
 Audio

Mix: This fader determines how much of the unprocessed original sound (dry signal) is
subjected to the echo (wet signal).

Audio effects in the Mixer

The Audio effects rack is opened in the mixer via the "FX" button for each track
or in the master area on the right.
Mastering also features the MAGIX Mastering Suite.
Reset clears all effect settings.

10-band Equalizer

The 10-band equalizer subdivides the frequency spectrum into 10 areas (‘bands’) and
equips them with separate volume controls. This makes it possible to create many
impressive effects, from a simple boosting of the bass to complete distortion. Note: If low
frequencies are boosted too much, the overall sound level is heavily increased, which
may cause distortion. In this event, adjust the overall volume downward by using the
‘master volume’ control situated at the bottom center of the effect rack.
Slider control: Each of the 10 frequency ranges can be separately boosted or turned
down with the 10 volume controls.
Link bands: Using this button randomly combines the frequency ranges with each other
in to avoid artificial-sounding overemphasis of an individual frequency range.
Touch screen (right EQ section): This is the ‘sensor field’ of the EQ. Here you can draw
any type of curve with the mouse. This will be immediately translated into a
corresponding control setting on the left side of the EQ.

153 / 313
 Audio

Compressor

The compressor is an automated, dynamic volume adjustment controller. Louder

passages become quieter and quiet passages become louder. A compressor is useful to
make spoken passages more audible against background noise or music in case simple
increase of the overall volume is insufficient. Several useful presets are included for this
purpose, however compression may also be set manually.
Threshold: Set the volume threshold, below and above which compression is applied.
Ratio: This parameter controls the amount of compression.
Attack: Sets the algorithm's reaction speed to increasing sound levels.
Release: Sets the algorithm's reaction speed to falling sound levels.
Gain: The gain controller amplifies the compressed signal.

Create mono objects

Mono recordings can leave noise on the second track, e.g. a mono microphone recording.
You can deactivate the track with the noise by selecting the function Use only left side
or Use only right side (but not with mono videos).
You can find this function in the audio and video object context menu under Audio 
functions.

Audio cleaning
In the context menu for an audio object, open the "audio cleaning" editor for correcting
noise, distortion or other audio discrepancies.

154 / 313
 Audio

Select the cleaning function you desire from the upper part of the dialog:
l The equalizer allows you to manipulate the frequency spectrum – perfect for
cleaning-up muffled dialog.
l The compressor is a dynamic volume control that lends a deeper, richer quality to
the overall sound.
l The Stereo FX processor controls the position of the sound within the stereo
panorama.
l DeClipper, DeNoiser and DeHisser are professional noise reduction tools for
removing noise and hiss.
Preset: You can find the right presets for your project in the preset menu.
Temporarily switch off all effects: With this option, you can temporarily deactivate all
effects.
Apply to all: Applies the selected cleaning settings of all effects to every scene of the
movie.

DeClipper
If the input level of an audio recording is too high, distortion may result at the louder
parts (the signal peaks). This digital distortion is also called "clipping": At the
overmodulated area, the values that are too high are simply cut off, and typical, quite
unpleasant-sounding crackling and distortion appear.
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X includes a special function for dealing with digital clipping and
analog distortions. This only works to a certain degree, of course. It's better to avoid
clipping during recording in the first place.
Using the fader you can set at what level the DeClipper should register a signal as being
overmodulated and, if required, correct it (Clip level). This is important, as different sound
cards show different clipping methods. The more the fader is turned up, the lower the
level recognized by the program as overmodulated. If the clip level is set too high,
unwanted sound modification may occur.
Get clip level: The clip level is gauged from the current position of the playback marker.
How to get clip level:
1. Set the playback position just before the loudest section.
2. Press "Get clip level".
3. For more precision, you can adjust the clip level control.

155 / 313
 Audio

DeNoiser
The DeNoiser removes persistent background noise like computer humming, hissing,
noises from sound cards, disturbance from ground wires, interference from audio-
equipment with high-impedance outputs (e.g. turntables), footsteps or rumbling sounds
from LPs.
The DeNoiser requires a noise sample. Some typical noise sounds are included in the
"Preset" selection menu.
Set the degree to which the noise should be reduced with the fader. It is often better to
reduce interference signals by 3 to 6 dB rather than as much as is possible so as to keep
the sound "natural".
A different option consists of creating a noise sample yourself. A short section from the
audio track in which the distortion can be found is all that's needed. To get it, switch to
the DeNoiser dialog by clicking "Advanced".

Advanced settings
Step 1: Choose noise sample
First of all, a sample of the distortion you wish to remove must be selected, a so-called
"Noise sample".
You have two options to choose from:
l Pick out typical background noise: You can select and use a number of typical
background noises from the flip menu. Select one and listen to it by pressing the
"Play" button. If it's similar to the background noise in your audio track, go ahead
and use it (see "Step 2: Removing background noise").
l Extract a new noise sample from an audio track: You can also pick out a short
passage (from the existing sound track) in which you can hear the background
noise.
Automatic search: Searches especially quiet passages in which background noise is most
noticeable.
Previous/play/next: This button allows you to play all of the passages found for easy
comparison.
Save as: Once found, you can save noise samples to the hard drive. They then appear as
entries in the "Typical background noises" flip menu to be used in other projects.
If you only wish to use the noise sample in the current project, you don't have to save.
Instead just go to the "Remove noise" category.
Step 2: Remove noise

156 / 313
 Audio

Noise level: The level of the noise reduction function should be set as precisely as
possible. Values that are too low are expressed in too low a distortion dampening level
and in artefacts, like noises or "twittering" (see below). Values that are too high give rise
to dull sounding results – the highs of the sound signal are also filtered out. Take your
time to find the best setting for an individual case.
Reducer: This sets the balance between the original signal and the signal with the applied
noise reduction. It's often better to reduce interference signals by 3 to 6 dB rather than
as much as is possible to keep the sound "natural". For buzzing, it’s best to apply
complete removal.

DeHisser
The DeHisser eliminates regular "white" noise typically produced by analog tape
recordings, microphone preamplifiers, or AD transformers. Noise reduction can be
adjusted in decibel increments with the fader. It is often better to reduce interference
signals by 3 to 6 dB rather than as much as is possible so as to keep the sound "natural".
Noise level: You can choose from different noise levels. You should set the selection as
precisely as possible. Setting the value too low will result in only partial removal of the
hissing. Settings that are too high lead to dull results – noise-like signal components (such
as the blow-off of wind instruments) are also removed.

Equalizer FX rack
The 10-band equalizer subdivides the frequency spectrum into ten areas (‘bands’) and
equips them with separate volume controls. This makes it possible to create many
impressive effects, from a simple boosting of the bass to complete distortion. If low
frequencies are boosted too much, the overall sound level is heavily increased which may
lead to distortion.
Slider control: Each of the ten frequency ranges can be separately boosted or turned
down with the ten volume controls.
Link frequency bands: The frequency fields can be bundled together flexibly in order to
avoid artificial-sounding overemphasis in individual frequency fields.

Compressor
The compressor is an automated, dynamic volume controller. Loud passages become
quieter and the total value is raised. This makes the volume more consistent and speech
easier to understand. A compressor is mainly useful in case background noise or music
interferes with speech and simply increasing the volume of the individual objects or
tracks does not result in any significant improvement.

157 / 313
 Audio

Ratio: Regulates the amount of compression applied.

Function: Defines the way compressor operates according to the audio material.

Stereo FX
With the Stereo FX processor, you can determine the positioning of the audio material in
the stereo panorama. If stereo recordings sound unfocused and undifferentiated, an
extension of the stereo base width can often provide better transparency.
Bandwidth control: This adjusts bandwidth between mono (all the way to the left),
unchanged base-width (center) and maximum band-width (“wide”, all the way to the
right).
Reducing the base width can produce an increase in the level. In extreme cases – when
the left and right channels include identical material and the base width control is pushed
to the extreme left on ”mono” – the result can be a level rise of 3 decibels.
Raising the base width (values over 100) diminishes the mono compatibility; this means
that some frequency ranges may cancel each other out if the stereo signal is played on a
mono device.

MAGIX Mastering Suite

MAGIX Mastering Suite is a special effects rack for use with the mixer master channel.
The effects in the Mastering Suite are used as part of the mastering process, in which the
mixed music piece is given a final polishing.

The On/Off switches switch the effects on and off individually. Each effect has a
range of presets that can be selected from a list along the lower border of the effect.
Each effect can be reset by pressing the Reset button.

Auto Mastering
The Auto Mastering feature enables you to automatically apply the sound of typical
musical styles from the past and present (e.g. 70s disco, 90s club, jazz etc.). The sound of
the source material is analyzed and appropriate equalizer and dynamic effects are
applied.

158 / 313
 Audio

1. Activate the Auto Mastering Wizard.

2. Now choose the musical style. MAGIX VIDEO PRO X will analyze the audio material
in the project. The settings that are used to achieve the optimal sound for a
particular musical style depend on the audio properties of the source material.
Use the Original interface in order to compare the original with the edited version.

Parametric 6-band equalizer

The parametric equalizer has six filter bands that you can use to shape the sound of the
music track. Each band is a filter with a typical "bell shape". You can increase or reduce
the signal level gain within a specific frequency range around an adjustable middle
frequency . The width of this frequency range is called bandwidth. The bandwidth is
defined by the Q value. The higher the Q value, the narrower and steeper the filter curve.
You can influence the basic sound of the mix by boosting or cutting specific frequency
ranges (low Q value) to give it more "depth" (lower mids 200-600 Hz) or more "air" (highs
10 kHz). You can also decrease very specific frequencies (high Q-value) to remove
unwanted noise.

Sensor field: The sensor field displays the resulting frequency response of the equalizer.
The frequency is displayed horizontally and the increase or decrease of the respective
frequency is displayed vertically.

159 / 313
 Audio

The blue bullets 1-6 symbolize the six frequency bands. You can move them around
with the mouse until you find the frequency response you want. The bandwidth (Q value)
can be adjusted using the mouse wheel.
The faders under the filter graphic display the parameters of the currently selected band.

You can use the knobs to set the values for each band more precisely. There is also a
numeric field for each parameter where values can be entered.
Gain: This controller allows you to raise or lower the filter. Setting the controller to 0
deactivates the filter so it does not use any processing time.
Freq: The center frequency of the individual filters can be set between 10 Hz and 24 kHz
with the frequency controller. The freedom to select frequency enables you to set
multiple filters to the same frequency in order to have a greater effect.
Q (Bandwidth): Here you can set the bandwidth of the individual filters to between 10
Hz and 10 kHz.
Bands 1 and 6 are special: Their Filter Curves can be edited in three different modes. The
four editing points in the graphic have different functions in each mode.

Peaking: Here the effect curve is brought closer to the working point (which
represents the peak of the curve) from both sides simultaneously.

Shelving (Basic setting): Here the working point displays the beginning of the filter
curve. From this point on there is a gentle increase or decrease in the frequency.

High or Low Pass:In Band 1 the working point displays the frequency which is
filtered out of particularly high or low frequencies.
You can control the output level of the equalizer with the Peak Meter . The output
amplification beside it lets you offset the level changes resulting from EQ adjustments.
Peak meter: You can control the output level of the equalizer with the Peak meter. The
output amplification beside it lets you offset the level changes resulting from EQ
adjustments.

Multimax
Multimax is a compressor with three independent frequency bands. The dynamics are
edited separately for each band. The advantage of a multi-band compressor versus a
"normal" compressor is that the "pumping" tendency and other unwanted side effects are

160 / 313
 Audio

dramatically reduced while editing the dynamics. For instance, it can prevent a peak in
the bass range from suppressing the entire signal. Multiband technology also lets you
specifically edit individual frequency ranges.

Setting the frequency bands: The settings of the frequency bands are changed directly
in the graphic. Simply click on the separator lines and move them.
Lows/mids/highs: These knobs control the level of compression for each frequency
band.
Link: When this button is activated and a fader is adjusted, all other faders are changed
proportionally. However, the way the dynamics are edited is not affected.
Presets:In MultiMax, you can use Presets 2 to open further special features:
l Cassette NR-B decoder: MAGIX VIDEO PRO X simulates decoding of Dolby B + C
noise suppression if a Dolby player is not available. Cassettes recorded with Dolby
B or C sound more muffled and dull if played back without the corresponding
Dolby.
l De-esser: These special presets help to remove overstressed hissing sounds from
speech recordings.

Stereo processor
With the Stereo Enhancer you can determine the positioning of the audio material in the
stereo balance. If the stereo recordings sound unfocused and undifferentiated, an
extension of the stereo base-width can often provide better transparency.
Use the maximize feature to move the echo (e.g. into the foreground) and improve the
stereo picture.

161 / 313
 Audio

Volume controller: Adjusts the volume of every single channel, thereby adjusting the
entire panorama. The reduction of left and right levels is displayed under the control
buttons.
Pan direction: Use this controller to move the sound source from the middle into stereo
panorama. The signals at the outer edges of the sound picture remain unchanged.
Multiband: This can be used to switch Stereo FX to Multiband mode. Stereo editing only
applies to the middle frequency, the bass and highs remain unchanged.
Bandwidth/maximize sensor field: Adjusts the base width between mono (extreme
left), unchanged base width (normal stereo), and maximum base width (wide, extreme
right). Raising the bandwidth (values over 100) diminishes the mono compatibility. This
means that recordings edited this way sound hollow when listened to in mono.
Maximize strengthens the spatial component of the recording, which also increases the
stereo transparency without influencing the mono compatibility.
Stereo meter (correlation gauge): This provides a graphical display of the phasing of the
audio signal. You can use it to check the alignment of the signal in the stereo panorama
and the effect of the stereo enhancer. To maintain mono-compatibility, the "cloud"
shown should always be higher than it is wide.

Limiter

The limiter prevents clipping by automatically lowering the level if it is too high. Quiet
parts remain unaffected. In contrast to the compressor it tries to leave the basic sound as
unaffected as possible.

Mixer
The Mixer can be opened by pressing the M key or in the menu going to "View" >
"Mixer".

162 / 313
 Audio

Mixer channels
In the mixer, every project window track is represented by a corresponding mixer
channel. The mixer channel offers a series of options for regulating the audio signals of
objects in the track.
FX: Opens the audio effects rack for the corresponding track.
Auto: Activates the volume and panorama automation of the corresponding track.
Volume: You can set the volume of a track using the large fader.
The fader can be fine-tuned in the following way:
l Press the Shift key while setting the fader. This makes the control range of the
fader ten times larger.
l While setting the fader, move the mouse away from the fader horizontally. The
control range of the fader will increase in accordance with how far the mouse is
from the fader.
Stereo panorama: Use the knob to define the stereo position of each track.
Note: Double-clicking on the volume or panorama control resets it to its default passive
setting in which no processor output is required. Double-clicking again sets it back to its
former position.

Solo/Mute: The "Solo" button switches a track to solo mode, i.e. sound playback for all
tracks which have not been switched to solo mode will be deactivated. "Mute" mutes the
track.

Effects channels
In addition to the normal mixer channels assigned to tracks in a project, two separate
effects channels can be created. This allows you to send part of a signal from a normal

163 / 313
 Audio

channel to an effects channel, where it will be processed by additional effects. This is a

common practice in professional audio production.

Two FX send controllers (FX1 and FX2) are located on every mixer channel under
the buttons FX and Auto. You can determine how much of the track's signal is sent to
the available effects channels.
The FX tracks are usually hidden in the mixer. They will be displayed to the left of the
master section as soon as one of the FX send controllers is used.

An effects channel is an entirely additional mixer channel with

volume and panorama controller and effects rack.

In the first effects channel, the reverb feature is activated by

default, since it is the most common way of using send effects.

The volume controllers serve to regulate the volume of the effects

channel and corresponds to an AUX return controller. The "Mute"
button is used to switch the FX feature on and off. The "Solo"
button enables you to listen to the effects channel separately. The
peak meters of the tracks, which send to the FX track, are displayed
in gray.

Master channel
The master channel is located to the right of the individual channels. It controls the
overall sound and offers all editing options once again: Volume, panorama, plug-ins and
effects.
The FX button and the plug-in slots function exactly as in the other channels. The FX
button will open the master audio effects rack. The complete mixer settings including the
effect channels can be reset with the "Reset" button.
Mastering: Opens the MAGIX Mastering Suite.
5.1 Surround: This button switches the mixer to Surround Mode.
Both faders control the total volume.

164 / 313
 Audio

Link buttons: If the link button is deactivated, the volume of the right and
left channels may be set individually.

Volume and panorama automation

You can automate the volume and panorama curves of a track. This means you can move
and record the track volume faders and panorama controls during playback. This way, for
instance, you can simulate the movement of a sound source from left to right and make
volume adjustment instantly during playback.

As long as the Auto button in a track is active, all movements of the volume and
panorama controller are recorded.
The automation is displayed as a curve in the project window and can be edited later with
the mouse.
Note: Unlike the automation curve of the mixer, the dynamic effects are track-dependent,
i.e. irrespective of the objects contained in the track.

5.1 Surround/Multichannel
With MAGIX VIDEO PRO X, you can play back and export multichannel audio tracks.

What you'll need

To edit audio tracks in Surround Mode you need a sound card in your computer which
can operate the following channels:
l front left (L) / right (R)
l center (C) / Subwoofer (LFE)
l back left (Ls) / right (Rs)
Surround playback is possible with all audio driver models (see Playback settings), (Wave,
DirectSound). Please adjust these in the program settings from the "Playback" tab.
DirectSound is supported by most of the standard sound cards.
Wave drivers are similarly supported by many standard sound cards; however, individual
sound cards (for example, Soundblaster) require access to DirectSound.
Output of the six output signals is achieved in all driver models in the output channels in
the same (standardized) order:
Channels 1/2: L- R
Channels 3/4: C-LFE
Channels 5/6: Ls – Rs

165 / 313
 Audio

Importing and exporting multichannel audio files

When importing MPEG-2 files with multichannel sound (e.g. VOB files from DVDs or
DVB-TV recordings), you can choose from two different applications:
l Mixdown: multichannel sound is displayed as an audio object under the video
object, playback of the multichannel track is reduced and recalculated to stereo
playback. Use this option if you want to export the multichannel sound without
editing or if you think that a stereo export is enough to meet your requirements.
l Multichannel sound mix: The individual channel pairs of the multichannel sound
(L-R, C LFE, Ls-Rs) are split into three audio tracks as separate objects and the mixer
is then set to Surround Mode. This mode allows you to change the multichannel
sound mix.
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X can also import interleaved wave files (multichannel wave files),
multichannel Windows Media Audio and MP3 files. This will always create a multichannel
sound mix.
Multichannel audio mix exports can occur in one of the following formats:
l 6-channel PCM files (interleaved wave)
l Windows Media files (as a multichannel soundtrack of a Windows Media Video or
WMV-HD disc)
l MPEG-2 files with multichannel audio
The export is performed using the same menu commands (e.g. "File -> Export movie ->
Audio as wave") like the normal stereo export. You will then be asked if the export should
be in stereo or multichannel format.

Export the multichannel sound using Smart Copy

You can also burn original material with multichannel sound to DVD again without the
need for the codec or you can export the corresponding MPEG files while keeping
multichannel sound. To do this, use the "Smart Rendering" option which transfers the
unprocessed parts of the original material to the destination file without renewed
encoding.

The mixer in multichannel audio mode

To activate multichannel playback, open the mixer (M key) and click on "5.1 Surround"
button in the master.
In the master, six peak meters for the individual channels are provided. The normal
panorama button turns into a representative display of the Surround editor (see below),
which can be opened by clicking on the display.

166 / 313
 Audio

The Surround sound editor is also available to the effects tracks. For example, you can
send the original track to the front L/R speakers, the FX track however will remain at the
rear L/R speakers.
The master volume is applied to all channels, here the left controller influences channels
L and Ls, the right controller; channels R and Rs and the middle value of both controller;
the channels C and LFE.
The master plug-ins are only applied to the front channels.
In the master FX rack of the MAGIX Mastering Suite the full effect palette is not available
in 5.1 Surround mode, but rather only the compressor and the parametric equalizer (from
the Mastering Suite). The settings of these effects have the same effect on all six
channels.

5.1 Surround-Sound Editing

In the 5.1 Surround Editor of the mixer track you can arrange the audio signal of a track
(displayed as two red sound sources) in the "imaginary" room. The signal is dispersed to
the 5 (blue) loudspeakers which represent the individual surround channels.
There are 6 channels:
l L: Front left
l R: Front right
l C: Center
l Ls: Back left/left surround
l Rs: Back right / right surround
l LFE: Sub bass (Low Frequency Effect) channel
Dispersing the signal to the 5 loudspeakers occurs after the so-called sound source emits
a sound field of a certain level (displayed as red circles). The further away a loudspeaker's

167 / 313
 Audio

source is, the less its share of the corresponding loudspeaker channel. The position of the
source and the loudspeaker can be moved with the mouse.
The subbass share (LFE) is set directly in the corresponding value table. It can also be
changed by dragging the mouse.
There are various modes in which you can use the source signal:
l Mono: The (stereo) source signal is seen as mono material, the left and right
channels are mixed together and arranged together. The original stereo information
is lost here.
l Stereo 1: Similar to mono mode insofar as the left and right channels are moved
together, however, only a portion of the left source is audible in the loudspeakers
Land Ls, and only a portion of the right source in the right channels R and Rs. The
stereo information remains as faithful as possible.
l Stereo 2: The left and right channels can be moved individually. The distance
between the left and right source is retained when you move the left source. You
can move an individual source by holding down the "Alt" key. You can move an
individual source by holding down the "Alt" key.
l Center/LFE: Only the left channel is arranged. In return, the LFE share is drawn
solely from the right channel. This mode is only of importance when importing
Surround material.
"Width" determines the level of the sound field of an individual source.
Automation:
Panning of the sound source on the loudspeaker can be automated to simulate
movements in the room.
For this to happen "Automation" must be activated. There are two methods to create
automations: record and draw.
To record (when automation is on) the sound source is moved between the loudspeakers
during playback. When recording the automation, the "Record" checkbox lights up red.
The draw function is an alternative way of recording complex movements. If drawing
mode is actived, all panner movements are transmitted to the time interval between the
start and end marker (when the mouse button is held). You can thus draw the entire
movement curve for the selected time range.
"Reset" deletes surround automation from the track.
Hint: There is no automation of the parameters for width and LFE, of the distance
between the left and right source in "Stereo 2" mode, or of the loudspeaker positions.

168 / 313
 Audio

Transfer multichannel audio tracks from Samplitude/Sequoia to MAGIX VIDEO PRO X

Note: In order to be able to use Samplitude/Sequoia parallel to MAGIX VIDEO PRO X, the

programs will have to be synchronized with each other. Read more about the topic
"Synchronizing Samplitude/Sequoia with external devices".

Existing multichannel audio tracks are transferred directly to MAGIX VIDEO PRO X from

Samplitude/Sequoia. Set a playback marker first in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X at the starting
position of the movie – the wave file will be added at the position of this marker.
Note: In MAGIX VIDEO PRO X, the last six tracks must be free to ensure that correct
transfer can take place. Set the number of tracks to a higher number in the Movie settings
as required.

l Switch to Samplitude/Sequoia
l To transfer, open the menu item "Export to MAGIX VIDEO PRO X" in the "File"
menu under "Export".
l Please note that when exporting, a sampling rate of 48 kHz should be set, since this
is the sampling rate used in DVD audio streams.
l Click "OK" and enter the save location and a logical name for the multichannel
sound in the dialog that opens.
l After export, the six Surround channels will be loaded directly into MAGIX VIDEO 
PRO X. 5.1 Surround mode will be activated and the channels will feature the
corresponding track settings.

Set multiple audio tracks

Multi-sound tracks are provided for adding multiple audio tracks to the video for
selection via the disc's menu. There are two main areas of application:
l Creating audio tracks for different languages
l Mixing stereo and Surround audio separately
These two applications can be combined, since MAGIX VIDEO PRO X features up to 8
separate multi-sound tracks.
In the context menu of the track header, each track can be defined as a "DVD audio
track".
l Open the track properties and select "DVD Audio track" > "DVD Audio track:
unused". A dialog will appear where the track can be renamed.

169 / 313
 Audio

l Give the track a descriptive name. The name entered here will later appear in the
menu of the burned disc.
Now you can assign this DVD audio track to other tracks in the project window. To do
this, check the box in the context menu of the track header. The default setting is "Apply
to all audio tracks". This ensures that the audio material on the track can be heard on all
tracks.
Normally several DVD audio tracks should not be played back together. For this reason
you can right click on the loudspeaker button to select the DVD audio track that should
be played back in the project window.
Tip: The multiple audio track concept is very useful for offering a selection of languages.
First define a corresponding multiple audio track for each language and assign all of the
tracks that should belong to the respective language tracks.

Combine multichannel and stereo tracks

Note: The method described here is only recommended if the stereo track requires a
separate mix, since it normally isn't necessary to add an extra stereo track.

l Select the "Stereo" DVD audio track.

l Open the mixer and perform a normal stereo mix.
l Close the mixing console.
l Select the "Multichannel" DVD audio track.
l Open the mixer and activate Surround mode. Create a surround mix.

Set format for individual multiple audio tracks

Next, make the necessary changes to the formats of the multiple audio tracks. This is
done in the MPEG encoder settings, which can be opened within the burn dialog.
The simplified settings dialog displays an additional section for the multiple audio tracks.
Select the desired DVD audio track setting from the dropdown menu. Now, you can
assign the desired format for every track.
Click "Edit" to open the advanced audio settings dialog for the MPEG encoder. Then,
choose a format for the selected DVD audio track. You can find out more under MPEG
encoder settings.

170 / 313
 Audio

Note: This setting must be made for each of the tracks. Audio tracks which feature the
setting "Apply to all multiple audio tracks" will always be mixed with the other multiple
audio tracks, which will then be created using the format set for them.

Scrubbing
Scrubbing is used to quickly preview individual passages of a film or a piece of music. The
function plays short samples at the original speed.
Note: To listen to an audio object the whole way through use the Mouse mode "Preview".
o Scrubbing can be activated by right clicking the speaker button.

No scrubbing: Scrubbing is deactivated. Sound will not be played when the playback
marker is set or moved.
Scrubbing (1 frame): Scrubbing is active and samples are only 1 (video) frame in length.
The speed is 25 fps, i.e. 1/25 second. This mode is suitable for positioning the playback
marker exactly.
Scrubbing (long): Scrubbing is active, the sample length amounts to approx. 0.5 seconds.
In this mode, locating specific events is particularly easy.
Play 1x during scrubbing: if this option is active, the current position will be played one
time. If it is inactive, then it will be repeated.
If the scrub mode is selected, set the playback marker to a certain location in the timeline
using the mouse. Hold the mouse key and move the playback marker to various locations
in the project.
Scrubbing may be used also by employing the jog and shuttle wheel on the program
monitor, as well as through various hardware controllers.

Import audio CDs

Importing an audio CD works the same way as adding other audio files into the project:
l Insert an audio CD into the drive.
l Go to your drive in the Media Pool. The individual CD titles appear in the file list.
l Double-click on an entry to preview it.

171 / 313
 Audio

l Drag & drop the track from the CD into a track of the current project and it will be
digitally scanned and copied to the hard drive. The files will be saved in the import
folder (may be specified in "File" > "Settings" > "Program" > "Folder").
The CD track appears in the track as an audio object and can be played back or edited
immediately.

Import Audio CD track(s)

There is an additional custom option for audio CDs in the "File" > "Import audio CD track
(s)" menu, which allows a more convenient import with additional features.
This option opens the CD Manager where you can select tracks from Audio CDs and
partially or fully import them into the project. Audio tracks are saved in the directory of
your choice in WAV format and imported into the project.

Track List
The tracks in the list can be selected with a mouse click or by using the keyboard
shortcuts "Shift + arrow keys" or "Ctrl + click".
The transport console in the dialog opens the monitoring function. The play arrow starts
the audio playback of the first selected track.
Select all tracks: This option will select all audio tracks, e.g., for copying the complete
CD.
Save the selected tracks: This button opens a dialog for saving the selected tracks. This
can be saved either as all tracks in one WAV file or as a WAV file for every track. In either
case, a new object is created in the project for every track.
CD Drive options: This option opens the "CD/DVD Drive list" dialog.
l Configuration: This button opens the configuration dialog where you can make
various special settings.
l Add: Creates a new drive in the list that requires special settings.
l Delete: Deletes a selected drive from the list.
l Load setup: Loads the current drive list and all configuration data from a *.cfg file.
l Save setup: Saves the current drive list and all configuration data in a *.cfg file.
l Reset: Restores the default settings of the drive.

172 / 313
 Wizards

Wizards
Slideshow Maker
The Slideshow Maker Wizard is ideal for converting still images into moving pictures,
adding background music, and effects. You can access this under "Edit > Wizards".

This button plays a preview. Play around with templates and effects to see which you
like best.

Style templates
Select a template that best matches your needs.

Intensity
Controls the portion of video and image objects that feature effects. "Normal" will give
you a balanced amount, "Weak" and "Strong" provide fewer or more effects accordingly.

Transitions
Transitions can be individually activated or deactivated using this button.
The slider in the transitions dialog can be used to adjust the amount of each type of
transition.
l Transition duration: Set the length of the transitions in seconds.
l 3D transitions use Stereo 3D mode: If this option is activated, 3D transitions use
Stereo 3D mode.
l Random transitions: The transitions are set to random values.

Effects
Various effects can be individually activated or deactivated using this button.
The slider in the dialog controls the amount of each effect type.

173 / 313
 Wizards

l Random effects: The faders that control the amount of effects are set randomly.
l Treat special image formats intelligently: Panoramas and portrait photos can be
treated "intelligently". If this option is activated, then panoramas and portraits will
be treated with special effects adjusted to the format. These effects can also be
selected and unselected in the detail view.
If this option is not selected, then these images will use the same effects as all other
images.
l List of effects/transitions: The list icon activates or deactivates effects or fades in
each corresponding category individually. The arrow below the program monitor
plays a preview.

Properties & titles

Film length
l Resulting film length: This is an estimation of how long the film will be after
adjustments made with Slideshow Maker.
l Available music: This is the complete length of the music that is currently selected.
"Background music" enables detailed settings for the pieces of music to be used.
l Adjust movie length to the music: It will be attempted to adjust the length of the
photo objects to the background music. If the film is too short, the music will be cut.
If the film is too long, the music will be repeated.
l Adjust music length to the film: Photo objects have a set length, and the resulting
film is filled with music. Music at the end of the movie is faded out.
Include video objects
l Process videos: If this option is set, then videos will be automatically processed
with effects and transitions.
l Length: Settings may be made here about whether the original length of the video
should be maintained or if it should be shortened.
Opening and closing credits: Set the text for opening and closing credits here.
l Custom text: Enter text for opening and closing credits to be added by Slideshow
Maker.
l Use file: A title template, a video, or an image file may also be used.
Note: Titles created using Slideshow Maker may also be edited at any time.

Group associated images together

If this option is active, an attempt is made to detect associated events via their date
information and to separate them from each other optically. Detection of individual
events is based on the time span of these events to achieve a sensible separation.

174 / 313
 Wizards

l Begin group with fade through black: A black fade is added between the different
events.
l Begin group with data/time below black fade: A black fade is added between the
different events. A title is also faded in with a suitable duration, e.g. 1st/2nd/3rd
day, provided the events take place over multiple days.
l Begin group with data/time below image: A black fade is added between the
different events. A title is also faded in with a suitable duration after the black fade,
e.g. 1st/2nd/3rd day, provided the events take place over multiple days.

Background music
Here you can set the pieces of music to be used as background music.
Use background music: Background music is inserted.
Load file(s): A file selection dialog will open in which you can select a folder with audio
files, and choose the corresponding file or files you want.
Remove: The highlighted music files will be removed from the list and no longer used.
Insert random: MAGIX VIDEO PRO X selects random pieces of music from the folder
Import > My Media > Slideshow music in the Media Pool.
Preview: This button previews the selected piece of music.
Volume ratio: This slider controls the volume ratio between the original sound and the
background music.
Tip: Pieces of music in the fifth track are listed and used for background music.

Soundtrack Maker
Music tracks that match the mood are generated automatically by Soundtrack Maker.
Mood changes are even possible too.
Open Soundtrack Maker via "Edit > Wizards".

1. Choose music genre

Choose a musical style first.

The option "Apply to selected range only" limits the length of the background music you
want to create.

175 / 313
 Wizards

Note: The "Apply to selected range only" function will only work if an emotion has not
been set outside of the selected area. Otherwise, the soundtrack will be used up to the
point where the selected emotion is in place, so that there are no gaps in the soundtrack.

Range start and end may be set with the left and right mouse button if Soundtrack Maker
is open.

2. Set mood change

You can select a mood from the list.

Preview: Here you can preview your selected emotion.
Position: With the position slider you can go to a certain position to set the emotions at a
certain position. The playback marker may be moved instead with the left mouse button.
The preview will be displayed in the program monitor simultaneously.
Add emotion: This button inserts the selected mood at the current position. Soundtrack
Maker will then suggest a new position for the next emotion by repositioning the position
slider. You can also position it elsewhere and add different moods.
Delete emotion: Removes the currently set emotion.

3. Generate background music

Clicking "Create soundtrack" creates a new soundtrack. "Progress" shows the current
status.
Note: Soundtracks you create are beat-based. In most cases the length of the soundtrack
will not match the marker positions, so that the track can play. These are frame-based
and as such, can be set to a more precise grid than a beat-based soundtrack.

Variations: If the background music that has been created is not suitable, a variation may
be created. This process may be repeated for the entire background music as well as for
individual emotions:
l If you want to vary the entire background music, then click on "Create variations".
l If you only want this to apply to a certain emotion, then move to it with the position
slider first in the dialog (or the play marker on the main screen). Then activate the
option "Vary only selected emotions". Now click on "Create variation".

176 / 313
 Wizards

Automatic clip adjustment: This option re-arranges the video and photo objects in your
project to match the music. Make sure to deactivate this option if you do not want this
function.

Travel Maps - Travel route animation

Short description
When you open Travel Maps, you will be presented with the map selection where you
can choose from a variety of maps, including geographical maps with terrain details and
satellite maps. The map selection contains maps which you can use right away, as well as
previews of maps which can be purchased from the Photostory Store.
l Select the map you want to use for your animation by clicking it.
The selected map will open, along with a menu which lets you configure all of the
properties of your paths and animations.

l To set locations for a route, click the map. Routes can contain an unlimited number
of locations.
l Clicking the Finish button creates a WMV video file.

177 / 313
 Wizards

General menu functions

Menu drag handle: Allows you to move the menu to reveal sections of the map
which are being covered by the menu.

Create new travel route: Creates a new travel route. You can create multiple

travel routes on the same map.

Load travel route: Allows you to load a travel route which has already been
created and saved. Once loaded, you can make changes to the route.

Save open travel route: Saves the currently open travel route.

Play travel route: Plays the currently open travel route. This is what the

finished travel route animation looks like.

Open/close menu: Lets you close the menu to reveal sections of the map
which are being covered by the menu. To continue editing your travel route,
simply click this button to open the menu again.

Keyboard shortcut:

Mouse wheel Zoom in and out

Ctrl + Mouse wheel Skew map (Live Maps only)
Shift + Mouse wheel Rotate map

Photos
Pictures can be added to travel routes by going to "Photos" > "Select photos" and
importing them, and then dragging them from the overview onto the travel route.
l Photos can also be assigned to specific destinations or set as the background image
for a destination.
l The images assigned to each destination are briefly displayed when the animation
reaches the destination and are once again hidden when the animation moves on.

178 / 313
 Wizards

Maps
Clicking the "Map" button takes you back to the map selection. You can use this feature
to change the map (e.g. from standard to satellite) used for a travel route — even routes
which you've already created.

Search
The Search feature can be used to search for places on real maps.
To add a destination using Search, enter an address in the search field and then press the
"+" icon.

Path & Avatar

Define custom settings for your entire travel route and for each individual location.
l Path & Avatar: Settings for the complete route.
l Location list: A list of all locations with various settings options for customizing
each location. Click on the pencil icon beside a location to enable editing. Click on
the location description field to change the name.
l Load GPX track: If you have created a route with a GPS device and saved it as a
GPX file, you can import it and show the route on the map.

Fade in/out or delete the route or individual locations:

Click on the eye icon to hide all or several locations. The location will remain in
the list, but will be hidden on the map and will not appear in the route. Click on
the eye again to display the location(s) again.
This removes the entire route or just a certain location and then adjusts the
route.

Adjust route properties and individual locations:

The coloring of the buttons indicate which section is enabled for editing.

Location properties: You can modify settings for all locations, or for individual
locations. For instance, you can set location symbols, adjust their size, set the
duration of a location during the animation, select font and much more.

179 / 313
 Wizards

Avatar: Choose an avatar for the entire route or for individual locations. You
can change avatar as much as you like along your travel route.
Align to path: This option can be enabled for objects such as cars and
airplanes to ensure that the object is always pointing in the direction of travel,
even on curves.
Path properties: To modify the path properties, activate "Complete route"
under "Path & Avatars". Then, activate the path properties symbol on the right.
"Draw curves" lets you create paths with soft, curving lines. You can also
adjust the width, color, transparency and shadow of paths the way you want.

Tips for designing routes:

l If you have already created your travel route and want to add locations later, click
on the desired location on the path and a location will be added.
l Use hidden locations to create non-linear routes. That will allow you to depict
"meandering paths".
l If you want to create a complex route with several locations, first create the entire
route and then specify "Hide all locations" under "Path & Avatar > Complete route"
> "Location properties". Then, switch to the location list and unhide the most
important locations individually.

View & Animation

Define the viewing and animation properties for your travel route.

Timeline: Preview function: Provides a preview in which you can move along
your travel route. Drag the handle to move along the travel route.
Animation Make the animation play faster or slower.
duration:
Animate Adds a soft fade-in to the location.
locations:
View Makes the visible portion of the map move to follow the course of the
follows path. When this option is disabled, the map remains static as the
path: animation moves along the travel route.
Borders: The visible portion of the map can be given a border.
Slideshow In the Slideshow properties you can set transitions, display times and
properties: transition lengths for the photos in your travel route.

180 / 313
 Wizards

Finish your animation

Clicking the Finish button creates a WMV video file and exports it.

File Enter a unique file name for your travel route and select a destination to
name: save it to.
Start Saves the travel route animation as a video.
video
export:
Single Takes a single screenshot of the current visible portion of the map, along
frame with your travel route. Enter a unique file name for the screenshot and
export: select a destination to save it to.

Edit If this option is enabled, the finished video of the travel route video is
video: opened in the linked program for further editing.

181 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Additional functions and tools

Markers
-> Keyboard shortcut
In MAGIX VIDEO PRO X you can set various types of markers within your project.

The Lock button (at the very front, next to the time ruler) lets you lock all markers
(jump markers, chapter markers) against accidental moving or deleting.

Playback markers
The playback marker indicates the point from which the material – either the project or a
selected file from the Media Pool – will be played back. There is a playback marker below
each project monitor and an additional one above the timeline in the project window.

The playback marker is displayed as a red triangle below the monitors. In the project
window it is displayed as a red triangle.
In order to move the playback marker, double-click on the desired area below the
monitor. Alternatively, you can move the playback marker by dragging it with the mouse.
While being moved, the current image will appear on the monitor, letting you see where
in the material you are located.
The playback marker in the video monitor can also be moved by clicking on the lower
section of the time scale in the project window. The playback marker will also be moved
on the program monitor, as both markers are coupled to each other.
The exact position of the playback marker can be seen in the time display at the top left,
below the corresponding monitor. There, you can change the displayed values
(Hour:Minute:Second:Frame) per mouse click to reach a certain point in time. Enter the
desired value and the playback marker will jump to the corresponding position.
Tip: In the "Playback" tab under "File -> Settings -> Program", you can set whether
repeatedly pressing the space bar during playback resets the playback marker to the
current position or moves it to the original position.

182 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Project markers
The "Edit" menu or the keyboard shortcut "Shift + numerical keys 1-0 (0 for the tenth
marker) allows you to set a project marker at the current position of the playback marker.
These function as a mental marker or indicate certain positions or events within the
project.
After selecting the menu item, a dialog appears to input a name for the marker to be
created. The first ten project markers may be accessed via Ctrl + number keys 1-0.. This
allows you to jump to a particular position of a longer video immediately, without
scrolling and searching.
Project markers may be deleted or renamed via the context menu at any time. This does
not provide direct influence on the result, but they do make the workflow much easier.

Snap markers and transients

Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will jump automatically to
particular "Key positions" when you move them close enough with the mouse. This is
called "snapping". Select a location in the object with a snap marker to indicate where
another object should snap in. This can be helpful, for instance, if you want a title to be
shown at a specific position in a video object. You can find the "Snap Marker" in the
Media Pool under "Effects" > "Audio effects".

Set snap markers

l To set a snap marker, select an object and place the playback marker at the position
where you want to place the snap marker.
l Now click on the button "Set snap marker".
l You can move a snap marker with the mouse using drag & drop.
You can set as many snap markers as you like per object.

Align snap marker with transients

Transients are signal peaks in audio material that can also appear in video footage; e.g. a
door slamming shut. Transients in video footage can be used as a starting point for
editing - for instance, fading in a title or making a picture-in-picture effect appear. The
"Align snap marker to transients" feature analyzes the signal peaks of the selected object
and sets snap markers to these locations. This moves snap markers that have already
been put in place near the transients into the new locations.
Note: Combination objects must be displayed separately so that transients can be seen
clearly. In the context menu of the combination object, select the command "Audio

183 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

functions" > "Video/Audio on separate tracks". Snap markers are set independently of this
setting.

Delete all chapter markers

A chapter marker defines the beginning of a new chapter. Chapters serve to improve
navigation when burning the project to disc. The following options are provided via "Edit
-> Marker" or by right clicking on the playback marker.

Set chapter markers

Places a chapter marker at the position of the playback marker. This creates a
chapter entry in the disc menu in case the movie is being burned to disc.
You can rename the chapter markers by right clicking and selecting "Rename" in the
context menu. The new name will also appear in the chapter menu.

Set chapter markers automatically...

This option automatically sets chapter markers in the project according to specific rules
that will then appear as chapters in the film menu of a disc. This is useful if you need to
burn a disc immediately after recording.

At the beginning of a movie: The movie contains only one chapter

At object starts in a track: Every object in a track creates a chapter, Track 1 is preset.
At the position of existing title objects: Subtitles, for instance, as faded-in
subheadings, give the position of the chapter markers.
Provide interval (in minutes)/provide quantity: If the chapters are separated without
any particular method and are just needed for quicker navigation, chapter markers may
also be inserted in pre-defined intervals or as a pre-defined number of chapter markers.

184 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Naming chapter markers

No marker name: Marker name and marker number are not specified.
Custom: You can use a custom name. A sequential marker number will be attached to it.
Apply object name: The marker name is taken from the object name and the text in the
text object. No sequential marker number is specified.
Options
Delete existing chapter markers: Deletes chapter markers that have already been set.
Only take the selected area into account: The chapter marker is automatically set to
the area between the start and end markers only.

Delete chapter markers/delete all chapter markers

Delete one or all chapter markers. This removes chapter entries in the disc menu if the
film is burned to disc.

Range markers(In & out points)

Range markers are the "in points" (range start) and "out points" (range end). They are
used in the monitors to highlight a particular area that can be played with the "Range
playback" button below the corresponding monitor.

To the left, you can see an in point (range start), and an out point is visible (range end) to
the right
Hint: The value between both markers shows the length of the selected area according to
the pattern Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames.

Change playback range

There are various options for changing the playback area and the start/end markers.
Move entire range
l Press and hold the Ctrl key.
l Click in the blue area between start and end markers.
l Move the mouse to the left or the right while simultaneously holding the Ctrl key
and clicking and holding the left mouse button.
Move range borders:
l Click one of the markers in the upper bar in the project window and drag it.

185 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

l Click on one of the markers below the program monitor and move it to the desired
position by dragging it.
Reset the range edges
l Operation with mouse and keyboard: Set the playback marker at the desired
position and press "Set start of range (in-point)" or "Set end of range (out-point)"
underneath the program monitor to set the in and out points of the range.
l Start of the range using the mouse:
Left-click at the desired position in the top bar of the project window.
The beginning of the range will be set at this position.
If you click behind the end of the range, the playback range will be set to the entire
length of the movie.
l End of the range using the mouse: Right-click at the desired position in the top
bar of the project window.
The end of the range will be set at this position.
If you click in front of the end of the range, the playback range will be set to the
entire length of the movie.

Range markers in the source monitor

In the source monitor the in and out points are set in the following way:
l Set the playback marker at the desired position and press "Set range start" or "Set
range end" underneath the monitor to set the in and out points.
l Click on one of the markers below the monitor and move it to the desired position
by dragging it.
l You can adjust the position of the entire range by holding the Ctrl key and clicking
the blue bar between the markers and moving it by dragging.
For the exact functions of the range markers in the source monitor, please read the
section "Loading ranges from longer film files".

Scene markers
Scene markers separate a complete video into scenes. You can load any video into
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X and have it divided into scenes.
Load the desired video into the project window. Then, right-click on the video and select
"Scene detection". The following dialog appears:

186 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

After clicking "Start search", an overview of the detected scenes will be displayed

underneath the scene control.
Delete scene markers: Here you can delete individual markers by selecting them from
the list.
Delete all markers: Deletes all project markers.
Action on OK: You have three options. Either MAGIX VIDEO PRO X splits your video into
individual scenes ("Cut at all markers"), a scene is selected and cut only at this position
("Cut at selected marker"), or all scenes are added to the project folder.
After deciding in favor of one of these options, red scene markers will appear on the
timeline in the project window. The scenes can then be split according to the selected
option and edited.
Note: An important difference between a scene and a chapter marker is that a scene
marker can be set only within a continuous video, while a chapter marker can include
several consecutive videos.

More information about Scene recognition can be found here.

Measuring instruments
In MAGIX VIDEO PRO X, there are four measuring instruments:
l Vectorscope
l Waveform monitor
l RGB Parade
l Histogram

What you'll need

l The computer is equipped with a graphics card that supports DirectX 11.
l The source monitor is displayed.

187 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

l There are video or photo objects arranged in the project window.

l In Program settings > Display options > Preview in arranger > Video mode the
default setting is Standard (Hardware acceleration, Direct 3D).

Open measuring instruments

1. Use a simple mouse click to open the source monitor menu.

2. Select the entry for the desired measuring instrument:
l Vectorscope
l Waveform monitor
l RGB Parade
l Histogram
l All meters side by side
3. Place the playback marker on the desired position in the project window.
The measuring instrument will display the measured value in realtime.
Note: The measuring instruments are displayed in the source monitor and always
correspond to the content on the program monitor. The measuring instruments are either
shown individually or all together.

188 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Global settings

Norm:
l Automatic: MAGIX VIDEO PRO X makes the appropriate settings based on the
Movie settings.
l Standard Definition Video BT.601: This setting is used for videos with standard
resolution (PAL). The IBUR BT.601 deals with a standard for the coding of digital
interlaced signals. The standard defines how an analog TV signal with 525 lines/60
Hz and 625 lines/50 Hz is digitalized.
l High Definition Video BT.709: This setting is used for videos in HD.
The IBUR BT.709(-5) defines all of the parameters required for HDTV.
Note: This setting affects the measuring instruments "Vectorscope", "Waveform Monitor"
and "Histogram".

Intensity:
The intensity determines the strength of the contrast in the measuring instruments.
Lower intensity is suitable for highlighting values that occur very frequently.
Note: This setting affects the measuring instruments "Vectorscope", "Waveform Monitor"
and "RGB Parade".

Single color display: The foreground of the vectorscope (i.e. the visual of the analyzed
image) is displayed in green. This corresponds to the display on analog measuring
instruments.
Multicolor display: The foreground of the vectorscope (i.e. the visual of the analyzed
image) is displayed in various colors. This can make it easier to interpret the results.

189 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Activate 75%display: The color space limits of the vectorscope are reduced to 75%
which corresponds to the values during analog image transfer.
Display 7.5 IRE black level (NTSC): The borders in the waveform monitor are adjusted
for the American NTSC standard. Deactivate this option for the NTSC standard in Japan.

Vectorscope
The vectorscope is a color circle with a black background. Only the points on the color
circle that represent the colors in the video monitor image are visible.

The vectorscope contains specified border points:

l R – Red
l M – Magenta
l B – Blue
l C – Cyan
l G – Green
l Y – Yellow
The color saturation limits run between the border points.
Note: The positions of the border points depend on the settings of the measuring
instrument. MAGIX VIDEO PRO X automatically chooses a default setting that is suitable
for the material.

Functionality
l In the foreground the colors that are available in the image are displayed in the
corresponding areas of the vectorscope.
l The more frequently a color appears in the image, the more intensively it will be
displayed in the vectorscope.
l When a color is strongly clustered, the respective area in the vectorscope will be
displayed in white.

190 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

l If a color is oversaturated, the color saturation limit can be clearly recognized.

When large areas of the image are oversaturated, the corresponding color
saturation limit is white.

Uses
Check image material for tinting
Tinting in the image material can be recognized when the "cloud" tends to a particular
direction.
Calibrating cameras with the help of recorded test patterns
Note: The calibration has to be performed separately for each movie situation.

1. Record a calibrated test chart.

2. Transfer recorded video to MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.
3. Make any necessary adjustments using the video effects until the color values of
the test chart are correctly displayed in the vectorscope.
Detecting color oversaturation
If the image material on the video monitor is strongly oversaturated, the "cloud" will tend
to form in the outer area of the color circle. When the oversaturation is strong, the color
space limits will cut the "cloud" in half.
If you reduce the color saturation, the result of the effect will be updated in realtime.
Check compatibility of color values
To ensure compatibility with industry standards, the color values should not exceed the
color space limits. Areas in the image with oversaturated colors can be recognized in the
vectorscope at points that lie on the outside of the color space limits.

Waveform monitor
The Waveform monitor displays the brightness of the video. The connection to the
position on the image remains intact.

191 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Connection between image and measuring instrument

l X axis (horizontal): The image position on the horizontal axis of the video monitor.
l Y axis (vertical): The brightness of the video (increasing) at the corresponding image
position (X axis).
l Brightness: The brighter an area is displayed in the waveform monitor, the more
image points there will be at this position (X axis) in the respective brightness area
(Y axis)
The dotted lines on the upper and lower borders of the waveform monitor correspond to
the values for digital 0 (black) and digital 255 (white).
The lines 0 and 100 on the left border correspond to the limit values for analog transfer
of video signals.
The intensity of the curve is determined in the measuring instrument settings.

Uses
Locating areas in the image that are too dark or too light
Because the horizontal axis of the waveform monitor corresponds to the horizontal axis
of the image, a connection with the image can easily be made:
l Lighter sections in the upper third of the waveform monitor: Very many image
points in the upper brightness area.
l Lighter sections in the middle third of the waveform monitor: Very many image
points in the middle brightness area.
l Lighter sections in the lower third of the waveform monitor: Very many image
points in the lower brightness area.
1. Transfer the horizontal position of the too light or too dark areas to the visible
image in the video monitor.
2. Locate the corresponding points on this horizontal position in the image.

192 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

RGB Parade

The measuring instrument „RGB Parade“ basically functions like the waveform monitor
but shows the brightness areas of the colors red, green and blue individually.
The example image (above) is dominated by warm colors meaning that the blue portion is
lower than the green portion and much less than the red portion. It is also clear to see
that the image has very few areas with high brightness.

Each color area is divided up as follows:

l X axis (horizontal): The image position on the horizontal axis of the video monitor.
l Y axis (vertical): The brightness of the video (increasing) at the corresponding image
position (X axis).
l Brightness: The brighter an area is displayed in the waveform monitor, the more
image points there will be at this position (X axis) in the respective brightness area
(Y axis)
The intensity of the curve is determined in the measuring instrument settings.

Uses
Analyze the brightness distribution of individual colors
Because the horizontal axis of each color corresponds to the horizontal axis of the image,
a connection with the image can easily be made:
l Lighter sections of color in the upper third of the waveform monitor: Very many
image points in the upper brightness area.
l Lighter sections of color in the middle third of the waveform monitor: Very many
image points in the middle brightness area.
l Lighter sections of color in the lower third of the waveform monitor: Very many
image points in the lower brightness area.
Tint detection
If a vertical movement compared to the other colors is noticed for one of the three
colors, a tint is present. When you regulate the saturation using the video effects, the
result is immediately visible in the "RGB Parade" measuring instrument.

193 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Histogram
The histogram shows the brightness distribution on the image.

l X Axis (horizontal): Brightness increasing to the right.

l Y Axis (vertical): Frequency increasing to the top.

Uses
Detect and correct overexposure / underexposure
If too many white portions are present, the right border is white (100% and digital 255).
If too many black portions are present, the left border is white (0% and digital 0).
Analyze and adjust use of brightness space
When partial areas of the brightness space are not being used, there will be areas on the
horizontal axis with frequency value 0. No curve can be seen at these positions.

Split and trim

This function refers to the editing and structure of sound and image material for the
finished film. It's also known as cutting, and this used to be a literal process where
celluloid strips were cut using a scissors on a cutting table and then manually stuck back
together again. With digital material and MAGIX VIDEO PRO X cutting these days is a
much easier, non-destructive process.
In this section we'll explain digital cutting technology and how to trim cut material. Also
covered under this topic are transitions, which can be used to combine cut material
together again.

Simple cut
All objects can be split. Each object section then becomes an independent object:
l Select the object to be cut.
l Position the playback marker at the position where the movie is to be cut.
l Select "Cut" among the cut functions in the toolbar or press the T key on the
keyboard.

Cut button: Here you can choose between various Cut modes.

194 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

In order to rejoin these split objects at a later stage, simply select the individual parts and
select the command "Group" to join the selected objects into a group. Orders all selected
objects into groups.
Note: If the commands "Split" and "Remove beginning/end" are applied without a
selection, all objects at the position of the playback marker are cut.

Separate sound from videos

Normally, videos are edited together with original sound to ensure that the appropriate
sound is always played back in sync with the video. This is implemented in MAGIX VIDEO 
PRO X by grouping the video object with its respective audio object and displaying them
together on one track by default.

Videos with audio material appear in the project window as a

combination object (audio and video in one object).
You can separate audio and image material:
1. Right-click on the the object.
2. In the context menu, select the command "Audio functions" > "Video/Audio on
separate tracks".
Result: The audio object and the video object will be displayed as an object group
on two tracks.
3. Select the object group.
4. Open the "Edit" menu and select the "Ungroup" function.
- or -
Select the corresponding button on the toolbar.
Result: The objects are ungrouped and both can be edited independently of each
other.
The objects can be regrouped together using the "Group" function.

J-L Cuts
Audio and image material can also be separated temporarily. A popular editing technique,
for example, is to introduce a small portion of the audio of the next scene before showing
the picture (or vice versa). The resulting shape of the object arrangement is reminiscent
of a J or L, hence the name.

195 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

J-L cuts lets you perform edits like these without having to ungroup the video from its
original audio track:
1. Hold down the Alt key and click on the outer edge of the audio or video object.
The program will switch to"J-L" editing mode.
2. Move the edge so that the audio and video objects no longer start and end in the
same place.
Result: The grouping remains the same, but the lengths of the audio and video
tracks can now be modified independently.
If you drag out one of the objects to the length of the other, the edges will snap together
and "J-L" editing mode will end.

Trim Objects
Trimming indicates exact setting of object borders or transitions. MAGIX VIDEO PRO X
has two different trimmers, which can be opened using the context menu of a video or
image object.

General advice for operating both trim editors

Play functions: The trim window contains its own play functions that allow the object to
be played individually or in relation to the projects.
The right play button plays the project normally. Replays can sometimes appear shaky
because the processor may be over-worked. Those frames that the processor cannot
calculate quickly enough are left out.
The middle play button plays the arrangement “frame by frame”, which means no
frames are left out. Depending on the processor load, playback may thus be slower, but
still smooth.
The left play button renders material before playing, i.e. the current settings are
calculated first and then exported. This method ensures a smoother playback.
With the fast forward and rewind functions you can change the range start in the
timeline. This allows for complete control of transitions between two videos.
Increments: A click on the arrow buttons in both trim editors moves the handle or the
material within an object exactly by one frame. With the Ctrl key you can increase the
frame rate gradually to 5 frames per mouse-click.

Edit trimmer
A schematic display of the selected transition and its handles can be found at the center
of the trimming window.

196 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Left arrow buttons (1): These buttons move the last frame of the first object while
adjusting the second. The length of the transition remains. The display indicates the
relative change in comparison with the starting situation when the trimmer was opened.
Position (2): Moves the second object. The length of the transition is changed. This
corresponds to shifting an object in the project window.
Object content (3): This moves the movie “underneath” the second object. This is done
without changing the length of the object and the transition.
Crossfade (4): Changes the transition’s length between both objects. The objects remain
of equal length. The length can be numerically entered.
Middle arrow buttons (5): Shifts the existing transition. Both objects remain in their
positions, only the transition’s center point moves.
Transition (6): Displays the type of transition. A mouse-click opens a pop-up window
from which you can select a transition.
Right arrow buttons (7): Move the first frame of the second object. The first object and
the transition remain. Only the length of the second object changes.
Start Fade out / last frame (8): Switches the left monitor between the start of the
transition and the last frame of the object.
First frame / End Fade in (9): Switches the right monitor between the first frame of the
following object and the end of the transition.
Next cut (10) / next object (11): The buttons below and to the right skip to the
next/previous object and/or cut in the arranger. These buttons make it easy to move and
trim cuts in the project without having to leave the trimmer.

Object trimmer
A schematic display of the selected object and its handles can be found in the center of
the trimming window.

197 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Fade In/Out (4, 5): These buttons adjust the upper fade handles of an object.
Object content (3): Here you can move the video material that is to be played without
changing the object length.
Position (2): Moves the object on the track.
First Frame / End Fade in (7): Toggles the left monitor between the first frame of the
object and the end of the transition.
Start Fade out / last Frame (8): Toggles the right monitor between the start of the
transition and the last frame of the object.
Left/Right arrow buttons (1, 6): Adjusts the lower object handles.
Next object/cut (9, 10): The buttons below and to the right skip to the next/previous
object and/or cut in the project window. These buttons make it easy to move in the
project and trim objects without having to leave the trimmer.

Move the contents of trimmed objects

Use the "Move object content" mouse mode to move the content of a trimmed object
within the object borders.
This function is particularly helpful when you don't want to mix around the arrangement
of objects, but want to have an object begin with a different first frame.
1. Select the trimmed video object.
If the video has not been trimmed, the video object contents cannot be moved,
because the entire video will be shown.
2. Use the "Move object content" mouse mode and drag the video object content to
the left or right in order to move it.
Alternatively, you can use the object trimmer for frame-accurate positioning of content.

Two-point edit
Two-point editing simplifies file import, makes it easy to add new material to specific
positions in complex projects. To do this, one point is placed in the project window and
another is placed in the source monitor and these are used in one of the following
variations:

198 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Variation 1: Source in/Destination in

1. The point in the project window specifies the location where the new material
should be inserted into the project ("destination in") and the point in the source
monitor where the new material should be inserted ("source in").
2. Place the playback marker at the position in the project window where the new
material should be inserted.
3. Click in the program monitor on the button in the transport console for the start of
the section (in point).

4. Double-click the desired file in the Media Pool to load it into the source monitor.
5. Find the position in the source monitor where the material should be inserted.
6. Click the button in the transport console of the source monitor for the start of the
range (in point).
Note: To insert the complete material, an in point does not need to be inserted in the
source monitor. Source in will now be the start of the source material.

7. Add the material:

l Select the insert mode "Overwrite" to overwrite the material in the arranger
behind the in point.
Result: The total length of the project is not changed. The new material is only
inserted at the position of the in point:

Or:

l Or use one of the two ripple modes (single track ripple or multitrack ripple)
in order to cut the material at the position of the in point and move it to the back.

Variation 2: Source out/Destination out

This variation functions based on exactly the same principle, only instead of setting in
points in both monitors, out points are placed. In this way the new material is placed in
the project window in front of the out point. This variation enables you to work from
back towards the front to define the scene transition.

199 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Three-point editing
The three-point edit is an insert process that operates based on three reference points. It
works in one of three ways:

Variation 1: Destination in/Destination out/Source in

This variation defines a range in the project window where the new material will be
inserted.
1. Initially, the program monitor is used to set an in and out point to stretch out a
range in the arranger.
2. A third point is then set in the source monitor to define the beginning ("source in")
of the material to be inserted.
3. Finally, the range in the project window is filled with the new material. The new
material is cut automatically at the end of the range.

Variation 2: Destination in/Destination out/Source out

This variation functions similar to variation 1, with the difference that the point in the
source monitor is not the beginning, but rather the end of the new scene ("source out").
This means that the scene transition at the end is specified and the new material moves
into the front of the range. The new material is cut automatically at the start of the range.

Variation 3: Source in/Source out/Destination in

This variation defines a range in the new material that should be inserted at a certain
position in the project window.
1. Initially, a range is spanned out in the source material using in and out points in the
source monitor.
2. A third point is specified in the program monitor which defines the beginning of the
material to be inserted.
3. Finally, the range from the source monitor is inserted completely at the position of
the in point.
We would like to illustrate variation 1 and 2 using step-by-step instructions:
l In the project, determine an area that corresponds to the time window and position
of the video to be imported (destination in/out).

200 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Tip: To keep things clear, it is recommended at the start to cut the material within the
range and then to drag it backwards or to delete it from the range so that a gap is
present.

l Load the new material that you want to display inside the range by double-clicking
in the source monitor.
l Position the playback marker in the source monitor at the start position where the
video should be imported into the arrangement (source in).

l If you want to cut at the scene end, set the playback marker in the source monitor
at the position where the end of the scene should be and click the button for the
end of the range (source out).

l Select the insert mode "Overwrite" to fill the range in the project window with the
new material, replacing it with the existing material.
l Or use one of the two ripple modes (single track ripple or multitrack ripple) to cut
the material at the start of the range and move it to the end of the range.
"Overwrite" mode does not change the total length of the project. The new material is
simply inserted at the spanned out range:

The ripple function moves the material in the range to the back together with the objects
behind it. This changes the total length according to the length of the range:

Four-point editing
The four-point edit places new material into the project with the help of a total of four
marker points.
A range is set in both the source material as well as in the project, and one of the insert
modes described above is used. The function is the same for each mode (overwrite and
ripple): The section from the source material is inserted precisely into the range specified
in the project window.

201 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

If both ranges are coincidentally the same size (which is normally the exception), the new
material will be stretched or pinched automatically. The playback speed of the video is
changed analog to the time stretching applied to the audio track.
Because timestretching for an audio track is only possible and sensible in certain cases,
the audio is removed when larger changes are made (above a factor of 2). A
corresponding confirmation dialog appears first so that the procedure can also be
canceled, e.g. to carry out a three-point edit instead.

Transitions
When importing video files into the project window, individual objects usually follow
directly after one another. This is called a "hard cut". However, you can make scenes
blend or “transition” into each other.
This means that for the duration of a transition, two objects are shown at once and can
be mixed "faded" together in different ways. You will find numerous blends in the Media
Pool’s transition folder.

Simple crossfade

A simple transition can be created in the project window by dragging one object over
another. A crossfade will be created automatically. During this standard transition, the
brightness of both objects are added together; the first clip fades out while the second
clip fades in. The duration of the crossfade is displayed in the project window by white
crossing lines. You can adjust the length of the crossfade by dragging the upper handle of
the second object to the left or to the right.

Transitions from the Media Pool

Tip: Use transitions sparingly. Look closely when you are watching movies in the theater
or on TV. You will notice that hard cuts are used as a rule and transitions are used less
frequently. Videos appear unprofessional and too ornate if transition effects are added to
every change of scene.

l To open the transition folder, click on the "Transitions" button in the template
folder located in the Media Pool.
l Double clicking on an entry provides a preview of the transition.

202 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

l Drag the transition you want onto the border between the two objects. Only when
the mouse pointer is placed over a scene change will it turn from a lock icon into an
object icon, i.e. you can place the transition at that position. The object at the back
will be shifted to the front to accommodate the duration of the transition.
Most transitions can have any length, and if a transition is shortened, it means that the
resulting effect is speeded up.
Some transitions can be set even more exactly. To do so, click on the transition icon again
and select "Settings..." at the bottom of the menu. Thus, a transition icon in the Media
Pool can represent an entire group of different effects.
The so-called alpha transitions (in the subfolders "Mold and Objects" "Iris", "Random",
etc.) are actually pre-produced black and white videos that are combined with the alpha
keying effect to be used as transitions.
Other transitions use sound effects. Look around at all the contents to form an idea of
what you can use in future projects.

Custom fades with Alpha-keying

Alpha keying extends the range of transition effects used in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X to
produce black & white movie transitions or selected color fade-ins and fade-outs. You
can create such a video from any video material (also color) by exporting it as a transition
(File -> Export movie -> Export as transition).
The loaded movie is then exported as a black and white video in mxv format and stored
in the fade directory. Afterwards, it will be available in the Media Pool and the fade menu.

3D transitions
3D effects offer exciting and varied opportunities to create transitions between two
videos.
The following transition settings are available:
Anti-aliasing: An undesirable step effect is usually created at the borders of 3D objects.
Anti-aliasing reduces this effect, but also requires more computer power. The setting
applies globally to all 3D fades, switching on anti-aliasing during 3D fades has the effect
that all other 3D fades are also affected by this setting.
Horizontal/Vertical Mirror: Use these options to influence the path of the 3D objects
within the fades. "Horizontal" mirrors the movement of the object horizontally, i.e. along
the X-axis. "Vertical" mirrors the movement of the object vertically, i.e. along the Y-axis.

203 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

3D series
The 3D series are a further development of 3D transitions, where the transitions are
thematically sorted. For instance, you can let photos appear on a notice board or make it
look as if the photos were hung on the walls of a gallery.
l Click on "Templates" -> "Transitions" -> "3D series" in the Media Pool. Select the
desired 3D series and drag it onto the first scene or image transition where the 3D
series should start.
You can select how many of the subsequent fades should be replaced by the 3D series in
the dialog.

Find gaps
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X enables you to locate gaps between objects where no video
material is located. This hinders unintentional black frames from appearing in your film.
This option is located under "Edit" > "Find gaps". A corresponding dialog will open.
Optimize view: Zooms to the selected gap.
Mark section as gap: Spans a section over the selected gap.
Close: The selected settings are applied, but no additional action is taken.

Musical editing adjustment and BPM Wizard

Behind the "Musical editing adjustment" option in the "Edit" menu allows the possibility
to adjust an existing project with cut scenes to the rhythm of a piece of music and turn it
into a video clip. It is necessary that the piece of music contains information about tempo
and beat for this function.
l Place a project with video sequences on the top track (track 1) for which Musical
editing adjustment should be made. The project should be as long as the
accompanying song and include plenty of cuts.
l Load the song that is to serve as the basis for the editing adjustment onto a track
below it.
l Select "Edit" > "Musical editing adjustment".
In most cases, an info dialog will now appear informing you that there is no beat and bar
information available for the selected audio object.
l Click on the "Open Assistant" option in the dialog.
Then, the BPM Wizard "MAGIX Remix Agent" dialog will open.

204 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

BPM Wizard
This tool can analyze the song's rhythm.

After determining the BPM value (i.e. beats per minute) of the song, the song will be
subdivided into short passages of equal length. The individual objects having the duration
of exactly one bar at first stay grouped, so as not to accidentally "rearrange" the song. Of
course, if you like, you can do just that. To do so click on "ungroup".
The resulting object borders are important for editing. Because all objects may snap to
each other on their edges, videos may be arranged to transition exactly to the beat of the
music: the points along the track where videos lock together are exactly in time with the
music.
The analysis takes place in four steps:
Step 1: Checking the start marker
Step 2: Tempo recognition
Step 3: Specifying beat starts
Step 4: Applying BPM and bar recognition

Step 1: Checking the start marker

Before you start the analysis you should set the start marker at the position where the
rhythmic music begins. This means that if the song has a long ambient intro, the start
marker should be set after the intro. If the wizard can't detect any rhythm it will ask if the
start marker has been set after the intro. If not, you can move it to a better position in the
dialog.

205 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

If the beginning of the song does not have a definite rhythm, you will be asked if you
want to move the start marker.

Step 2: Checking the automatic tempo recognition

The Remix Agent will analyze the audio material and try to determine the tempo. The
object is played back while a metronome click can be heard and numbered green beat
lines appear in the waveform.
Under the waveform on the left side the established tempo is displayed in BPM. There is
a small transport console in the middle to make navigating easier. The slider serves as a
position controller. To set the metronome volume, an additional fader and mute button
are provided on the right-hand side.
The automatic tempo recognition doesn't always work right away. If you don't hear the
metronome clicking in time with the music, click the "No" button in the upper section of
the dialog in order to access the manual tempo input dialog.
To correct the metronome speed and any timeshift that may occur between the
metronome clicks you can use the tempo correction as well as the "Tap tempo" button:
Tempo correction: The Remix Agent offers various speed settings. The most probable
tempo detected by the Remix Agent is preset. If this tempo isn't correct, you can choose
another one from the list. The next time you play back the song it should be in sync with
the metronome.
On/Off beat correction: Now it may happen that the tempo is right, but the beats have
been displaced. "On/off beat correction" provides a number of alternatives for moving
the beats according to the complexity of the rhythm. Try out various alternatives until the
metronome clicks are in sync with the beat.
Tap tempo: Instead of selecting the tempo under "Change Tempo", you can click
rhythmically on the "Tap tempo" button or press the "T" key. Additional blue lines are
displayed in the wave display. After at least four taps, the Remix Agent attempts to select
the correct tempo from the list in "Tempo correction". The display next to the "Tap
tempo" button displays the current status. Keep tapping until the red display showing
"Unlocked" changes to the green "Locked" setting.
Use the "0" key to manually set the quarter beats while the music plays. Surrounding
markers will automatically be removed to ensure that the set tempo remains intact.
You can move the markers with the mouse. If you hold down the "Ctrl" key
simultaneously, the subsequent markers are also moved.
If the metronome clicks now correspond with the music, you can continue to the next
step.

206 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Step 3: Determining the start of a bar:

Next you can set the time signature. The default setting is 4/4 but you can adjust this if
necessary. The beat at the start of the bar should coincide with the high sound of the
metronome, or the red line in the waveform display.
It can now be corrected in one step: If the start of the bar can be heard, click on "Tap
One" once using the mouse or press the"T" key on the keyboard.
Alternatively, select how many quarter notes the "One" is to be moved back.
Use the "0" key to manually tap the position of the beginnings of the bars during
playback. This allows you to correct the beginnings of the bars in longer sections.
Continue to the last step if the starts of the bars are now correct.

Step 4: Applying BPM and bar recognition

Select which action should take place:
Create remix objects mode: The object is positioned in the remix object according to
bar length. What "Audio Quantization" is activated, remix objects are precisely arranged
on the bar grid. The remix objects can then be re-organized in a different rhythmic
sequence, mixed with loops or remix objects from other tracks etc.
Tempo adjustment: If the object and arrangement tempo are to be aligned, you can
either adapt the object tempo to that of the arrangement via timestretching or, vice
versa, you can change the arrangement tempo to that of the object. As most music has
slight tempo fluctuations, the time synchronization is often not perfect: After some time
the arrangement and the music "drift" apart. If the object tempo is to match the
arrangement tempo, this can be prevented using audio quantization.
Save only tempo and beat information: Tempo and beat information will be added to
the audio material, object and VIP are unchanged. The images on track 1 will be
repositioned according to this information.

Movie and editing templates

Film and editing templates are not dragged on to the available material in the project
window like effects, but rather opened like independent films. Each holds a placeholder
that can be filled with its own material. For example, you can use it for the opening
credits or a film teaser to introduce material on a website or in an email.
The movie templates are located under "Templates" > "Movie templates & editing
templates" in the Media Pool. Select the movie template according to the desired length
of the movie. Double clicking on a movie template opens it for editing.

207 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Insert your own material

In the lower section, you can see the vertically arranged structure of the template. It is
arranged into several scenes. You can find additional explanations in the information
window to the right.
You can insert your own content anywhere you see a media placeholder. The specified
length will be displayed on the media placeholder. Their lengths cannot be changed.
The placeholder icons indicate which type of material should ideally be inserted here
(e.g., group shot, landscape, close up).
1. Drag the desired image or video from the Media Pool or the project temp folder in
front of the placeholder to be replaced.
If the video inserted is too short, it will be rejected by MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.

Images automatically become the length of the controlled media placeholder.

2. If the video is too long for the media placeholder, move the position of the video in
the editing area.

Automatic filling
To add content quickly, use automatic filling.
Select multiple media items in the Media Pool or in the project temp folder and drag them
over the movie template. A field will appear where you collect your media. The movie
template will now be automatically filled. The order of the media items in the template
determines the date of the files; the sections are selected at random.
Note: Depending on the template, either the entire template will be filled with the video
footage or individual placeholders will each be filled with a video from the selection.

If you do not like the compilation, click on Reapply and the program will select new video
sections.

Design title
To customize the text, click on the corresponding placeholder and enter the desired text
to the right of the editing area in the text field.

208 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Further use of movie templates

Burning and exporting a filled template works just like with any other project.

Manually editing a movie template

Click this button if you want to customize the movie template in detail. The movie
template will be transferred to the known edit screen and every object, every transition,
every music title, etc. can be customized.
Warning! You cannot return to the movie template wizard.

Automatic scene detection

In the context menu of a video object automatic scene recognition can be opened. The
scene recognition function plays each video and scans it for drastic changes in color or
movement.

Digital video “time stamps” (points in time at which the device was switched on and off)
are also recognized as separate scenes.
l Click on the "Start search" button located below "Scene change".
The search for possible scene transitions will then start. If you have a large amount
of material, this can take a while, but the image analysis has to be done just once for
each recording. The results are saved together with the video file.
If the scene recognition is performed again with the same source material, the
scene transitions found are immediately displayed. If you are still not happy with
the resulting scene partitioning, simply repeat and correct where necessary.
l All found scene transitions in the list can be checked in the dialog. Every scene
marker can be selected or deleted. Select a scene transition from the list of found
scene transitions and use the preview images to check whether the found transition
is really a scene change or not.

209 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Tip: This option is helpful, for example, if a camera flash was captured in the source
footage. The flash from the camera would cause a sudden brightness modification even
though there was no actual scene change.

The preview always displays the end of the previous scene and the beginning of the new
scene. If the images do not differ except for the brightness, the scene may have been
falsely recognized. In this case select "Delete scene marker".
Via the zoom +/- buttons you can enlarge the part of the project window where the
selected scene begins or previous scene ended.
You can use the "Sensitivity" controller to change the sensitivity of the scene recognition,
so that different scene changes can be found depending on the setting.
With "Action on OK" you can specify whether the movie should be cut at the selected
scene transition or at all scene transitions and whether the found scenes should be saved
in the project folder.

Preview rendering
With MAGIX VIDEO PRO X, you can pre-render specific sections of your movie. This is
especially useful if smooth playback is not possible due to the applied effects and
transitions. The advantage versus the option "Combine audio and video" in the "Edit"
menu is that all of the objects will be maintained in the project. The rendered material will
only be played in the background when the playback marker reaches the corresponding
position.

Preview rendering is available in timeline mode and multicam mode.

Note about multicam mode: Only the source tracks will be rendered, not the target
tracks.

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X offers two options:

l It can automatically indicate all sections that can be rendered.
l Or, alternatively, you can indicate the section that should be pre-rendered
manually.
Note: The format that is used to render can be set via "File" > "Settings" > "Proxy and
preview rendering".

Automatic preview rendering

When using automatic preview rendering, you don't have to think about which sections
could be affected. MAGIX VIDEO PRO X analyzes your computer's performance and

210 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

determines which sections can be considered for preview rendering.

To perform automatic preview rendering, proceed as follows:
1. Click on the preview rendering button in front of the timeline.

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X will then analyze which sections should be pre-rendered.

A dialog will appear, indicating how many areas have been located:

These sections will be additionally marked in the MAGIX VIDEO PRO X timeline

using red bars.

2. Select "Yes" in the dialog to start preview rendering.

The red bars will appear green after preview rendering is over. If you make changes
in the pre-rendered section, it will appear red again and will have to be updated.
3. If you choose "No" instead, you can still conduct preview rendering later.

Manual preview rendering

In manual preview rendering you first have to select a range that contains problems with
hanging, jerky preview playback.
1. Place an in and out point above the range to be rendered.

2. Finally, click on the "Preview rendering" button. A preview rendering dialog will
appear.

3. Selected "Section". The preselected range will now be rendered.

After rendering, a green line appears in the timeline to symbolize that this range has been
rendered.

211 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

The section will remain green as long as no further changes are made to it. The green line
will then turn red and can be updated again.

Update preview rendering

Preview rendering is effective only as long as no changes are made to the pre-rendered
area. You can recognize a prerendered area from the green bars appearing above it on
the timeline. As soon as an object in the section has been edited, the green bar will turn
red. You can update this section at any time.
1. To do this, place the playback marker inside the section to be updated.
2. Click on the "Preview rendering" button.
3. In the preview rendering dialog select "Section" in order to update just the section
selected by the playback marker.
If you select "All", all non-rendered (red) sections will be rendered.

Using proxy files, proxy editing

If performance deteriorates and playback becomes shaky due to hardware limitations, hi-
res source material or very complex projects, it is recommended to use proxy files for
editing. Lower resolution copies of the original file in a format that is better for playback
are created and used for the editing process. The original files in a higher resolution are
then used for the export process by default.
l You can activate the Create proxy files automatically function directly in the start
dialog or at a later time in "File" > "Settings" > "Movie..." > "General movie settings".
By default this option is not selected.
When this option is activated, proxy files will automatically be created for all video files
imported to the project window or the project folder.
Note: Make sure there is sufficient memory available if proxy files are going to be created.

l You can set the quality of the proxy files in the dialog "Configure proxy and preview
rendering" > "Presets".
l The rendering process can be canceled by pressing the "Esc" key.
Proxy files will not be created if the quality settings for them are higher than the quality
of the source material.

212 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

It is not possible to create proxy files on an FAT file system (such as on an SD card) so the
source material for proxy files should be saved on an NTFS drive (Windows standard).
Proxy files are not created for the preview on the source monitor . The conversion only
takes place when the material is moved from the source monitor to the project folder.
Now editing can be done more smoothly on the source monitor.
Tip: You can activate or deactivate proxy files using the Quick function for a smoother
playback. This is useful during proxy editing if you want to quickly check how an effect
will look on the original material.

Use proxy files during rendering: If you want to burn your HD material to DVD, you
can reduce the rendering time. Activate the settings "Best performance for DVD" in the
dialog "Configure proxy and preview rendering" before the proxy files are created. This
will ensure that the quality of the proxy files is sufficient for output on DVD. You should
also activate the option "Use files created during rendering for export and burning" to use
the proxy files during export.

Multicam Editing
Multicam editing enables easy cutting of various recordings of the same scene from
different camera perspectives.
The program monitor displays image material from up to nine sources in sequence, from
which the "program" can be cut in real-time using your mouse, just like in a real studio.

Preparation
Multicam editing is a special mode in the project window. The top two tracks serve as
target tracks for copying sound and video from two different source tracks. The two
most upper tracks need to therefore be empty when changing into multicam mode, if
required the objects will be moved onto another track.
First you can load various video recordings of the same scene one under the other
starting on track 3 in the arranger.
It is important that the individual sources are synchronized to each other exactly. It is
best to find a noticeable movement, or some kind of audio cue if sound was recorded.
Note: To localize the sound in the audio track exactly you will have to create a wave
display of the track. To do this, right-click on the audio track and select "Waveform
display".

If you have one, you can use a clapper to signal the start of a scene. If not, simply having
one of the "actors" clap their hands can have the same effect. Set a snap marker in each

213 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

source object, with to-the-frame precision. You can now move the source objects over
each other, so that the grid points are aligned.
In each case two video sources with audio tracks can be automatically synchronized
using their audio material. To do this, use the "Align with other audio objects" function in
the audio object context menu.
It is also important that you carry out all output material effect processing (e.g. video or
audio cleaning) on the objects on the source tracks and master audio track before the
multicam cut. These object effects are transferred to the object in the target track when
editing. Otherwise, you will have to apply the effects from every single object to the
target track.

You can activate "Multicam" mode with this button or with the "Multicam" command
in the "Edit" menu.

Source tracks and preview images

The source tracks for multicam editing will be selected automatically. When the multicam
mode is activated, the source tracks will be assigned to all tracks containing video objects
starting from track 3.
You can also conduct or change the assignment manually. To do so, right click on the
trackbox of the corresponding track to active or deactivate a track as a source track.

The source tracks are marked using color.

A preview appears in source monitor for every assigned track, and the source track's
color corresponds to the frames around the preview images in the source monitor so that
you can quickly assign each preview image.

214 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

If the objects created using multicam cut are located on the target track, a preview image
of the corresponding source track highlighted with a yellow frame will be shown for
length of playback.

Multicam edit functions

You can edit various sources in the the target track during playback in real time or during
stopped playback.

Real-time multicam editing

You can edit various sources together during playback in real time:
1. Start playback.
2. Click the desired source in the program monitor. The corresponding video is added
into the target track starting from this time point.
3. To switch the source, click in the source monitor on another source. A new object
will be created using another source from this point in the target track.
4. You can repeat this process as often as you like.
For precise editing in the target track, use the usual edit functions or the Trimmer. Bear in
mind only to move the object borders and not the objects themselves as long as you are
in Multicam Cut Mode. Gaps or jumps can arise if you use the Multicam Cut functions
again afterwards.

Replacing an object's source

Replacing the video material of an object in the target track with another source:
l Select the object in the target track for which the source is to be replaced.
l Click on the source in the source monitor that should replace the video material in
the object.
The video material will now be replaced by the new source. The object length is not
changed.

Insert cut
Insert material from one of the sources between any position on the target track and the
next object.
l Place the playback marker on the desired position.
l Click the desired source in the program monitor.

215 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

The material from this source will now be inserted into the target track. The new object
ends at the next object. The portion below an existing object is overwritten in the
process.

Overwrite range
You can overwrite a selected area of the target track with one of the source videos.
l At the upper edge of the project window, select an area to edit by determining the
in point by clicking with the left mouse button and the out point by right-clicking.
Or use the corresponding buttons in the transport control.
l Click the desired source in the source monitor.
l The target track will be overwritten with the video material from the selected
source in the selected area.

Master audio track

Normally, videos in the source track are edited together with their audio tracks. Since the
original sound can differentiate from camera to camera due to different camera positions,
you will probably prefer using either the soundtrack from only one camera for all settings,
or to replace the soundtrack completely. (For music videos, for example, you will use the
studio version of the original track).
Right-click on the track box of one of the source audio tracks or a different audio track
and select "Multicam: master audio track" from the context menu to assign a master
audio track for multicam editing. The master audio track will be appear in a dark color.
Now, during every multicam cut, material from the master audio track will be inserted on
track 2, independent of the source track used.

Synchronize video objects using the audio track

Video objects can be synchronized using their audio tracks. This is done by comparing the
audio tracks for similarities. If videos come from the same recording environment, the
same acoustic events will be found on their audio tracks (e.g. the sound of the clapper
board).
Synchronization of multiple objects on one track is possible.
l First, on the reference track, select all audio objects that are to act as reference
positions.
l Then, on another track, select all audio objects that should be moved.
l Choose the "Align with other audio objects on this track" function from the audio
object context menu.

216 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Note: If the desired audio track is found in a combination object, you will find the "Align
with other audio objects on this track" option in the "Audio functions" submenu.

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X attempts to locate the acoustic events in the reference objects of

the second track and to move these to the corresponding position. Because the audio
objects are grouped with their corresponding video objects or comprise a common
object, videos are synchronized in the process.

360° videos
In a 360° video, the action is recorded in all directions simultaneously. 360° video can be
shot with special cameras that contain two 180° lenses, or by creating an array of several
normal cameras to record in different directions. In the simplest array, there are two
cameras with super wide angle lenses that record in two directions; better setups use six
or more cameras.
The result is that the viewer can view "around" him or herself by determining the view
direction. To do so on a PC, drag the mouse during playback. On mobile devices, the
built-in orientation sensor can be used: The view direction follows the device's rotation.
In combination with VR glasses or a smartphone attachment such as Samsung Gear VR or
Google Cardboard, it is possible to be completely submerged in a virtual environment
with a 360° video.
360° videos are supported by the most important video platforms like YouTube, Vimeo,
and Facebook.
Technically, 360° videos are regular, two-dimensional videos. The images of the sphere
surface around the camera are displayed distorted, similarly to how the earth's surface is
projected onto flat maps of the world. This results in relatively large videos in order to
provide enough resolution along the strongly distorted edges after rectification.

Preprocessing / Stitching
Stitching describes the process of combining images from individual cameras to create
one, large image and projecting the spherical image onto the rectangular surface of the
video. While more advanced cameras can perform their own stitching, most simple
cameras with only two lenses create a video which needs to be stitched together to
create a true 360° video.

217 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Unstitched video image from two 180° fisheye lenses on a 360° camera
These cameras often also include stitching software, but the more elegant solution is to
perform stitching directly in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X. The stitching feature is located under
the Effects tab in the 360° video section of the Media Pool.
Select the video object and effect, then click "Apply effect". The video should look like
this in the video monitor:

For standard 360° cameras with two lenses, there are presets located in the list field
above. For other camera models, you can change the parameters below.
Note: MAGIX VIDEO PRO X normally recognizes 360° video material in need of stitching
and automatically applies the effect.

360° editing
There are two ways to work with 360° in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X:
1. Creating a 360° video from your 360° output material and adding content (videos,
images and titles) and effects to it, or
2. adding your 360° content to a normal video and specifying the display section and
direction of view.
The editing features for both scenarios are available under 360° video under the "Effects"
tab in the Media Pool. The editing mode which makes the most sense for the application
scenario in question is automatically displayed under 360° editing.
Creating a 360° video

218 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X automatically switches to 360° mode when you load 360° material
(a prompt will appear). The program will also automatically perform any necessary
stitching (see below).
For these types of videos, the video monitor is switched to a special 360° mode which
straightens the image and allows you to move the direction of view using your mouse.
(You can get to 360° mode by going to the menu located in the upper left-hand corner of
the program monitor.)
For these types of videos, the video monitor is switched to a special 360° mode which
straightens the image and allows you to move the direction of view using your mouse.
(You can get to 360° mode by going to the menu located in the upper left-hand corner of
the program monitor.)

If MAGIX VIDEO PRO X does not automatically recognize your 360° video material as

such, you can manually switch to 360° mode by going to the movie settings and selecting
a corresponding video preset (360°...) at the bottom of the list.
You can cut this video and apply effects as you would a normal video in MAGIX VIDEO 
PRO X. But bear in mind that most effects in the View/Animation section will remove the
360° effect.
Note: Automatic recognition currently only works for Ricoh (Theta m15, S and SC) and
Samsung Gear 360 models and for 360° projects you have exported yourself.

Adding content to 360° Videos

Position object in 360° space editing mode

To add content to a 360° video (e.g. floating titles), proceed as follows:

219 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

1. Place the play cursor where you want the title object to appear.
2. First create the title object.
3. Select the object and switch to the 360° editing effect in the Media Pool.
4. Activate 360° editing (1)
5. In the video monitor in 360° mode, use the mouse to set the view to the position
where you want the title to appear.
6. Click "Orient to perspective" (3) to place the title precisely in the direction of view.
Use perspective (4) to specify the distance between the title object and the viewer.
7. To make the title fly in and out, you can apply a keyframe animation to the
perspective and orientation parameter (2).

Video monitor in 360° mode, with a 3D title object added to a 360° video

Adding 360° content to other videos

Select section from panorama" editing mode

To add 360° videos or photos to a normal video, proceed as follows:

220 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

1. Load the 360° video or photo. If a message appears asking if you want to switch to
360° mode, select "No" — we do not want to create a 360° video, we simply want
to add 360° footage to a normal video.
2. Select the object and activate 360° editing (1).
3. Use "Orientation" (2) to define the direction of view. It's also possible to simulate a
camera pan through three-dimensional space by animating these parameters and
the viewing angle (4) using keyframes.
4. The "Camera angle" (3) is preset to 360° for 360° videos; for panorama photos with
a lower camera angle, you can check the box and set the camera angle to a different
value. You can try to get close to the "exact" value by eyeballing the effect and
adjusting the angle correspondingly.
5. "Perspective" (4) specifies how much you want to zoom in or out.
6. The remaining parameters can be used to correct distortion: "Super wide angle" (5)
widens the perspective beyond the maximum permitted angle of 180° all the way
up to 360°. This lets you turn panoramas into eye-catching mini-planets. The
fisheye lens ("fisheye"6) distorts the perspective. If an image already contains
distortion as a result of a wide-angle shot, the fisheye effect can be used to correct
this. For instance, a curved horizon can be "straightened".

360° Scene Rotation

This effect rotates the entire 360° scene along all three spatial axes. This allows you to
make corrections if the 360° camera was upside down or crooked during filming.

221 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Stereo3D
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X enables the editing and creation of "genuine" 3D videos and
photos. First, let's create an overview of this complex topic by familiarizing ourselves
with the most important principles and the golden rules that are involved. Next, we'll look
at the individual steps of the workflow in more detail.
Note on using 3D content: Some people experience unpleasant symptoms (e.g.
headaches, overexertion, eye strain or nausea) when they are exposed to 3D video. We
recommend taking regular breaks for this reason. In case of problems, the user should
immediately stop use and refer to a doctor or optometrist. Incorrect production of 3D
content may also produce these symptoms.

Warning for small children: The eyesight of small children (especially those younger
than six years old) is still developing. We recommend referring to a doctor or optometrist
prior to allowing your child to view 3D videos.

The basics
Human eyes perceive objects from two different angles, and our brain calculates an
image using this information. This enables us to recognize the distance and position of an
object. That's any 3D material that we want to process should be recorded according to
this scheme.

Viewing 3D
A conventional canvas or a simple television is only able to display images in two
dimensions, which is why different techniques have been developed to project images in
3D. All of these techniques have one thing in common: special glasses are required in
order to display the left and right eyes different information. We will examine these
technologies in detail later.

The three golden rules

l Maintain limits during recording: In order to retain a 3D recording with natural
depth information certain limits need to be maintained. The most important rule is
not to go below the so-called "point of minimum distance". The minimum point is
the point in the picture at which the camera may be closest.
l Frame around minimum point: To create a 3D effect behind the dead window,
both title images must be moved exactly over each other at the location of the
minimum point. Simultaneously, the same objects must be visible at the edges of

222 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

both spatial images; if needed, you may use the cropping function in the Media Pool
to do this.
Note: The dead window it a theoretically perceived sort of screen, behind which the 3D
film is played back to the audience. This marks the closest point, i.e. the foremost point. If
this rule is not adhered to, the object seems to "jump out" of the imaginary window, and
this may cause headaches if it is excessive.

l Observe natural viewing direction of eyes: Objects featuring 3D depth effects as

a red/cyan image (anaglyph) that are viewed without glasses may be perceived as
offset. This displacement should, if possible, take up less than 1/30 of the entire
image. Otherwise, it will appear that the eyes are looking in different directions.
Note: This offset may only take place on the horizontal access. Displacements on the
vertical axis and rotated portions must be adjusted to each other!

Record 3D
The distance between eyes in humans is ca. 65 mm, which forms the so-called "stereo
base width". But because our eyes are dynamic and we can even "cross" our eyes, it is
possible to focus on objects that are closer.
Various techniques exist for 3D recording. Each method has its advantages and
disadvantages:
l 3D cameras with two lenses: The advantages are easy to see – these cameras
deliver 3D material without much effort. The disadvantage is that the stereo base
width (lens distance) cannot be changed.
l Two cameras on a special mount: This involves a little more work. Two cameras
are mounted on a special support to record material for the left and the right side of
the 3D image simultaneously; microphone booms for stereo recordings may also be
used for this purpose. The disadvantage in this case is that the shutter releases
have to be pressed at exactly the same time if there are moving objects in the
picture. In case of video, both movies must be synchronized before being edited.
Advantages: Stereo base width may be changed by adjusting the distance between
the cameras; larger selection of camera models.
l Two photos via the same camera: This technique only allows still images. The
camera is simply used to record two images from different perspectives, and these
are used as the right and left images. For best results, use a tripod.
l Consistently fast camera movement, e.g. along a street: Only a single
conventional camera is required in this case, but the range of applications is very
limited. This is the most cost-effective method for creating 3D videos. Material is
filmed at a speed of circa 615 km/h. During editing, the edited video object is

223 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

duplicated and one of the videos is played back with a time lapse. The movement
direction determines which is the right and left image. 3D still shots may also be
created using this method.

Warning, minimum distance!

The position of the object closest to the lens or lenses is designated as the minimum
point. This minimum point may not exceed a specific minimum point; this is easy to
calculate via the following formula:
Note: Lens focal point (e.g. 25 mm) x stereo base width (e.g. 65 mm) x 1.5* /1 mm =
minimum point (2437.5 mm ~ 2.44 m)
*1.5 is a factor derived from the cut-off appearing when filming through a lens.
**1 mm is the so-called "deviation" or "spatial dimension". This only involves a rough
value in this case.

Examples for 3D cameras:

Panasonic HDC-SDT750 (base width 12 mm): minimum point is approx. 1.5 m.
Fuji REAL 3D W3 (base width 75 mm): minimum point at approx. 3 m; for long-distance
recordings as much as 8 m.
This so-called minimum point has an important role in other aspects of 3D editing.

Prepare for 3D editing

3D videos are recorded and saved differently by the various cameras, which means that
depending on the camera model or recording method, videos and images will be present
in different forms.

In one file
Many cameras, especially for photos recordings, create one single file containing the left
and the right image next to one another.
l Drag these files from the Media Pool directly into your arrangement.
l Select the created objects.
l In the Media Pool under "Effects -> Stereo3D -> Properties -> Create stereo",
select the entry "Side-by-side (left image left/right)" for material at half-width.
Note: If you have created side-by-side material yourself (e.g. two photos arranged next to
each other in a single image file), then continue as described, but select the entry "Side-
by-side (left image left/right)" finally for material at full width.

224 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

In multiple files
Some 3D cameras create one file for each the left and the right side. In case you just take
two photos from different perspectives with a conventional camera, the process
functions the same way.
l In the Media Pool, open the folder that features the desired files.
l Sort the files in increasing order according to the date. This way, all files will lie in
pairs one below the other.
l Now, select the files and drag them from the Media Pool directly into your
arrangement.
l Now select all newly created objects in the arrangement.
l In the Media Pool under "Effects -> Stereo 3D -> Properties -> Create stereo"
create "Stereo 3D pair left/right image first".

Turn camera movements into 3D videos

Camera movements may be transformed into 3D videos by being duplicated and
converted via time displacement. To do so, you can simply record on the right or the left
side while, for example, driving along a street.
The speed should be set between 615 km/h (approx. 410 mph) and depends on the
frame rate, the focal point, and the distance of the objects being filmed (among other
things). At increased speeds, it may occur that the spatial impression is too strong and the
filmed material seems unnatural and unpleasant.
l If the video is in the arrangement, the stereo depth for the 2D object may be set in
the Media Pool via "Effects -> Stereo 3D -> Properties".
l Depending on the direction of the recordings, you will have to move the control
either to the right or the left.
l Check the results in the anaglyph display with red/cyan glasses
l Correct any unrealistic effects by adjusting the controller in the opposite direction.
l If the spatial depth is exaggerated, reduce the changed parameters.
Note: Not only camera movements, but also other 2D materials may be arranged
spatially.
3D material may be edited with the same functions as 2D material.

Export and burn 3D videos

There are no special requirements for export and burning. Only the desired 3D technique
is specified.

225 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Anaglyph: This technique is recommended for uncomplicated playback of finished videos

or playback with conventional TV sets or projectors. Viewers must simply put on a pair of
red/cyan glasses to be able to enjoy a 3D movie.
Side-by-side: Create 3D movies for a 3D-capable playback device without having to
compromise the quality. It doesn't matter initially whether your video is viewed in
"Shutter" mode or in "Polarized filter".
l Depending on your playback device, you should set double resolution in order to
produce full resolution for both the right and the left image.
l Not all playback devices are capable of double resolution. If this is the case for your
device, 50% pinched images will be displayed. The quality is nevertheless higher
than output using the anaglyph technique.
Only left/right side: This settings exports only one side of your 3D video instead of the
entire video.
Lenticular image: This allows you to view 3D footage without 3D glasses. The footage is
displayed interchangeably to give the impression that it is wiggling or shaking.
Superimposed: This export option is similar to „Side-by-Side“. The images are
superimposed during output.
l Depending on your playback device, you should set double resolution in order to
produce full resolution for both the upper and the lower image.
l Not all playback devices are capable of double resolution. If this is the case for your
device, 50% pinched images will be displayed. The quality is nevertheless higher
than output using the anaglyph technique.

Exporting files
The standard path for all file exports is "File > Export". Depending on the export format
and destination, the export dialog also allows the 3D technique to be used to be selected.

Burning
When burning a Blu-ray Disc or DVD, you must first open the encoder settings in the
burn dialog and set the desired 3D technology. Next, you may proceed to burn the disc
as usual.

Create Panorama
This special feature can be applied to selected photos by going to "Effects" > "Video 
object effects" > "Create panorama". Using it, you can combine several photos into a
wide panorama photo.

226 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Tip: Optimize you photos beforehand, so that the transitions are not to be seen in the
finished panorama.

1. Load all necessary images into the film project. The images that should make up the
panorama should be selected one after the other while holding down the Ctrl key.
Select the entry Create panorama from the context menu.
2. Sometimes photos are accidentally loaded in the wrong sequence. To sort the
photos properly, click on the Invert sequence button.
3. If you click on Create the panorama image will be processed. Depending on the
resolution and number of original images this may take some time. The original
photos are replaced in your slideshow with the panorama image in the movie. The
original files on your hard disk are not affected.
Note: You can use up to six images to create a panorama image. Click on More options,
to find out more about the upgrade.

Batch conversion
With batch conversion it is possible to bring multiple video files, movies, objects or whole
projects in just one step into another format.
Batch conversion can be opened using different presets. A pre-selection appears only if
you have loaded a film or a project.

The following scenarios exist:

l Batch conversion has been opened from the context menu in the Media Pool:
The file selected in the Media Pool before will be transferred to the task list and can
be converted to the available formats.
l Only one empty movie is open: In this case use batch converting via "File" from
the menu. A dialog opens additionally for batch conversion, in which video files that
have to be converted to other formats can be selected and loaded.
l Multiple movies with video material are open: The opened movie will be
exported as a whole video. This is especially useful for large projects with lots of
individual movies, eliminating the need to export each one individually.
l A movie with video material and more than one object in the first track is
opened: Open batch conversion from the "File" menu or using the keyboard
shortcut "s". A dialog opens, in which you can select which tasks should be created
for batch conversion.

227 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

l Multiple movies: The opened movie will be exported as a whole video.

Additional movies can be added to the list in the dialog.
l Objects in movie: All of the objects in the first track will be exported in
individual video files.
l Chapters: All chapters of the current movie will be converted into individual
video files.

Presets: Here you can save and load your settings. These include the list of files to be
exported and the export settings and names of all entries.
Note: Batch conversion references the projects and the objects contained directly therein.
Keep in mind that for converting of entire movies, the source material must also be
available. During conversion of individual objects, make sure that the movie file has not
been changed between loading and saving.

This is the list of all objects that have to be converted into the indicated format. Each task
can have its own export settings.
Add files (not during conversion of individual objects from movies): Manually add
files, including video files and projects.

228 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Remove selected: The marked tasks will be removed from the list.
Duplicate selected: If you would like to export tasks in multiple formats, you can mark
and duplicate them and assign individual export settings to them.
format settings: Here, you can make settings for the currently selected tasks, whereby
multiple tasks can be given a setting simultaneously. Select one or more tasks from the
task list.
Note on format setting for multiple tasks: If one of the marked tasks already an
individual setting, its will be lost after another format is selected. To prevent this, remove
the selection for each task using Ctrl + mouse click.

Set the target format in the flip menu. The default is "Windows Media Video" (WMV).
Advanced settings: Here, you can open the dialog for the advanced format settings. This
corresponds to the dialog for normal video export of a movie.
Tip: If you give several tasks the same file name, the created files will be intelligently
documented. For example, you can easily convert and simultaneously line up multiple
movies that belong together thematically.

Shut down PC automatically after successful export: This option is useful especially
when you export long movies and are using an especially high-quality and resource-
demanding export format. You can leave the computer to work on the individual tasks
and after finishing them it will turn itself off.
Start batch conversion: Click on "Start conversion" to start the process. After ending
conversion processes, a list of all export processes with a message informing of its
success will appear.
Hint: During batch conversion, non-critical messages that appear during normal file
import will be suppressed. This is to enable the smoothest conversion of all tasks.
Nevertheless, there are some important messages that may require action. Therefore,
please make sure that all files to be converted or the project can be easily loaded before
starting a batch conversion.

Synchronization with external devices

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X supports MIDI timecode (MTC). This allows MAGIX VIDEO PRO X
to be synchronized from external sources and lets it synchronize external sources.
With a virtual MIDI cable (e.g. "LoopBe1") it is also possible to synchronize MAGIX VIDEO 
PRO X with Samplitude or Sequoia. A requirement for this is that a virtual MIDI cable has
been successfully installed.

229 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

You can find this function in the movie settings (keyboard shortcut: E) under
"Synchronization".

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X as master

If MAGIX VIDEO PRO X should synchronize external programs or sources, then proceed
as follows:
1. Open the synchronization options.
2. Activate "Output synchronization".
3. Set the corresponding MIDI output under "Device" on which the MIDI timecode
should be output.
Tip: If you want to synchronize another program (e.g. Samplitude or Sequoia) with
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X using a virtual MIDI cable, ensure that the corresponding MIDI
device is configured in both programs. The program to be synchronized must also support
MIDI timecode (MTC) and be configured as a "slave".

Example: If in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X the device "LoopBe Internal MIDI" is set as the MIDI
output, "LoopBe Internal MIDI" must be configured in the MTC input in the program to
be synchronized.

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X as a slave

When set as a slave, MAGIX VIDEO PRO X follows an external source or another program
during playback.
1. Open the synchronization dialog.
2. Activate "input synchronization".
3. Set the MIDI input under "device" where the MIDI timecode is located
Result: MAGIX VIDEO PRO X will be synchronized on this MIDI timecode.
Note: If MAGIX VIDEO PRO X is to be synchronized by another program (e.g. Samplitude
or Sequoia) using a virtual MIDI cable with MAGIX VIDEO PRO X ensure that the
corresponding MIDI device is configured in both programs. The program that is set to be
the synchronization source must support MTC and be configured as a "master".

Example: If you want to use "LoopBeInternal MIDI" as the MIDI in, "LoopBeInternal
MIDI" must also be set in the master as the MIDI out for the MIDI timecode.

230 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Synchronizing Samplitude/Sequoia with MAGIX VIDEO PRO

X
Proceed as follows to synchronize MAGIX VIDEO PRO X with Samplitude/Sequoia for
multichannel audio productions.
The introduction featured here provides an example. In this case, MAGIX VIDEO PRO X is
slave and as a result follows the time information from Samplitude/Sequoia. In this way, it
is possible to continue working in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X while Samplitude/Sequoia runs
synchronously.
The chapter "Transferring a Surround project to MAGIX VIDEO PRO X" explains how
completed Surround projects are transferred from Samplitude/Sequoia to and processed
in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.

Requirements
Since synchronization occurs via MTC (MIDI timecode), a virtual MIDI driver must be
installed. An example of this is "LoopBe1".
If you want to create Surround projects, you need a Surround-compatible sound card
with 6 channels.

Setting up MAGIX VIDEO PRO X

1. Open the synchronization dialog.
2. Activate the box "Output synchronization active".
3. Enter the virtual MIDI interface under "Device" (e.g. "LoopBeInternal MIDI").
4. Enter the same frame rate under "frame rate" as is set in the slave.
5. Activate the option "MMC Fullframe send/receive".
6. Click "OK" to close the dialog.
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X sends the MIDI timecode on the configured MIDI device.

Setting up Samplitude/Sequoia
1. Start Samplitude/Sequoia; MAGIX VIDEO PRO X can remain open.
2. Open the Samplitude/Sequoia synchronization dialog. Right click the "Sync" button
on the transport console, or select the entry "Synchronization options" in the
"Options" menu.
3. Activate the box "MTC input active".
4. Configure the virtual MIDI interface under "Device" (e.g. "LoopBeInternalMIDI").
5. Open the "MIDIMachineControl(MMC)" settings.

231 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

6. Choose the following settings:

l MMC command: "MMC receiving active"
l Under MIDIDevice: set "(Use MTCDevice)".
l Activate "CursorPosition (FullFrame)".
l Activate "Play, Stop, FFW, RW".
l Deactivate all other options.
7. Click „OK“ to close the dialog.
8. Make sure that the "Sync" button is activate on the transport console of
Samplitude/Sequoia.
Now you can easily edit and customize your videos in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X while
Samplitude/Sequoia runs playback synchronously with MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.
Note: When synchronizing, make a certain amount of pre-roll time available. It may take
a few seconds after starting playback until master and slave play in synch.

16-bit Deep Color Support

The color depth support in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X expands available color depth in internal
editing from 8-bit to 16-bit per color channel and thus theoretically reaches over 281
billion color nuances.
Background knowledge:
Color depth is determined by the number of displayable color nuances. The number of
nuances is measured in bits and is known as the color depth of an image. The more
nuances or bits are detectable, the more brightness levels and color nuances can be
displayed. This increase reduces ugly zigzags in color gradients.

8-bit processing is currently the editing standard for DVDs, Blu-rays and most TVs and
monitors. Everything above was extremely difficult to achieve in home and
semiprofessional environments due to various technical limitations such as missing
cameras and corresponding playback devices.
Furthermore, several video codecs and image standards use the process of color
subsampling for data reduction. There are different methods of subsampling, which make
different selections when sampling the color signals. But a perceivable loss of quality is
quite small.

232 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

The first internal color grading workflow processes in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X have already
been switched from 8-bit to 16-bit deep color. Eventually, all internal processes will be
switched to 16-bit. Effects such as TimeStretch, DoFlip, Saturation, Fade and Crossfade
are already supported. In the export settings – in addition to resolution and frame rate –
the color depth of the finished video can be specified. This results in more natural and
brilliant pictures, without any bothersome zigzags in color gradients.
This means that:
Professional codecs like HEVC and Intermediate Codec work with high resolution
formats of up to 10-bit. This offers a high degree of benefit from the deep color support,
because high-resolution video material with a high color depth is processed without any
loss of quality. In addition, color subsampling can be deactivated under Intermediate
Codec by selecting 4:4:4 color subsampling.
Notes:
l If you have an up-to-date PC and perform extensive editing to footage, then 16-bit
is worthwhile.
l 16-bit requires more computing power.
l Material that has very similar hues and saturations profit enormously from
additional color depth
l To correctly display the deep color range, everything should be coordinated:
Starting from the source material, to the connecting cables to the monitor, each link
has to be able to support 16-bit deep color!
Supported formats with deep color support in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X
Import
Video: AVC, HEVC and Intermediate Codec up to 10-bit
Photo: TGA, PSD, TIFF and RAW up to 16-bit
Export
Video: HEVC and Intermediate Codec up to 10-bit

Load backup project

All backups saved by MAGIX VIDEO PRO X are listed in a dialog and can be restored. This
type of automatic backup gets the file extension MV_ (underscore).
This option is useful in emergencies, e.g. if the program crashes or you unintentionally
saved your changes during editing and wish to return to the previous version of the
movie.

233 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

Tip: Under "File > Settings> Program... " you can determine how often an automatic
backup will be created in the "System" tab under "Automatic backup".

MAGIX Update Notifier

The Cloud Import feature lets you import media files into MAGIX VIDEO PRO X from your
Google Drive or Microsoft OneDrive.
l Clicking on Cloud Import will open the MAGIX Update Notifier tool.

l Under Cloud Import, click the cloud service and select an account to sign in to.
l If you are logging in for the first time, you need to grant MAGIX Update Notifier
permission to access your account. Enter your email address and password to sign
in to your account, then click Allow on the next screen. You should then see your
media from the cloud.
l Select the media you want to import. Click Download to download the media. You
can specify the target location in the dialog.

When the download has finished, you can either continue importing media or simply exit
Cloud Import. Closing the Cloud Import tool will take you back to MAGIX Update
Notifier. There, you can choose to open the imported media directly in MAGIX VIDEO 
PRO X or open the folder containing the media.
Note: By default, MAGIX Update Notifier is set to run when you start your computer so
that media can be transferred when MAGIX VIDEO PRO X is not running. To prevent this

234 / 313
 Additional functions and tools

from running at system start, open the MAGIX VIDEO PRO X settings and disable the
option Run at system start.

235 / 313
 'Burn' interface

'Burn' interface

Click here to switch to the "Burn" screen.

The Burn area enables you to create a selection menu to burn the entire project including
all movies and the selection menu to disc later on.
All movies loaded into the project will be included. If you want to remove some of the
loaded films, switch to the "Edit" screen again and delete the unwanted movies from the
project there. To do this, switch to the movie, open the "File" menu and select "Manage 
project" > "Remove movie from project".

Notes

When you try to burn your first Blu-ray Disc a notice will appear to inform you that a free
audio expansion package must first be downloaded and installed. Click on "OK" to
proceed and wait until the audio encoder for Blu-ray discs is installed.

If the current project contains data in the BDMV/MVC (Stereo 3D) format, the burn
process cannot proceed. Due to licensing stipulations of the Blu-ray Disc Association, files
in BDMV/MVC (Stereo 3D) format cannot be burned to blank optical media.

Overview

Menu preview: Here you can see a selection menu preview.

Change view:Here you can swap between the preview and edit view.

236 / 313
 'Burn' interface

Remote control: Check how your disc will react later when you press a button
on your player's remote control.

Output:Before burning the project, select the desired format. The Burn Wizard
(⇗245) will open.

Play preview: Play the preview menu and test how it works with the remote
control.

Template category: Select the desired section from various categories with
different menus.

Menu templates: Switch between different templates for designing your

menus.

Apply templates: Choose whether you want to use a template for the page,
the menu or all menus on the disc.

Preview
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X provides two different modes for designing and previewing the disc
menu.
Preview mode simulates the behavior of a playback device, e.g. DVD player or Blu-ray
player. You can select a template for the menu and burn the disc.
In Editing mode, you may adjust many features of the disc menu. Templates are also
available here that may be flexibly adjusted to suit your needs.

Remote control
The virtual remote control is an important helper when it comes to checking how the disc
will perform later. When the disc featuring the project is inserted into the player, this
remote control will control the preview picture just like a "real" remote control controls
the picture on a monitor or TV. The menu navigation may be activated via the arrow keys
or the "OK" button. Activated buttons are highlighted.
The number keys select the corresponding entry on the menu page. All menu entries are
marked with a corresponding number. Within a chapter menu, playback is started from
the particular chapter. In the movie menu, the corresponding chapter menu (if available)
is changed or movie playback is started.
Navigation buttons: These buttons can be used to navigate in the menu of the disc that
will be burned. The entries can be changed and confirmed by clicking "OK". The remote
control works just like the remote control for your home DVD/Blu-ray player.

237 / 313
 'Burn' interface

Skip/move forward/back: This allows you to skip to the next or previous scene while
playing back your movie. In the menu, you can skip forward or back from one menu page
to another.
Play: Starts the first entry in the menu. In case chapter menus are available, the chapter
menu will be displayed first. Pressing the play button again starts playback with the first
scene of the movie.
Stop: Pressing stop halts playback.
Disc: Switches to the first page of the film menu.
Sub: Switches to the chapter menu (if available) for the currently selected film.

Menu
The menu is also burned to disc and appears when inserted into the player. Just like with
a store-bought DVD or Blu-ray Disc, you may easily select your movies with the help of
preview pictures, or access particular chapters within a movie.

Templates
You will find the menu templates below.

To the left you will see a tree structure for selecting various menu templates. At the top,
you should first select whether you would like to use templates in ratio "16"9" or "4:3".
l Animated (DVD): These templates contain background and introductory videos as
well as music. The control elements are displayed in various modes. The templates
can be used only for mini DVDs, DVDs and AVCHD discs.
l Static (4:3 only, DVD): Here you'll find templates made up of regular background
pictures and control elements.
l Custom: These templates adjust to your disc project; the movies and scenes you
use are integrated directly into the menu.
l HD static (16:9 only, DVD, Blu-ray, AVCHD, WMV HD): These templates
contain super-sharp, high-res background images that are particularly noticeable on
HD TV devices.

238 / 313
 'Burn' interface

l Movie templates (only 16:9): Here you will find menu templates that are specially
made for movie templates found in the Media Pool.
Note: These menus require "Film menu" and "Chapter menu" to be activated in the "Edit"
screen under "Disc options".

If you've selected one of the menu templates, you can use the horizontal scroll bar to
view all the others available. There are lots of options when using the templates:
l To apply a template to all menu pages, double click the desired template. The
complete template will then be applied.
l You can also combine various elements from different templates with each other.
To do so, you must first switch into Editing mode. If, for example, you wish to
combine the text format of a template with the background of another one, double
click on the template containing the background first. Then click on the "Font" tab
and select a template for the font.
l You can load the layout (or individual layout elements) for the current menu (movie
or scenes) as well as for all menus.

Editor screen
To edit individual menu elements and the menu structure, activate the "Edit" button.

Hold down the left mouse button and drag text boxes or graphical elements to the
desired position. You can adjust the size by dragging out the corners and edges of the
frame.

Undo: This command allows you to undo the last changes made.

Redo: This function undoes the previous "Undo" function.

239 / 313
 'Burn' interface

Set aspect ratio: To avoid distortion, use this button to set the aspect ratio
for the menu elements.

Group: Menu elements are moved or resized simultaneously as a group,

including the description text and number.

Fade in TV display area in the program monitor: This option displays the
image borders of the television as lines in the program monitor.

Grid: This button activates a grid to help position frames exactly next to each
other as required. Using the small arrow next to the button you can open a
dialog to fine tune the grid settings.

Import PSD: Use this option to import a personal menu template in the PSD
format (e.g. from Xara Designer Pro X, Photoshop, etc.)

Export PSD: Use this option to export the menu as a PSD file (e.g. for Xara
Designer Pro X, Photoshop, etc.)

Note: These options make it easy to adjust menus quickly to suit your needs. Simply
export the menu, edit it in a graphics program, save it, and import the same file again.
More information on this topic can be found in the DVD Menus with Xara Designer Pro
X section.

Navigation
Using navigation links above you can reach the structure of the menu entries.
l All movies are listed as first entries. The corresponding menu level is the film menu.
l All scenes are listed as second entries next to it to the right The corresponding
menu level is the chapter menu.
Removing the red check deactivates the corresponding entry in the chapter menu. The
scenes are still displayed of course, but you can no longer select them directly from the
menu.
l You can open the movie menu for further editing by clicking on the movie above it.
l If you click on one of the chapters, the chapter menu in the preview will be opened
for editing.

Disc options
Here you can activate or deactivate certain elements or even complete menus.

240 / 313
 'Burn' interface

Note:To create varied templates, all elements that can be switched needn't be included in
every template.

Intro video: Press this button to load videos to be used as introductions to your discs.
The following formats are supported: "*.avi", "*.mpg", "*.mxv", "*.vob". The intro is played
immediately after the DVD has been inserted into the player. The DVD menu will then
appear. A check mark "Do not skip" ensures that the intro video must be played
completely each time the disc is inserted and that it may not be skipped with the remote
control or otherwise.
The disc menu essentially consists of two layers:
Film menu: The upper layer includes the film menu, which is only used if a project
contains multiple movies.
Chapter menu: This is the lower layer of the disc menu, which utilizes the chapter
markers in a movie as menu entries. More information about this is available in Chapter
markers.
Note: A chapter menu cannot contain more than 99 entries. If your movie should have
more chapters, either burn it without a chapter menu or split your movie into multiple
parts.

Audio menu: If your project features multiple DVD audio tracks, then a menu will be
added to the disc for the user to select an audio track. This allows you to burn an English
and German audio track onto the disc and then select which one you want for playback.
Note: You can define audio tracks in the Edit interface. Open the context menu of a track
header of the audio track and select "DVD audio track". Choose a unique name for the
audio track. Repeat this process with each additional audio track that you want to
appear as an DVD audio track.

Preview pictures: Shows/hides the preview pictures in the disc menu.

Numbering: The numbers beside the menu entries can be selected directly using the
remote control. Use this option to fade them in and out.
Frame: A frame borders the preview pictures. If you don't want a frame, it can be easily
removed using this option.
You can edit the existing menu background or create a new one from scratch.

A click on this button switches to the "Edit" interface and loads the
selected menu background as video.
Here you can change and design the background as you please. The background movie
will be set as the menu background automatically after pressing "Save".

241 / 313
 'Burn' interface

Tip: If you would like to design a new menu background, simply delete all existing objects
from the menu project and load new ones.

Designing a page

Edit: You have three options to edit the background of a menu page. You
can either set a certain "color value" for the background or select an image file from your
hard drive. You may also select a certain frame from a video in your project.

In external editor: A PSD file is sent directly to the program that has
been selected in the program settings as the menu editor.
New menu pages may also be added or unnecessary pages may be removed.

Adds a new menu page.

Removes the selected menu page.

Animated selection menus

You can also add audiovisual animations to the disc menus. As required, background
videos are played as endless loops while the menu is shown on the screen. You can also
set up background music in various formats or any background picture for each menu.
Sound/music: Load an audio file and use it as an animation in the menu background.
Video: Load a video or graphics file and use it as an animation in the menu background.
In addition to the options for the background graphic (see above), you can also use a
sequence from a loaded slideshow or from a different video file.

Background video options:

l Create animated menu buttons: The preview images for individual movies in the
movie menu are shown as small movie samples. Set the start point and length of the
animation using the sequence options faders.
l Use the audio track of the video: The audio track of the background video is used
with the menu.
l Play menu animation as a loop: The background video (audio and/or video) is
played back as a loop.
l Length of the menu view is set by: Audio/video or whichever medium is longer.
You can specify how long the background video should be here. The other medium
will be played as a loop.

242 / 313
 'Burn' interface

Designing buttons
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X enables easy editing of all buttons together with their menu entries.

Pressing this button or double clicking the menu entries allows menu
entries you have created to be edited. The dialog with the properties of the menu entries
will open.

Edit in MAGIX Foto Designer: These buttons open MAGIX Foto

Designer for further editing of your background pictures or the selected menu elements.
Apply to all objects: Applies the properties of the selected button to all
remaining buttons.
New menu entries may also be added or undesired entries may be removed.

Adds a new menu entry.

Removes the selected menu entry.

Tip: If you would simply like to deactivate unused menu entries, this may be done via the
navigation.

Jump to linked page: To test the targets of menu entries, select the desired
menu entry and click the button.

Menu entry properties

Double clicking the preview picture or a menu entry opens an editor for you to adjust the
preview picture or menu entry.

Menu text
In the text input field, you can enter any text to match the chosen menu entry.

243 / 313
 'Burn' interface

Set the vertical direction of the text (upwards, centered or downward).

Set the horizontal direction of the text (left, centered or right).
Font size: Set the height of the text in points.
Font color: Define the foreground color of the text.
Font: Here you can set which font and which style (bold, italic, etc.) should be used.
Border: Here you can set a colored border for your text. You can choose the color from
the color field. The size of the border is set in pixels.
Shadow: For setting the color and size of the shadow that will appear underneath the
text.
3D effect: If you would like to make your text appear three-dimensional, you can set the
width, height and color of the 3D effect.
Apply to all: All settings are applied to all entries in the current menu apart from the
text.

Menu image:
Use frame from movie: Use the fader to set which frame should be used in the video as
a preview picture. The numerical input fields are sorted as follows:
Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames.
Use different graphic: Here you can also load your own bitmaps to be used as menu
pictures.
Note: It may be the case that there are no menu pictures in some menu templates. That
means changing the menu picture won't have any noticeable effect.

Action at the end of the film

Here, you can enter which action should be carried out once the film has finished playing.
The following options are available:
l Stop playback: This option depends on the DVD player being used. Most DVD
players show the DVD player's own menu (or background picture) after playback.
l Jump to movie menu/chapter menu: Jumps back to the previously shown menu.
Tip: If one of these two options is not available, please check which menu mode is set.

l Jump to next movie: The next movie will be played without any additional action.

244 / 313
 'Burn' interface

l Play movie as endless loop: Any movie may be burned onto a disc as a loop. This
means that the movie will be played as a endless loop until the next menu entry is
accessed using the remote control or playback is stopped. This way, you can
transform your TV into an aquarium, a train journey, a fireplace or anything that
you could watch over and over again.
Note: This option only functions for DVDs, Mini DVDs, or Blu-ray Discs.

Edit your own menu entries

There is another view in this dialog to edit menu entries you have created. Menu links
can be edited here. This makes it possible to link a menu entry with a certain action,
menu page, or a certain position in the movie.
No link: The menu item cannot be selected and has no other function than showing the
menu text.
Link to page in current menu: Jumps to a a menu page in the current movie or chapter
menu in the current film.
Link to another menu: Opens another movie or chapter menu.
Link to chapter in a movie: If this option is selected, enter the movie and chapter
marker where playback should start.
Note: For DVDs, only chapters within the current movie may be jumped to.

Link to movie start: The selected movie is played from the beginning.

Burn Wizard
Click "Burn" to open the dialog for creating DVDs, Blu-ray Discs, AVCHD and other video
media including a menu.

Select what kind of disc you would like to create.

245 / 313
 'Burn' interface

Note: If you want to watch a project with your movies on an HD TV but only a DVD
player is connected, you will have to burn a DVD.

Burn dialog for DVD player

Here you can select your burner, the type of disc, the encoder settings. MPEG-2 is used
for DVDs. Blu-ray discs also use MPEG-2, and higher bitrates are employed in order to
reach the higher HD resolutions. AVCHD discs use a much more complex MPEG-
4/H.264 codec, which is documented in detail in the "MPEG-4 encoder settings section
of the PDF manual and in Help (F1 key).

To burn a disc, follow these steps:

l Set up burner and burn speed: If you have multiple burners installed, you can
select which device you wish to use in this menu.
l Encoder settings: Use the "Encoder settings" button to access the selection dialog
to specify settings for the MPEG encoder (memory requirements, quality, and
duration of the MPEG conversion). "Advanced settings" accesses a dialog featuring
additional options. Here you can adjust all the fine settings of the MPEG encoder.
l Burning disc/starting video encoding: The button "Burn disc" starts the disc
burning process. Every time you burn and every time a simulation is carried out, the
disc project is encoded. Please note that the MPEG file is not deleted from the hard
disk after the burn process has finished. Depending on the length of the project,
encoding and burning may take some time. The time remaining can be seen in the
dialog.
The simplest way to create an ISO image is to select "Image Recorder" under "Burner".
When starting the "Burning process", you have to specify a name for the image file you
wish to create.

Options
Simulate first: If you are not sure about the write speed or memory requirements, you
can simulate the write process before burning.
Activate buffer underrun protection: Many disc drives support technology that
prevents the dreaded "buffer underrun". Use this option to activate this protective
feature and burn your files at higher speeds without risking making a coaster out of your
blank disc.
Completely format DVD/CD-RW media: This option reformats the RW media and
deletes all existing file material.

246 / 313
 'Burn' interface

Shutdown computer after burning: Activate this option to automatically turn off the
computer after encoding and burning has been completed. You could, for instance, start
the encoding and burning process in the evening, and then you don't have to wait for the
process to finish to switch off your computer.
Burn standard video DVD onto same disc: You can use this option with a WMV HD
disc to burn an additional normal DVD video. This ensures that your discs can also be
played back on standalone DVD players. See Multi disc.
Activate the burner's defect management option: If a certain section of the disc is
defective, this will be recognized by the burner and labeled. No content will be saved
there as a result.
Check data after burning disc: The finished disc will be checked for any mistakes after
burning.
CD/DVD title: This is the title of the DVD which is displayed as the disc name on the PC.
The disc project name is displayed here by default.

Disk space
Disc type Storage media Menu quality Length (optimal quality)
DVD DVD Yes *** 98 minutes

Blu-ray Disc Blu-ray Disc Yes ***** 110 minutes

AVCHD DVD/Blu-ray Disc Yes ***** 30 min./DVD
160 min./Blu-ray Disc

Note: The display time for some DVD players can be determined in this menu. The
amount of image material that can be put onto a CD or DVD depends on the sizes of the
files.

It is hard to make necessary space for reliable data, especially with the MPEG 2 encoder.
If the “variable bit rate” of the MPEG-2 encoder is activated, encoding will occur
according to the movements in the picture. The required memory depends on the film
material; an action film would need more memory than a drama, for instance.
In the MAGIX VIDEO PRO X burn dialog there is a display of remaining capacity, which
estimates directly how much space remains on the selected disc type with current
settings. As soon as you change Encoder settings, the capacity display will be updated.
Tip: The capacity display is only an estimate. For this reason, always make sure that you
never completely fill the disc space. Instead, leave a buffer in case the files end up being
larger than the provided estimate.

247 / 313
 'Burn' interface

If you cannot save your disc project on a single blank CD, you will have to divide it up
into various parts.

Separate project onto multiple discs

Automatically: If the disc project requires more memory than is available on the disc, a
dialog will appear before burning asking whether the disc project should be automatically
segmented for multiple discs. Confirm this by clicking “Yes”. The disc project will then be
automatically divided into individual disc projects and burned sequentially onto multiple
discs. This is the easiest method as everything is automatic and all you have to do is insert
a new blank CD when required.
Manual
Case 1: If several movies do not fit on a single disc:
In this case, switch back to the “Edit” interface and delete as many movies as necessary
until the remaining movies fit onto the disc. You can create a new disc project and load
and burn the other movies afterwards.
Case 2: If a long movie doesn’t fit on a disc:
In this case, the movie has to be split into two or more parts that will be burned
separately to disc.
l Switch back to the "Edit" view and place the playback marker to the position where
you want to divide the movie. In the "Edit" menu, select "Cut -> Separate movie".
l All passages behind the playback marker will be removed from the overly long
movie and made into a separate movie. Both movies can be controlled in the movie
tab in the project window. Save both of them separately to your hard drive (“File >
Manage project > Export movie file” menu option, for example, as “Part 1” and “Part
2”).
l Remove one of the two movies (for example, "Part 2") from the disc project ("File" >
"Manage project" -> "Remove movie from project" menu option).
l Switch to the "Burn" interface and burn the first film ("Part 1") to CD or DVD.
l Create a new disc project (“New” button), switch to the “Edit” view and load it into
the second film (“Part 2”).
l Switch to the "Burn" interface and burn the second movie to ("Part 2") CD or DVD.

Encoder settings
Use the “Encoder settings...” button to access the selection dialog to specify the
properties of the MPEG encoder (memory requirements, quality, and duration of the
MPEG conversion)

248 / 313
 'Burn' interface

Preset: This features useful presets for the selected disc type. Here are several sample
DVD presets:

Longplay DVD with extra-long playing time. The bit rate is reduced, which
DVD Video compromises image quality.
Longplay DVD with extra-long playing time for music. The bit rate for the
music DVD soundtrack remains at the highest quality level.
Standard Normal DVD
DVD
Widescreen Normal DVD in 16:9 widescreen format
DVD

Note: For all settings, you can choose NTSC (USA and Japan) or PAL (Europe).

Bit rate: The bit rate determines the memory requirement of the completed video. The
greater the bit rate, the larger the file, and the shorter the maximum playing time of the
movie that fits on a disc.
Adjust bit rate: The expected file size of the finished video is estimated, depending on
the set bit rate. If the movie does not fit onto the disc, the bit rate is corrected
accordingly.
Quality: Specifies the quality of the encoding process. The higher the quality, the better
the finished video will look; however, encoding will take considerably longer.
Smart rendering: With Smart Rendering you can considerably reduce the encoding
processing strain for MPEG files. During the production of MPEG files, only those parts
of the movie that were changed in the program are re-encoded. Please note: The MPEG
files contained in the movie must have the same format, i.e. the bit rates (variable or
constant), audio formats, image resolutions and video formats must match.
Anti-interlace filter: This option should only be activated for playback on a TV screen,
since it is intended to reduce line flickering.
Calculate effects on your GPU: To accelerate the export, video effects can be
calculated on the graphics card. At this time this applies to brightness, gamma, contrast,
color, saturation, image size, cropping and position effects as well as various fades and
mixes. Please note that external effect plugins and elaborate artistic effects must be
processed on the CPU and for this reason using this function will not yield any speed
advantage.
Note: This function is specifically optimized for NVIDIA graphics cards. You can, however,
experience acceleration with other types of graphics cards, too.

249 / 313
 'Burn' interface

3D mode: In case your project features 3D material that has been edited with Stereo 3D,
a mode may be selected here for burning the material to disc. 3D is switched off by
default.
To return to the standard settings, press the Reset button.
The "Advanced" button opens the "Advanced settings" dialog. Here you can adjust all
the fine settings of the MPEG encoder. Read more about the "MPEG-1/2 encoder
settings" and "MPEG-4 encoder settings".

Create label and CD cover

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X contains an easy-to-use print tool.

This can be used to design and print track listings, CD covers, CD booklets, and circular
CD labels. You can find additional information in internal program help opened using F1.

Edit DVD menus with Xara Designer Pro X or Adobe

Photoshop
Besides the option of editing the menu template directly in the preview, menu templates
may also be exported as a Photoshop file (*.psd) and edited in an external graphics
program. This provides complete control over the appearance of menus including
complex text effects and the design of highlights.

Export menu
The transfer of the menu templates to the graphics program takes place in one of two
ways:
If a complex, longer edit is required or if you have created a menu without a template,
then use the PSD import/export function in the menu editing functions. Next, open the
PSD file in the graphics program of your choice.
For smaller changes, you can also shorten this process: click the external editor in the
Disc options for Design page. A temporary PSD file will be added and opened in the
program that has been selected in the program settings as the menu editor. After editing
has been completed and saved in this external program, the temporary PSD file will be
imported again and the menu page will be updated immediately.

250 / 313
 'Burn' interface

Menu text with external menu editing

Menu elements are transferred as a bitmap during PSD export as well as during import of
the edited PSD. This also applies to the text displayed in the menu. This text may also
normally be changed in the "Menu entry properties" dialog. The menu texts are adjusted
if movies or chapters are added or removed.
The PSD contains these texts as a bitmap and cannot be changed. During re-importing,
the bitmaps replace the original text entries.
It is important that no additional movies or chapters are added to the menu. Otherwise
the preview images, that have also changed along with the menu structure will no longer
match the bitmap texts, because the bitmap texts will not adjust to the changed
conditions in the menu structure.

We recommend editing the text entries last of all, since no more changes should be
necessary at this point.
If changes are required nevertheless, then proceed as follows:
Restore the "correct" chapters or movie names by resetting the font size in the dialog
"Menu entry properties" to the default value. Two texts will be displayed; the incorrect
bitmap and the correct one.
Export the menu template as a PSD again.
Delete the incorrect bitmap object in the corresponding layer and re-import the PSD.
The menu text may also be added from the start via an external graphics editing program
only (in order to take advantage of the additional options provided). If doing so, delete
the corresponding bitmap objects in the PSD after export and replace these with your
own text objects.

Structure of a PSD file

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X produces a PSD file during export that contains a layer group for
each object of the menu template. This uses a naming scheme that enables assignment of
the objects in the file to their contents. Individual layers feature mathematical signs that
indicate their function.

Characters for layer groups

(+-) or (+) Play button/start film

(++) Chapter menu button

251 / 313
 'Burn' interface

(x>) Next page

(x<) Previous page
(+^) Root menu button (jump back from chapter menu)
(+*) Menu title
(++) Layer group is ignored

252 / 313
 Export movie, Menu

Export movie, Menu

-> Keyboard shortcut
A movie may be exported in different video formats via "File -> Export movie". The
options available vary according to the selected format.
Presets: These are typical settings for the selected format for the most important
applications.
l Clicking on Save will save your export settings.
l Clicking on Delete will remove these from the list.
Export settings: You can specify general export parameters like resolution, aspect ratio
and frame rate. Select the most frequently used values from the list fields; to set your
own values click on the "..." button. The Advanced button opens the specific settings for
the selected video format. File enables you to export your file to another folder than the
default. The option Overwrite file without confirmation option allows you to execute
multiple exports in the same file.
For formats that support deep color, the color subsampling scheme and bits per color
channel are also displayed. In some cases, these may also be variable, if this is supported.
Color space: This will select a color space standard, which affects the playback of the file.
BT.709 (also known as Rec.709) is the current standard and set as default. Change this
setting as necessary if you want the video to comply with other standards and ensure
more accurate color display.

Other
l Export selected range only
l Apply anti-interlace filter (suppresses flickering)
l Shut down PC after successful export
l Calculate video effects on GPU
Output after export: Some formats allow special playback options (e.g. DV-AVI on the
camera or WMV export with output via Bluetooth to your mobile phone).
Note: Burning a disc takes place on the "Burn" screen. Read more on this in the chapter
"Burning a disc".

Video as AVI
When exporting to AVI video you can set and configure the size and frame rate of the
AVI video and the compression codec for audio (audio compression) and video (Codec).
Please also see the general information provided on AVI video formats.

253 / 313
 Export movie, Menu

Video as DV-AVI...
This option exports the video as a DV encoded AVI. The project can be easily transferred
to a connected camera using a FireWire interface.
The dialog will provide further information on all available options. You can access it via
Advanced in the export dialog. You will also be asked for which video standard you want
to export the DV data – PAL (Europe) or NTSC (USA).

Video as MPEG video

MPEG stands for "Motion Picture Experts Group" and is a high-performance compression
format for audio and video files. We recommend finding a fitting preset from the list first,
since there are many various devices and applications for this format. You will also find
intra-frame presets (starting with "Intra422") for video playback in professional studio
environments.
Details on the settings of the MPEG encoder can be found here.

Video as MAGIX video

Exports the project in MAGIX video format.
This format is used for video recording by MAGIX VIDEO PRO X video software and is
optimized for digitally editing high quality video material.

Uncompressed movie...
When exporting an uncompressed AVI video file you can adjust the size and frame rate
of the AVI video you wish to create. The video material will not be compressed by a
codec.
Note This will create very large files.

Video as MotionJPEG AVI

Opens the export dialog for AVI video in Motion JPEG format. This format is supported
by digital picture frames, for example.

Video as sequence of frames...

This option exports the video as a series of individual images in bitmap format. This
means: A graphic file will be created for each from of the video. The number of images

254 / 313
 Export movie, Menu

can be set in the export dialog in "Frame Rate".

Video as Windows Media

Exports the project in Window Media Format. This is a universal audio/video format from
Microsoft. Accordingly, the settings options in the "Advanced" dialog are very complex.
Manual configuration
Audio/video codec: Various codecs corresponding to the various Windows Media
versions (7, 8, 9) are possible. Should compatibility problems arise on playback, try an
older codec with a lower version number.
Bit rate mode: Constant and variable bit rates are possible, most devices and streaming
applications require constant bit rates. For VBR two pass modes the movie is compressed
in two passes in order to optimally use the bandwidth for highly-compressed movies for
the Internet.
Bit rate/quality/audio format: The bit rate is decisive in defining the display/audio
quality. The higher this is set, the better the videos will look and the larger the files and
the required encoding time will be. For variable bit rates, the bit rate is adapted
dynamically to the requirements of the corresponding picture or sound material. Either
the quality value may be set between 1-100 or, for two-pass encoding, an average or
maximum bit rate. For audio, the bit rate is set additionally by the audio format.
Import: For the most common applications (other than for playback on mobile devices,
for which you should use the supplied presets) like Internet streaming, Microsoft
provides diverse system profiles to choose from. If you have the Windows Media
Encoder 9 installed, which is available from Microsoft as a free download, you can edit
the profiles or create your own. These may be loaded by pressing the "Import" button.
"Clip info" enables the title and artist names, copyright details, and descriptions to be
entered.

Video as MPEG-4 video

MPEG-4 is actually a collection of highly efficient codecs for video and audio based on
the MPEG standard. Compared to MPEG-2, the same quality can be achieved with
smaller file size.
Recommendation: Check the presets that the program offers to find the right preset for
each application and the right playback device. These presets are optimized for typical
applications.
Advanced users can make specific adjustments using the advanced settings. More on
MPEG-4-Encoder can be found here.

255 / 313
 Export movie, Menu

In the presets there are also various 4K presets for exporting very high resolution
material.

Video as HEVC...
HEVC is the successor format to MPEG-4. HEVC allows for the same image quality
across file sizes, even when smaller file sizes are used. The improved image quality can be
clearly seen, especially at lower bitrates. More on this topic can be found here.

Audio as MP3
Note: MP3 export requires Windows Media Player version 10 and up.
The MP3 encoder cannot be used as a codec for the AVI audio file audio tracks.

Options
Set the format and the compression of the audio file here.
Bit rate: The "Bit rate" selection specifies the level of compression: The higher the bit
rate, the higher the quality of the exported audio file. On the other hand, the bit rate
determines the final file size: The smaller the bit rate, the smaller the files.
Mono/Stereo: Most mobile devices have only one loudspeaker. To save on memory, you
can export in mono for these devices.
Normalize: This function should always be activated. It guarantees that the music is not
too loud/overmodulated or too quiet.
Transfer format:
Specify here whether the created file should be transferred via device connected via
Bluetooth or via email.

Audio as WAV
The movie's audio track is exported in the wave (*.wav) audio format.

Export as transition...
The movie is exported as an alpha fade in the MXV format. The brightness value of the
movie depends on how the fade functions. The option Export the selected range only
also specifies that only a small part specified beforehand via the in and out points will be
exported.
If you do not change the save location, you will locate the saved fade in the Media Pool
under Fades -> Standard.

256 / 313
 Export movie, Menu

Single frame as BMP file...

Exports the image located at the playback marker and displayed in the video monitor as a
bitmap (*.BMP) file.

Single frame as JPG

Exports the image located at the playback marker and displayed in the video monitor as a
JPEG (*.JPG) file.

Single frame as a PNG file

Exports the image located at the playback marker and displayed in the program monitor
as a PNG (*.png) file.

257 / 313
 Shortcut

Shortcut
Playback functions
Start / Stop Spacebar
Increase playback speed in stages L
Shift + L
Stop playback (playback marker is stopped at the K
current position)
Reverse playback or rewind in stages J
Shift + J
Speed up fast forward Shift + right arrow (hold
down keys)
Speed up rewind Shift + left arrow (hold down
keys)
Restart beginning at playback marker Backspace

Playback marker back to the beginning Home

Playback marker to end End
1 frame back Left arrow
1 frame forwards Right arrow
5 frames back Ctrl + Left arrow key
5 frames forward Ctrl + Right arrow key
Set project marker Ctrl + Enter key
Play from range start to range end #
Playback at current frame +
Activate smooth playback for preview P

Scrolling and zooming

To scroll and zoom in the project window it is recommended to work with keyboard
shortcuts + the mouse wheel.

258 / 313
 Shortcut

The following keyboard shortcuts are available:

l Mouse wheel: Horizontal scrolling
l Alt + Mouse wheel: Vertical scrolling
l Ctrl + Mouse wheel: Horizontal zoom
l Shift + Mouse wheel: Vertical zoom (all tracks are magnified)
l Ctrl + Alt + Mouse wheel: Move section

Monitors
Program monitor
Fullscreen video monitor Alt + Enter key

Other resolution Alt+G

Adjust video monitor to movie settings Ctrl + G
Adjust video monitor to selected video Ctrl + Shift + G
Anaglyph display Ctrl+.
Row interlaced (left image first) ALT

Standard 2D .
Side-by-side display Shift +
Source monitor
Fullscreen video monitor Alt + Enter key
Other resolution Alt+G
Display source image only Shift
Comparison image: Selected object without effects Alt + Shift + ,
Comparison image: Selected object ALT
Comparison image: Forerunner of selected object ,
Comparison image: Successor of selected object Ctrl + Shift + -
Comparison image: Select object Ctrl+,

259 / 313
 Shortcut

Project window view

Zoom in Ctrl +
up
arrow
Ctrl +
mouse
wheel
up
Zoom out Ctrl +
down
arrow
Ctrl +
mouse
wheel
down
Play movie fullscreen Alt +
Enter
key

Show/hide movie overview in the video monitor Shift +

A
Optimize movie view Ctrl + F
Zoom 1 frame / 5 frames Alt +
1/2
Zoom 1s / 10s / 1min Alt +
3/4/5
Zoom 10 min Ctrl +
Alt + 6
Zoom to selected range Alt+F
Zoom to complete movie length F
Preview rendering Ctrl+R

260 / 313
 Shortcut

Move view and start marker

To next object edge Alt + W
To previous object edge Alt + Q
To movie start Home
To movie end End
To beginning of range Ctrl + Home
To end of range Ctrl+End
Scroll left by page Page up

Scroll right by page Page down

To scroll grid unit to left Ctrl+Pg Up
To scroll grid unit to right Ctrl+Pg Dn
To next project marker Ctrl + Shift + PgDn
To previous project marker Ctrl + Shift + Page up

To next snap marker Ctrl+Alt+Pg Dn

To previous snap marker Ctrl+Alt+Pg Up
To next scene marker Shift + Page down
To previous scene marker Shift + Page up
To next chapter marker Alt+Pg Dn
To previous chapter marker Alt+Pg Up
Go to right marker W
Go to left marker Q
To next empty range <
To previous empty range Shift + <
To next selected object Shift + W
To previously selected object Shift + Q

261 / 313
 Shortcut

Select next object Ctrl + W

Select previous object Ctrl + Q

Mouse modes
Mouse mode for single objects 6
All tracks mouse mode 7
Single track mouse mode 8
Curve mode 9

Object stretch mode 0

Preview audio objects Alt + 6
Context help Alt + F1

Mouse functions with modifier keys

Note: If the position of the object end is moved, the effect on the following object
depends on the selected mouse mode.

Move object only in the tracks, position remains Shift + hold mouse and drag
the same up/down
Move object content and object end, object start Alt + hold mouse and drag to the
remains the same right/left
Move the content of the trimmed object ("roll" Alt + Shift + hold mouse and drag
the content by the object) to the right/left

Insert modes
Automatic 1
Single track ripple 2
Multitrack ripple 3
Swap 4

262 / 313
 Shortcut

Overwrite 5

Context menu
The context menu includes familiar functions from the menus as well as the following
additional functions:

Set audio/video offset Alt + O

Object properties Ctrl + E
Audio and waveform display
Create waveform display Shift + E

Video/Audio on one track Ctrl+U

Video/Audio on separate tracks Ctrl + H

File menu
New project Ctrl + N

Open project Ctrl + O

Save project Ctrl + S
Save project as... Shift + S
Project folder > Clean up project folder Alt + Shift + X
Record audio / images / video... R
Export to device... H
Batch conversion... S
Load backup project Ctrl + Shift + O
Cleaning Wizard Ctrl + Shift + Y
Close Alt + F4

Manage project

Add a new empty movie Ctrl + Alt + N

263 / 313
 Shortcut

Remove movie from project Ctrl + F4

Import EDL (edit list) Ctrl+D
Export MAGIX movie file Ctrl + Alt + L
Export EDL (edit list) Alt + D

Export movie

Export as AVI Ctrl + Alt + A

Export as DV AVI Ctrl + Alt + D
Export movie as an MPEG Ctrl + Alt + P

Video as MAGIX video Ctrl + Alt + M

Uncompressed movie Ctrl + Alt + U
Video as Motion JPEG AVI... Ctrl + Alt + O
Video as sequence of frames... Ctrl + Alt + E
Windows Media Export Ctrl + Alt + V

Video as MPEG-4 video Ctrl + Alt + G

Video as HEVC... Ctrl+Alt+I
Audio as WAV Ctrl+Alt+W
Export as transition... Ctrl + Alt + T
Single frame as BMP file... Ctrl + Alt + B
Single frame as JPEG... Ctrl + Alt + J

Backup copy

Copy project and media into folder Alt +

S
Copy movie and media into folder Shift
+R

264 / 313
 Shortcut

Settings

Film E
Program Y
Shortcut Ctrl+ñ+U
Preview rendering Alt + R

“Edit” Menu
Undo Ctrl + Z

Redo Ctrl + Y
Cut objects Ctrl+X
Copy objects Ctrl+C
Paste objects Ctrl + V
Duplicate objects D
Delete objects Del

Select all objects Ctrl+ A

Cut
Cut scene T
Remove scene start Z
Remove scene end U
Remove scene Ctrl + Del
Split movie Alt + Y
Musical editing adjustment Ctrl + Shift + M
Edit range
Cut range Shift + Del; Alt + X
Copy range Alt + C
Delete range Alt + Del

265 / 313
 Shortcut

Insert range Alt + V

Extract range Shift + X
Insert empty space into selected range C
Group objects G
Ungroup objects Shift + G
Wizards
MovieShow Maker Ctrl+M
Soundtrack Maker Ctrl + Shift + S

Combine audio Shift + D

Combine audio and video Shift + M
Start preview rendering Ctrl+R
Markers
Set project markers Ctrl + Enter key
Set snap markers Ctrl + P

Set chapter markers Shift + Enter key

Set chapter markers automatically Alt + Shift + Enter key
Delete chapter markers Ctrl + Shift + Enter key
Delete all chapter markers Ctrl + Alt + Enter key
Set range start I
Set range end O
Jump to range start Shift + I
Jump to range end Shift + O
Select range above blank space X
Search for gaps Ctrl + Shift + C
Mute audio tracks (Multicam) Alt + Shift + M

266 / 313
 Shortcut

"Effects” menu
Movie effect settings... Ctrl + Shift +
H
Video object effects
Scene recognition Shift + Z
Edit with MAGIX Foto Designer Alt + Shift + D
Video effects
Brightness Alt + Shift + H

Contrast Alt + Shift + O

Gamma Alt + Shift + G
Color Alt + Shift + F
Color correction Alt + Shift + C
Chroma key video level Alt + Shift + B
Sharpness Ctrl + Alt + S

Video effects plug-ins Ctrl + Shift +

P
Load video effects Ctrl + -
Save video effects Alt + -
Reset video effects Ctrl + Alt + -
Copy video effects -
Paste video effects Shift + -
View/Animation
Position/Size Alt + Shift + I
Section Alt + Shift + P
Camera/zoom shot Ctrl + Alt + Z
Rotation/Mirror Alt + Shift + R

267 / 313
 Shortcut

Audio object effects

Normalize Alt + N
Decrease in volume Alt + L
Audio cleaning Alt + A
Echo/Reverb Shift + H
Timestretch/resample Ctrl + Shift +
Q
Load audio effects Ctrl + +
Save audio effects Shift + +

Reset audio effects Ctrl + Alt + +

BPM Wizard Alt + Shift + K
Volume curve Ctrl+Shift+V
Title effects
Title editor... Ctrl + T

Load title effects... Alt + T

Save title effects Ctrl + Shift +
T
Effects library
Audio and video effects Alt + Shift + E
Transition effects Ctrl + Shift +
B
Title effects Alt + Shift + L

Window menu
Reset window arrangement F9
Edit trimmer N
Object trimmer Shift + N

268 / 313
 Shortcut

Mixer M
Master audio effect rack B
Program monitor Shift + V
Media Pool Shift + P
Project folder Shift + B
Activate next window Ctrl+Tab
Movie overview Shift + A
Optimize movie view Ctrl + F

Zoom horizontal
Zoom in Ctrl + Up
Zoom out Ctrl + Down
Zoom 1/5 frame(s) Alt + 1/2
Zoom 1/10 second(s) Alt + 3/4
Zoom 1 minute Alt + 5

Zoom 10 minutes Ctrl + Alt + 6

Zoom to selected range Alt+F
Zoom to complete movie length F
Zoom vertical
Zoom in Ctrl + Shift + Page up
Zoom out Ctrl + Shift + Page down

Help Menu
Help F1
Context help Alt + F1
Show tooltips Ctrl + Shift + F1
About MAGIX VIDEO PRO X Alt + Shift + F1

269 / 313
 Shortcut

Edit keyboard shortcuts

You can open the keyboard shortcut dialog via File > Settings > Shortcuts. In this dialog
you can specify keyboard shortcuts for all MAGIX VIDEO PRO X menu functions. This
allows you to adapt existing shortcuts to your requirements or to add new ones.
The settings are automatically saved in a file upon closing the program, i.e. they will be
available the next time the program is used.
The complete menu tree of MAGIX VIDEO PRO X is displayed in the dialog.

Add keyboard shortcut

To add a keyboard shortcut, follow these steps:
l Look for the required menu item and select it with click. The currently selected
menu item will be displayed under Current menu item.
l Then, click on the New keyboard shortcut field.
l Type in the keyboard shortcut. You can also use combinations of any key with
"Shift", "Alt", and "Ctrl".
l Then click on Assign keyboard shortcut. If the shortcut has already been assigned,
a warning will display.
Note: Please do not use the spacebar, ESC or Insert key (0 in the number block), as the
functions of these keys are permanently implemented in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X and can
not be changed.

Keyboard shortcut list

Reset: Activates all preset shortcuts again.
Load: Previously saved shortcuts are loaded and activated again.
Tip: MAGIX VIDEO PRO X offers additional presets for those switching over from other
programs. These settings make it much easier to switch to MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.

If you have used a version of MAGIX Video Pro before and want to use the same
keyboard shortcuts, load Video_Pro_X.ssc for this version.
Warning: The current settings will be overwritten during loading. Save your current
keyboard shortcuts in advance if you would like to keep them.

Save: The current keyboard shortcuts can be saved after naming the file.
List: This button opens a window where a complete list of current keyboard shortcuts
appears. You can click on Copy to copy the list to the Windows clipboard for editing and
printing using a text editor.

270 / 313
 Menus

Menus
File menu
-> Keyboard shortcut

New Project Wizard

Creates a new MAGIX VIDEO PRO X project. The start dialog will also open.

Open
With this option you can load a project or a media file. Please note that all media files
associated with it must be loaded along with a project.
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X will search for all used sounds and video files in the folders in which
they were located when the move was saved.

Recently opened projects

This feature provides a selection of recently opened projects.

Save project
The current disc project is saved with the name displayed in the project window. If you
have not specified a name for your project yet, a dialog will open for you to do so.

Save project as...

A dialog opens where you can specify the path and name of the video, under which it is
to be saved.

Manage project
Add a new empty movie: Use this option to create a new movie for your recordings and
imported files. Since a film is normally already opened, you will have to decide whether
the movie should be inserted into the existing project or if a new project should be
created.
Merge movies: Using this function you can attach a movie to an opened one. This is then
attached to the end of the movie and automatically takes on the original movie's settings.

271 / 313
 Menus

Remove movie from project: With this option you can remove the current movie from
the project. However, it is still available on the hard drive and can be loaded again
anytime.
Rename: You can enter a name for your movie here.
Import movie file:
Import a MAGIX movie file (*.mvd)
Use this option to load a movie into your disc project. Please note that all media files
associated with it must be accessible. MAGIX VIDEO PRO X will search for all used sounds
and video files in the folders in which they were located when the movie was saved.
Import an EDL (Edit Decision List):
Create an edit decision list in Samplitude EDL format and import it into MAGIX VIDEO 
PRO X for additional editing. It is important in this case that the folder structure remains
unchanged. During importing into MAGIX VIDEO PRO X, the file locations must match the
place where they were when the cut list was created using MAGIX Samplitude/Sequoia.
l If an empty project is opened, the complete EDL file will be imported.
l If the tracks are muted before importing the EDL file, then they will not be
removed.
l If there are already objects in the project, then you will be asked the files should
imported into the project or if a new project should be created for them.
Export movie file:
Export a MAGIX movie file (*.mvd)
A dialog will open to enter a file name for the movie to be exported. The movie may then
be imported into other projects again.
Note: The movie file (*.mvd) contains all information about the used media files, cuts,
effects, and titles, but not the picture and sound material itself. This is always contained
in the recorded or imported media files, which remains unchanged during editing with
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X. In order to save a movie in its own folder, e.g. for use on another
PC, use the function Copy film and media to folder under "File > Backups".

Export an EDL (Edit Decision List):

Create EDL files for additional editing in other programs, e.g. MAGIX Samplitude or
Sequoia.
Use the check boxes to select whether video and/or audio should be exported. As
required, a selection may be made whether individual tracks should be rendered or
referenced as original files via EDL. Video rendering takes place in the DV-AVI format,
and audio rendering as WAV stereo. For Surround projects, 6 mono files will be rendered.

272 / 313
 Menus

An export directory can be defined within the selection dialog. The EDL file and the
rendered files will be stored there as required.
Check boxes may be used to select whether the EDL file should be loaded directly into
Sequoia (if present). The program will then be either started or the file will be directly
opened within the running application automatically. The user can set the Sequoia path in
the input mask.

Export movie
This provides all export formats supported by MAGIX VIDEO PRO X that aren't covered
by burning. For more information, please see the section Export movie.

Project folder
Import media files into project folder: The files selected in the Media Pool will be
imported into the project folder.
Clean up project folder: Unused media files will be removed from the project file.
Note: This function applies to the entire project.

Record audio / images / video

A selection window for the Recording will open to choose the desired recording type.
This may also be accessed via the "Audio or video recording" button in the transport
controls.

Import Audio CD track(s)

A CD track may be imported via drag & drop from the Media Pool just like a normal file. If
this convenient method fails for some reason, then this menu command may be accessed
via the CD manager to insert tracks from audio CDs directly into the project. More about
this is available in the section "Import audio CD".

Export to device
Here, you can transfer your finished video to external devices. Select the target device
from the list.
Export to mobile devices:
Most devices require certain format settings (file format, resolution, bit rate, picture
repeat rate, etc.) to be able to play a video.

273 / 313
 Menus

The menu is divided into various device classes to make choosing your device easier. The
last three selections are saved as favorites in the top part of the device list if you have
more than one device or want to present your movies to your friends.
If your device is listed here, you don't have to worry about the format settings, as the
necessary settings of the export dialog are automatically customized to the target device.
Simply select your device and click "OK".
Output DV/HDV:
l For digital output please select "File" > "Output audio/video" and then select
Camcorder in the device menu. For DV cameras you can select the device DV 
camera for HDV camcorder HDV1 or HDV 2 Camcorder.
By clicking on Settings, you can open the respective export settings dialog (DV-AVI
export for DV camcorder, MPEG export for HDV camcorder). For most applications you
should use the settings defined here. Advanced takes you to the DV export settings.
l Now connect your camera and follow the displayed instructions.
If you want to export a rendered (already edited) movie to DV, there’s no need to render
it again. Instead simply activate the “Play own DV file” option and select your DV video
from the “My audio video” directory.
Tip: Digital cameras that can digitally record via a PC connection are usually more
expensive. You may be able to reduce your purchase costs considerably by buying a
digital camera that cannot transfer digitally and have the function activated by a camera
specialist. You should enquire about this option before making your purchase.

DV export settings
PAL/NTSC: PAL is used in Europe; the United States, Canada, and Japan use
NTSC.PAL/NTSC: PAL is used in Europe; the United States, Canada, and Japan use
NTSC. This option usually does not require changing.
Render edited scenes only: Non-edited original files are simply copied into a completed
DV AVI. Normally you have to decompress the DV data, add the set effect calculations
and recompress it. If no effect processing is pending these steps may not be necessary.
This option can be permanently activated.
Use references to original files: Unprocessed original files are played back directly,
effects are rendered in real time. Only use this option for finished films without effects or
edits because processing real time effect with DV files in their original resolution uses a
lot of processing power. Errors can occur during playback due to the increased strain.
Export after rendering: If you want to render your film but not export it then deactivate
this option. You can export your film at a later date by selecting the "Export own DV file"
option from the export dialog.
My device is not in the list. What can I do?

274 / 313
 Menus

User-defined:
If your device does not appear in the list, you can set up the export settings manually.
You only have to do this once as these settings can be saved as a preset.
Read the Instruction manual of your mobile device to find out which file format is
required. If your device supports multiple formats, you can experiment around with
which format gives you the best results.
Specify the file format by opening the target device's menu and selecting "User-defined"
-> "Video" -> "...Format". If you click on "Export", you arrive at the Export dialog of the
selected file format where you can set all the advanced settings.
For details on these settings, please consult your device manual. Explanations for the
file formats' settings can be found in the Overview of the device classes chapter, for the
special settings of the export dialogs see "Export movie" in the File menu chapter.
Tip: If the format settings for your device are not accessible, you can try out a different
device from the same manufacturer and, using it as a template, carry out customizations
accordingly.

Tip: If you find working settings, we recommend saving these as a preset for further use.

Batch conversion
This menu item accesses the batch processing function. This quickly and efficiently
converts multiple files, movies, or projects into various video formats.

Vimeo
Upload current movie as video: Once you login to Vimeo, the upload dialog will open.
Enter the title, description, and keywords and select whether you want your film to be
public or private. "OK" uploads the current film.
Upload selected media in Media Pool: Once you login to Vimeo, the upload dialog will
open. Enter the title, description, and keywords and select whether you want your media
to be public or private. "OK" uploads the selected media.

Online
Producer Planet: Producer Planet is the online store for creative artists in the area of
multimedia. As well as a wide range of content from MAGIX, such as Soundpools, virtual
instruments, sound FX, stock footage, video plug-ins and LUTs, Producer Planet enables
audio engineers, beat producers, cutters and ambitious independent filmmakers to access
content from both established and up-and-coming manufacturers and producers.

275 / 313
 Menus

Youtube / Vimeo: This is a direct connection between MAGIX and various online
communities.
l Upload current movie as video: Uploads the current film to the selected portal or
to the selected community. Enter the data for video into the fields provided, so that
the search function for this portal can also find this video.
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X partially uses the H.264 format for this, which is a component
of the MPEG-4 codec. Since Flash supports this format directly and most
communities and portals use the format, the movie does not need to be re-
rendered on the corresponding server. This avoids loss of quality.
When HD material is uploaded, a resolution of 720p is used for the HD format.
l Upload selected media in Media Pool: Uploads the media selected in the Media
Pool to the corresponding portal or the selective community.
Import media backup: Content (e.g. 3D transitions) which you've bought and
downloaded is stored directly in the folder My files\MAGIX Downloads\Backup. If you
have downloaded iContent from other MAGIX programs, then you can use the command
Import media backup to make them accessible for use in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.
Manage login details: In this dialog you can enter and manage your login details (email
address and password) for all services accessible from MAGIX VIDEO PRO X. This way,
you don't have to log in every time you use the program.

Backup copy
Files must be saved to be able to be easily retrieved in case of a hard drive crash or a
mistake.
For detailed information, see the section about Backups.

Load backup project

This option loads an automatically created project backup. This type of automatic backup
gets the file extension MV_ (underscore). This option is useful in emergencies, e.g. if you
unintentionally saved your changes during editing and wish to return to the previous
version of the movie.

Clean-up wizard
A disc image is created each time you perform the burn process, so the hard drive can
quickly fill up if you burn a lot of discs. The clean-up wizard helps delete projects from
the hard drive, including all of the media files and disc images used. Use this function to
free up disk space for future projects.

276 / 313
 Menus

Warning! If the files you used in the slideshow have also been used in other slideshows
(like trailers, opening music, etc.), then you should make backup copies of these files
beforehand.

For detailed information, see the Cleaning Wizard section.

Tune-ups
Film settings: Opens the Film settings of the currently selected movie.
Program settings: Opens Program settings.
Edit keyboard shortcut: This menu entry opens a dialog for editing keyboard shortcuts.
You can adjust MAGIX VIDEO PRO X to suit your needs.
Proxy and preview rendering: This menu item opens the dialog for the proxy and
preview rendering settings.
Language: Change the language used in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X here. Normally, the
language that is used for installation is set as the program language.
Reset standard program settings: Use this function to reset all program settings you
made in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X to their original settings.

Close
Exits MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.

“Edit” Menu
-> Keyboard shortcut

Undo
This command allows you to undo the last changes made. This way, it's no problem if you
want to try out critical operations. If you don't like the result, you can always revert to
the previous state using "Undo".
Right-clicking the button opens a list of changes made so far, allowing you to undo
several changes made in sequence.
Tip: You can adjust the length of the list to your needs in program settings. A general rule:
The longer the list, the more RAM is used.

Repair
This function undoes the previous "Undo" function.

277 / 313
 Menus

Right-clicking on the arrow next to the button opens a list of changes made so far,
allowing you to restore several undo actions made in sequence.

Empty undo and cache memory

This option deletes the memory for undo commands and clipboard (cache).

Cut objects
This function extracts the marked scene and copies it to the clipboard. You can then use
the "Paste" command to insert it into any movie.

Copy objects
This function copies the selected scene (or the selected object, if you are in the Timeline
mode) to the clipboard. You can then use the "Paste" command to insert it into any
movie.

Insert objects
This command inserts the clipboard material (photo or object) at the current position of
the playback marker.

Duplicate objects
This command duplicates all selected objects. The copies appear beside the original and
can be placed in the correct position using drag & drop.

Deleting objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected object, if you are in the Timeline
mode).

Select all objects

All objects found in the project are selected.

Cutting
Editing functions are also accessible using the toolbar. The last selected function will
appear in the toolbar as a button.
Cut scene: This command cuts a selected scene at the point where the playback marker
is positioned. Two independent objects are created.

278 / 313
 Menus

Remove scene start: This command cuts a scene at the point where the start marker is
positioned, and deletes all material that precedes the start position simultaneously.
Remove scene end: This command cuts a scene at the point where the start marker is
positioned, and deletes all material behind the start position simultaneously.
Remove scene: If you want to cut a scene on track 1 out of a movie in the timeline mode
at a later stage, this option automatically moves objects, titles, and transitions on all
tracks forward so that no gaps are created in the film.
Objects on other tracks which extend into the area of the scene in question will not be
moved automatically; they will remain in their current positions.
Split movie: This command divides the movie into two individual movies at the position
of the playback marker.
The current project window retains the portion that is located in front of the playback
marker. The remaining part will be removed from the current project window and turned
into a new movie. You can open this movie from the "View" menu.

Musical editing adjustment

If you have edited your background music with the beat detection wizard and a musical
tempo was provided, then you can adjust the cuts to change automatically in time with
the beat using this command. All hard cuts (edits without transitions) will be moved to
occur on the musical quarter notes.

Area
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X provides object-based functions as well as "band-oriented" editing
functions. These always refer to the whole project from the first to the last track as well
as to the area between the start and end marker.
Cut: The area between the start and end markers is cut from the current project and
placed on the clipboard. This section can be reinserted elsewhere.
Copy: The area between the start and end markers in the current project is copied to the
Clipboard. This section can be reinserted elsewhere.
Delete: The area between the start and end markers is deleted from the current project
and no longer saved on the clipboard.
Paste: The contents of the clipboard are added into the current project at the position of
the start marker.
Extract: The area between the start and end markers is retained, all the material in front
and behind it are then deleted. Use this option to isolate a specific part of an
arrangement for further individual editing.

279 / 313
 Menus

Insert empty space: An empty section the length of the period between the start and
end marker will be added to the first visible track. The objects following this will be
moved.
Note: This function only applies to the first visible track. Therefore, it is necessary to
scroll through the arranger to bring the track you want up to the line at the top.

Insert still shot: The start of the range is inserted as a still shot over the length of the
range.
Note: This function only applies to the first visible track. Therefore, it is necessary to
scroll through the arranger to bring the track you want up to the line at the top.

Group objects
All selected objects are assigned to a group which may be selected and edited jointly by
clicking the mouse.

Ungroup objects
This command splits an object group into separate objects.

Wizards
Slideshow Maker: The Wizard Slideshow Maker is ideal for converting still images into
moving pictures, adding background music, and effects.
MAGIX Soundtrack Maker: Music tracks that match the mood are generated
automatically by Soundtrack Maker. Even mood changes are possible.
Travel route animation: This menu entry opens the separate MAGIX Travel Maps
program. This enables simple creation of animated travel routes with the help of online
maps.

Combine audio...
This option joins all audio objects in one audio file. Afterwards, the audio material will
only occupy one track and take up hardly any RAM (does however take up space on the
hard drive [ca. 10 MB/min in stereo]). This way you get a clear overview of further
objects and space for them.
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X automatically normalizes the audio file, i.e. the loudest point of the
wave audio object is identical to the highest value of the 16-bit resolution ceiling. This
guarantees the same sound quality, even if you repeat the mix down procedure in the
project window or you combine the mix down file with other wave audio objects again

280 / 313
 Menus

and again. The mix down function is very helpful if you want to go on using the mix down
object.
Tip: To create the final AVI or WAV (or any other multimedia) file, we recommend using
the various option of the submenu "Export movie" option in "File", instead of the
mixdown function.

Combine audio and video...

In addition to the "Combine audio" function (see above), all video objects including
effects, fades, and edits are combined in a single MAGIX video file. If your computer
starts to approach its limits, this enables you to free resources for further editing.

Start preview rendering...

You may also instruct MAGIX VIDEO PRO X to render specific sections that are you are
almost finished editing with. This is especially useful if smooth playback is not possible
due to the applied effects and transitions. The advantage versus the option "Combine
audio and video" is that all of the objects will be maintained in the arrangement. The
rendered material will only be played in the background when the playback marker
reaches the corresponding position. See "Preview rendering".

Remove range(s) for preview rendering...

Removes preview rendering ranges. If multiple sections were defined and the playback
marker is placed over one of these sections, you will be asked whether you would like to
remove only this "Section" or "All".

Markers
More information on the subject can be found in the section "Markers".

Move view
Using these commands, a viewable portion together with the playback marker will be
moved in the timeline. You can quickly skip between different markers (skip, chapter,
scene, ad-marker) and object edges.

Search for gaps

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X enables you to locate gaps between objects where no video
material is located. This hinders unintentional black frames from appearing in your film.
This option is located under "Edit" > "Find gaps". A corresponding dialog will open.

281 / 313
 Menus

Optimize view: Zooms to the selected gap.

Mark section as gap: Spans a section over the selected gap.
Close: The selected settings are applied, but no additional action is taken.

Multicam
By clicking, you will switch to "Multicam Mode". Find out more in "Multicam Editing".

Mute audio tracks (Multicam)

Once you switch to Multicam mode, all audio from the source tracks will be muted. You
will only hear the audio track of the final movie. If you wish to deactivate this function,
remove the check. Now, you can mute the audio tracks manually using the track headers.

"Effects” menu
-> Keyboard shortcut

Movie effect settings...

This menu item accesses the Movie effects settings. The settings affected here apply to
the entire movie.

Video object effects

Scene recognition: Calls up the automatic Scene recognition, which ”cuts up” longer
videos into scenes for storage in the "Takes" directory.
Edit in Photo Designer: Graphics files (BMPs or JPEGs) can be edited retroactively with
an external graphics program within the project window. The selected image file will be
loaded automatically and used in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X in place of the original material
automatically.
Create panorama: Opens the dialog for setting a panorama. Place as many photos in the
correct order as you like, and align brightness and color settings to get the best results.
You should make sure that the photos harmonize at the transitions.
Video effects: Here you can find adjustable effects for video and photo objects. The
effects can be set only after selecting an object in the respective effects dialog. For more
information, please see Video effects.
Movement effects: These are movement effects you can use to animate the frame by
using zoom and camera movements.

282 / 313
 Menus

Movement effect templates: Load templates for movements into the project using drag
& drop.
Section: Places video objects in a particular part of the screen. Find out more under
Video effects.
Stereo3D: Find out more about Stereo3D funktionality in the Stereo3D section.
Background design: Select a color, a picture, or any video on your hard disk, which you
would like to serve as the background for the photo displayed. This function is especially
useful when photos have black bars around them, or if they are reduced in size.
Reset background: Resets the background design settings to default settings.
Use as background: Uses the selected photo and video as the background.
Load video effects: This command enables a saved effects combination to be loaded for
the currently loaded object. If multiple objects are selected, then the effects combination
will be applied to each selected object.
Save video effects: This command saves the current effects combination for each object
separately.
Reset video effects: This option allows you to deactivate all currently used effects. The
material will be reset to the state it was in before you applied the effect.
Copy video effects: Effects settings for an object may be copied to the clipboard to add
them to other objects.
Paste video effects: Video effects may be inserted into the selected object from other
objects. The settings must be copied to the clipboard beforehand to do so.
Apply video effects to all: The current effects settings will be applied to all scenes and
photos in your movie.
Apply video effects to all of the following: The current effects settings will be applied
to all scenes and photos in your movie which lie behind the selected object.

Audio object effects

Normalize (maximum level): The function "Normalize" raises the level of an audio object
to the maximum possible level without clipping the material. This searches for the largest
signal peak in the audio material and raises the level of the object so that this position
matches exactly 0 dB (maximum overdrive).
Normalize (EBU R128): EBU R128 is a transceiver standard that normalizes the audio
signal to -23 LUFS (loudness units relative to the digital full level). Unlike normalizing to
the maximum level, this provides enough upward space for temporarily loud signals. This
is used, for example, by cinema productions and classical recordings.

283 / 313
 Menus

Adjust loudness of selected objects: Regardless of the standard level, the sound levels
of the selected objects are compared with each other with respect to volume. The clicked
object is used as the reference.
Set volume: This function, located in both the effects menu and the context menu,
control the sound volume for individual objects, just like the object handles in the project
window.
Volume reduction: Read more about this in Volume reduction.
Audio leaning: Opens the Audio cleaning dialog.
Echo/Reverb: Read the sections Echo and Reverb for more information.
Timestretch/Resample: Read more about this in Timestretch/Resample.
Load audio effects: This command enables a saved effects combination to be loaded for
the currently loaded object. If multiple objects are selected, then the effects combination
will be applied to each selected object.
Save audio effects: This command saves the current effects combination for each object
separately.
Reset audio effects: This option allows you to deactivate all currently used effects. The
material will be reset to the state it was in before you applied the effect.
BPM Wizard: Read more about this topic in Musical editing adjustment.
Edit wave externally: This opens the audio track or audio object in the included audio
editor MAGIX Music Editor.
Volume curve: You can access the volume here. This is also located in the Media Pool
under "Effects -> Audio effects -> General" and can be animated.

Title effects
Title editor: Opens the title editor.
Load title template: Use this command to load previously saved title effects for the
current object.
Save title template: You can save the current effect combination for each title object
separately and apply it to other title objects later.

Design elements
Picture-in-picture: These are various effects presets for image stacking.
Collages: These work similarly to normal picture-in-picture effects but more objects are
used. Depending on the collage, arrange the selected objects one after the other and
drag the collage onto the first object.

284 / 313
 Menus

Test images: These are professional test images for calibrating your system.
Backgrounds: Here you can find static and animated photo and video backgrounds.
Video backgrounds are capable of being looped, meaning that their length can be
extended by duplication. The special "custom" template opens a color selection dialog
where you can choose the desired color.
Image objects: These are various image objects like black bars, thought bubbles for
cartoons, etc.
You can find additional information in the section "Design elements in Media Pool".

Effects library
Using these menu choices you can control the corresponding folders with the Media
Pool.

"Window" menu
-> Keyboard shortcut

Window arrangement
Along with the Minimal (without source monitor) and Standard, any other combination of
visible windows and arrangement can be saved. These can then be easily switched
between using menu commands.
1. If you want to save a custom window arrangement, click "Window Arrangement > 
Save...".
2. In the dialog that opens, enter a name under which the window arrangement
should be displayed in the menu.
3. In the "Media Pool", you can define whether the main navigation and subnavigation
should be saved along with the alignment.
The first three custom window layouts are automatically assigned the keyboard shortcuts
F10, F11 and F12. By going to "File" > "Settings" > "Keyboard shortcuts..." you can
assign keyboard shortcuts to additional layouts.
l Any custom window layouts you create can be deleted. Simply select the alignment
you want to delete in the dialog that opens after selecting "Window arrangement"
> "Delete.." from the menu, then click on the Delete button.

285 / 313
 Menus

Edit mode
In MAGIX VIDEO PRO X you have a choice of 2 editing modes: The simplified Basic mode
and the Standard mode.

Edit trimmer
Opens the edit trimmer. This allows you to make fine adjustments to the position of the
selected video or image objects and their handles, as well as the transition characteristics
(Transition type, length). More about this is available in the "Editing" section.

Object trimmer
Opens the object trimmer. Calls up the video trimmer, which will help you fine tune the
position and the handles of selected video and image object More about this is available
in the "Editing" section.

Mixer
Opens the "Mixer".

Master Audio Effect Rack

Opens the Master Audio Effect Rack. More information on this is available in the Audio
effects section.

Mastering Suite
Opens the Mastering Suite.

Program monitor
Hides or shows the program monitor.

Source monitor
The source monitor provides an opportunity to preview and edit files in the Media pool,
and these can in turn be dragged into the project folder or the project from the source
monitor.
For the exact options for cutting in the source monitor. Read more about this in the
section "Section markers in the source monitor".

286 / 313
 Menus

Media Pool
This option hides or displays the Media Pool.

Project
Shows or hides the project window.

Project folder
Hides or shows the project folder.

Activate next window

Switch between the different windows (interfaces) of the program.

Movie overview
With this option you can display an overview of the entire arrangement on the program
monitor. It is particularly suitable for long and complex arrangements to prevent you
from losing track. You can view the whole movie and you are, despite this, able to access
the sought object – you can zoom in directly on the program monitor or move around the
clip displayed in the project window.

Optimize movie view

The zoom level is set to 100% so that you can see every object and the entire film.
The start and end markers are set to the beginning or end, so that the entire movie can
be played.

Zoom horizontal
Here you will find a range of functions for adjusting the visible time axis section.

Zoom vertical
The number of simultaneously visible tracks can be changed here. The more tracks that
are visible, the smaller they will appear.

Remove all movies from project

All movies in the open project are removed. If you want to use these movies later with
the current changes like cuts, effects and titles, you can export them by selecting "File" > 

287 / 313
 Menus

"Manage Movie" > "Export". The current movie edits will be saved, but not the source
material. If you delete the source material, your edits can no longer be restored.

"Help" Menu
-> Keyboard shortcut

Help
This command is available at almost every point of this program and opens the program
Help at the corresponding topic. Use this command to get help on any function of
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.

Context help
The mouse cursor will turn into an arrow with a question mark. Click on any button in the
main screen to open program help.

Download manual (PDF)

Downloads the manual in PDF format. An Internet connection is required for this. It
contains all of the important information about the program, as well as the program Help,
which can be accessed by pressing F1.

Display online tutorial videos

Displays tutorial videos on different video editing topics in MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.
Tip: If you are using MAGIX VIDEO PRO X for the first time, we recommend you view the
tutorial videos first. They will give you a quick introduction to the most important topics.

Show tooltips
Tooltips are small information windows that open up automatically if the mouse pointer
stops briefly on a button or some other area. They provide information about the
function of the button. These information boxes can be switched on or off with this
option.

magix.info
Directly from within the program you'll be able to access magix.info, the Multimedia
Community from MAGIX. You'll find answers to all the most frequently asked questions
about MAGIX products and multimedia in general. Were you unable to find a solution to
your particular problem? No problem, just ask the question yourself.

288 / 313
 Menus

Finding the software course

This opens a MAGIX webpage with offers for software courses for MAGIX applications.

Register online
If you are using a trial version of a MAGIX program, you can extend the period of use by
registering the product or purchasing a full version.

Update online
This option connects directly to the MAGIX online update page where you can get the
latest version of your program.

Install extra content

This opens a dialogue where you can install additional Codecs and extra content.

Activating content packs

Use this menu option to activate the additional programs included in the Premium
version. Enter the coupon code in the dialog for the content pack. The add-on software
will be downloaded and installed automatically. In addition, five free downloads will be
added to the Store, which can be used for any Store content.

Deactivate Program
This menu item deactivates MAGIX VIDEO PRO X with immediate effect. After
deactivation, it is possible to immediately install and activate MAGIX VIDEO PRO X on
another computer.

Download local Store content

Downloads all previously purchased and activated Store content and adds it to the
Templates section of the Media Pool.

Delete local Store content...

Deletes all previously downloaded Store content. Deleted content can be downloaded
again at any time.

289 / 313
 Menus

AboutMAGIX VIDEO PRO X

Displays copyright info and version number of MAGIX VIDEO PRO X.

290 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Activating and using codecs

Special encoders/decoders are needed to use and generate various file formats.

Why does it have to be "activated"?

To import (decode) or export (encode) certain video and audio formats you will require a
specific codec to be able to read in and export these formats. As soon as a corresponding
decoder or encoder is needed, MAGIX VIDEO PRO X will notify you and ask you if you
would like to activate it.
The integration of decoders and encoders from third parties usually costs software
developers money. These codecs are therefore added to MAGIX programs via a
voluntary activation, which may be free or require a charge for expensive specialist
codecs. It is therefore possible for MAGIX to provide an optimum price/performance
ratio for your software in the future.

The following codes are automatically activated when needed:

MPEG-2/MPEG-4 basic (standard)
These codes are needed for importing and exporting MPEG-2 and MPEG-4 videos. The
codecs are activated individually and are free.
Use cases:
l MPEG-2: MPEG-2 import and export as well as burning DVDs and Blu-ray discs.
l MPEG-4: MPEG-4 import and export as well as burning AVCHD discs.
If there are file compatibility problems, you can optionally activate and test the following
codec as an alternative to MPEG-4 Basic (default). However, hardware acceleration is not
available using this codec. Activation is fee-based.

Activate MPEG-4 (MainConcept) (fee-based):

1. Open the menu "Help" and select "Install additional programs".
2. Select „MainConcept MPEG-4 codec“.
l MAGIX VIDEO PRO X will check to see if the codec has already been licensed
to another MAGIX software and will use that license if this is the case.
l If the codec has not already been licensed, then the fee-based activation will
continue. The activation dialog will appear.
3. Click on Activate online. Your Internet browser will open.
If you have not already activated MAGIX VIDEO PRO X, a website for registering
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X will open. You will then be forwarded to a website where you
can request the corresponding activation to be carried out.

291 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

4. Enter the requested information and complete the order. Normally you will receive
the activation code within a few minutes. In some cases, this can take longer.
Note: In the event the activation code does not arrive after a longer period of
time, check to make sure the e-mail was not accidentally sent to your spam
folder.
5. Copy the activation code from the email into the input field in the dialog.
6. Click on Activate... . The codec will be activated.
MAGIX VIDEO PRO X checks the registration data, downloads and activates the
codec.
In some cases, MAGIX VIDEO PRO X needs to be closed and restarted in order to
start using the codec.
Note: After successfully activating the MainConcept codec, you need to specify under
Program settings that this is the preferred codec to be used.

MPEG-2 Encoder (Intel)

In the "Advanced Settings", you can make detailed adjustments to the MPEG-2 data flow.
The advanced settings are divided into "Video", "Audio", and "Multiplexer".

Video
Bit Rate Mode: The bit rate indicates how much data is saved in the video per second (at
playback speed). This makes the bit rate the deciding parameter with regard to the file
size and quality of the video to be encoded. A higher bit rate means better quality, but
also a larger file size.
l Constant: The exact value entered in "Average bit rate" is applied which enables
precise calculation of the video size.Constant: The exact value entered in "Average
bit rate" is applied which enables precise calculation of the video size.
l Variable: The value entered in "Average bit rate" is used as an approximate
guideline for the value applied to the video. This means that the size of the video
can only be estimated.
l Constant quantization parameter: This parameter ensures that the video quality
remains the same throughout.
Average bit rate (kbps): The bit rate entered here is used as the average rate applied to
the video. The size of the video to be exported can only be approximated.
Maximum bit rate (kbps): This is the maximum bit rate for the video stream, i.e. the
maximum number of bits the decoder is allowed to transfer per second. This parameter
only takes effect in the "Variable" bit rate mode.

292 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

CPB (Coded Picture Buffer): The entered value specifies the maximum amount of
storage space for an encoded frame. Higher values can improve quality, but might also
cause problems during export. If export is aborted, lower this value. The setting "0"
means that the encoder has determined the disk space.
Maximum GOP length: The maximum GOP length is determined here. High values mean
improved compression. Lower values create stronger security protection and enable
improved access to individual frames for processing the video.
Tip: A good rule of thumb is to enter the frame rate as the GOP length.

GOP structure: The GOP structure is the sequence of the various frames. At the
beginning of a GOP there is an I-Frame, at the end there are several B-Frames, followed
by a P-Frame. The sequence of B-Frames und P-Frames repeats until the end of the
GOP.
Example: A GOP with a length of 20 and the "IBBP" structure will look like this:
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Frame I B B P B B P B B P B B P B B P B B P B
Profile: Profiles define the encoder properties that are supported.
l SIMPLE: Intended to be used as the basic profile for applications with limited
computational power, e.g. video conferences or mobile phone videos. This profile
does not allow B-Frames, which first and foremost means more data traffic, but
contributes to better reliability.
l Main: This profile was originally intended for the broadcast industry and for backup
purposes. It has become less popular since the development of the "High Profile"
for this purpose.
l HIGH: This profile is used for broadcast and backup applications and is also
sometimes used in the HDTV industry (High Definition Television). This profile is
used for Blu-ray discs.
Note: You should only change this setting when there are problems playing back the
generated video.

Level: MPEG-2 defines various levels. The level determines which bit rate and resolution
are possible for the video. With the "Auto level" option, the encoder determines the level
automatically on the basis of the set video format, the specified bit rate and the profile.
Coding quality: This is the easiest way to set the ratio between coding duration and
quality. Select the setting which best suits your needs.
Hardware acceleration: MAGIX VIDEO PRO X supports the use of "Quick Sync Video"
hardware acceleration. This can noticeably speed up the encoding process.

293 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Smart Copy: If this option is activated, unedited MPEG-2 material with hard cuts is
transferred without changes. This drastically accelerates the encoding process. The
transfer always takes place on the GOP borders is not frame-precise.
HRD (Hypothetical Reference Decoder): When this option is activated, a virtual
decoder checks the data stream for compatibility with the video standard during the
encoding process. This ensures that the generated video is compatible with various
playback devices, but it also slows down the encoding process.

Audio
Sample rate (Hz): Here you can set the sample rate for audio encoding. For DVDs the
standard is set to 48 kHz. If you change the settings here, it may result in not being able
to play back the sound or the entire video.
Channels: Determines the number of audio channels.
l Mono: 1 channel, mono sound
l Stereo: 2 channels, one for left and one for right.
l Surround: 6 channels (5.1)
Bitrate (kBit/s): The desired bit rate is entered here.
Audio encoder: This is where you define how audio material will be coded, or whether it
should be written to the exported file as an uncompressed PCM data. If PCM is used, you
can no longer adjust sample rate and bit rate.

Image Tab
Interlace: Specifies whether the video is coded in frames or fields (in interlaced scanning,
also "Interlaced").
l Progressive: The video is coded in frames.
l Bottom field first: The video will be interlaced. The lower lines (Bottom field) are
used for the first field and upper lines for the second.
l Top field first: The video will be interlaced. The upper lines (Top field) are used for
the first field and the lower lines for the second.

MPEG-4 encoder settings (Intel)

In the "Advanced Settings", you can make detailed adjustments to the MPEG-4 data flow.
The advanced settings are divided into "Video", "Audio", and "Multiplexer".

294 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Video
Note: The preset values and status of the control element (locked/unlocked) depend on
the selected export preset.

Bit Rate Mode: The bit rate indicates how much data is saved in the video per second (at
playback speed). This makes the bit rate the deciding parameter with regard to the file
size and quality of the video to be encoded. A higher bit rate means better quality, but
also a larger file size.
l Constant: The exact value entered in "Average bit rate" is applied which enables
precise calculation of the video size.Constant: The exact value entered in "Average
bit rate" is applied which enables precise calculation of the video size.
l Variable: The value entered in "Average bit rate" is used as an approximate
guideline for the value applied to the video. This means that the size of the video
can only be estimated.
l Constant quantization parameter: This parameter ensures that the video quality
remains the same throughout.
Average bit rate (kbps): The bit rate entered here is used as the average rate applied to
the video. The size of the video to be exported can only be approximated.
Maximum bit rate (kbps): This is the maximum bit rate for the video stream, i.e. the
maximum number of bits the decoder is allowed to transfer per second. This parameter
only takes effect in the "Variable" bit rate mode.
CPB (Coded Picture Buffer): The entered value specifies the maximum amount of
storage space for an encoded frame. Higher values can improve quality, but might also
cause problems during export. If export is aborted, lower this value. The setting "0"
means that the encoder has determined the disk space.
Maximum GOP length: The maximum GOP length is determined here. High values mean
improved compression. Lower values create stronger security protection and enable
improved access to individual frames for processing the video. A general rule: The shorter
the GOP, the more compatible the generated video file.
Tip: A good rule of thumb is to enter the frame rate as the GOP length.

GOP structure: The GOP structure is the sequence of the various frames. At the
beginning of a GOP there is an I-Frame, at the end there are several B-Frames, followed
by a P-Frame. The sequence of B-Frames und P-Frames repeats until the end of the
GOP.
Example: A GOP with a length of 20 and the "IBBP" structure will look like this:
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Frame I B B P B B P B B P B B P B B P B B P B

295 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Profile: Profiles define the encoder properties that are supported.

l Main: This profile was originally intended for the broadcast industry and for backup
purposes. It became less popular when "High Profile" was developed for exactly
these applications.
l HIGH: This profile is used for broadcast and backup applications and is also
sometimes used in the HDTV industry (High Definition Television). This profile is
used for Blu-ray discs.
Note: You should only change this setting when there are problems playing back the
generated video.

Level: H.264 defines various levels. The level determines which bit rate and resolution
are possible for the video. With the "Auto level" option, the encoder determines the level
automatically on the basis of the set video format, the specified bit rate and the profile.
Coding quality: This is the easiest way to set the ratio between coding duration and
quality. Select the setting which best suits your needs.
Hardware acceleration: MAGIX VIDEO PRO X supports the hardware acceleration
"Quick Sync Video" for AVCHD exports, AVCHD and Blu-ray discs. This can noticeably
speed up the encoding process.
Smart Copy: If this option is activated, unedited AVCHD material with hard cuts is
transferred without changes. This drastically accelerates the encoding process. The
transfer always takes place on the GOP borders is not frame-precise.
HRD (Hypothetical Reference Decoder): When this option is activated, a virtual
decoder checks the data stream for compatibility with the video standard during the
encoding process. This ensures that the generated video is compatible with various
playback devices, but it also slows down the encoding process.
Interlace: Specifies whether the video is coded in frames or fields (in interlaced scanning,
also "Interlaced").
l Progressive: The video is coded in frames.
l Bottom field first: The video will be interlaced. The lower lines (Bottom field) are
used for the first field and upper lines for the second.
l Top field first: The video will be interlaced. The upper lines (Top field) are used for
the first field and the lower lines for the second.

Audio
Note: The preset values and status of the control element (locked/unlocked) depend on
the selected export preset.

Sample rate: Here you can see the sample rate for audio encoding.

296 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Channels: Determines the number of audio channels.

l Stereo: 2 channels, one for the left side and one for the right.
l Surround: 6 channels (5.1)
Bitrate (kBit/s): The desired bit rate is entered here.
Audio encoder: Shows which audio encoder is being used.

Image Tab
Interlace:
l Bottom field first: The video will be interlaced. The lower lines (Bottom field) are
used for the first field and upper lines for the second.
l Top field first: The video will be interlaced. The upper lines (Top field) are used for
the first field and the lower lines for the second.

Multiplexer
Streamable: The generated video is suitable for live playback on websites.
HTML Start file: MAGIX VIDEO PRO X generates an HTML file with a video player that
opens the HTML file and plays it back.

MPEG-4 encoder (MainConcept)

MPEG-4 is actually a collection of highly efficient codecs for video and audio based on
the MPEG standard. Compared to MPEG-2, the same quality can be achieved with
smaller file size.
Recommendation: Check the presets that the program offers to find the right preset for
each application and the right playback device. These presets are optimized for typical
applications.
The advanced settings in "Advanced" are divided into "Video", "Audio", and "Multiplexer".
Under "Video“ there is a choice between "MPEG-4 Simple" (MPEG-4 Visual/MPEG-4
Part 2) and "MPEG-4 H.264" (AVC/MPEG-4 Part 10). Depending on the purpose of
application of the material to be exported, either one of these encoder settings can be
selected for compressing the video material. Refer to the manual for the playback device
to find out which encoder is supported.
Under "Audio", "AAC" is preset. If you have chosen an AVCHD transport stream from
the presets, "AVCHD audio track" will be available.
Under "Multiplexer" you can adjust certain presets, e.g. container format and streaming
properties. This is only recommended for experts.

297 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

The option "Export as website" also creates an HTML page in an integrated Flash player
that can play back the video created. Read the topic "Embed Flash videos into your own
web site".
Tip: First, check if there is a suitable preset in the export dialog for your purposes.
Advanced users can make specific adjustments to these three areas using the advanced
settings.

Video

MPEG-4 H.264
The MPEG-4 H.264/AVC codec is suitable for all types of material; however, it requires
relatively higher CPU power for later decoding.
In the advanced encoder settings of the AVC encoder the "Generic" options in "Main
Settings" are mainly interesting.
The AVC preset and video format can be adjusted here. For instance, if DVD quality is
desired you should select "DVD". The video format should be selected specific to the
country so that the material can be played on the devices most commonly available in
these countries. For instance, you should select PAL for Germany, SECAM for France and
NTSC for the US.

MVC
MVC: Multiview Video Coding (MVC) is an expansion for stereoscopic applications.
Activate this to export MVC files.
Note: MVC is only available in the Plus/Premium versions.

Two-Pass
The video to be exported will be encoded twice. The first run-through serves to calculate
the streaming rate for each section (for video this is per frame). The second run-through
is when the actual video is created with the streaming rates that were calculated in the
first run-through. The result is an improved image quality, but encoding takes place
approximately twice as long.

Smart Render and Smart Copy

Smart Render lowers the demand on the encoder for AVCHD material. In the production
of AVCHD files, only those parts of the movie that were changed in the program (e.g. by
video cleaning or effects) are re-encoded. Please note: The AVCHD files contained in the

298 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

movie must have the same format, i.e. the bit rates (variable or constant), audio formats,
image resolutions and video formats must match.
The Smart Rendering special mode „Smart Copy“ enables AVCHD material to be
transferred without having to encode it for the target medium which greatly increases
the encoding speed. The video material cannot appear to have been altered in any way,
only hard cuts (without fades) are permitted. These won't be executed precisely to the
frame, but rather take place at the next GOP borders. For this reason, cuts should be set
somewhat more generously.

Hardware acceleration - (Quick Sync Video)

MAGIX VIDEO PRO X supports hardware acceleration for AVCHD exports as well as
AVCHD and Blu-ray discs. This can noticeably speed up the encoding process.
If hardware acceleration is possible depends on the encoder being used and the
hardware built into the system.
l Quick Sync Video: Intel processors starting with „Sandy Bridge“ when using a
standard MPEG-4 encoder.
Note: Make sure that all the necessary drivers are installed.

If your system does support hardware acceleration, you can activate it in the "Encoder
Settings" dialog under "Advanced..." > "Hardware acceleration".
Advanced video settings
Generic

AVC preset
This is where the actual video stream that will be exported is selected.
l Baseline: According to ISO/ICE 11172-1/2 standard
l Main: Corresponds with ISO/ICE 13818-1/2 standard
l High: High Profile
l SVCD: Corresponds with MPEG-2 Super VideoCD
l D1: Corresponds with MPEG-2 DVD
l DVD: DVD video
l Blu-ray: Blu-ray-Disc
l Blu-ray HD: Blu-ray-Disc in High Definition
l Sony PSP: Sony PSP-compatible format
l HD 1280x720p: High Profile with a resolution of 1280x720p (progressive)

299 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

l HD 1440 x 1080i: High profile with a resolution of 1440 x 1080i (interlaced)

l Apple iPod: Apple iPod-compatible stream.

Profile/Level
Profiles
Profiles define the encoder properties that are supported.
l Baseline profile: The basis of applications with limited computing performance,
especially for video conferences or videos on mobile telephones.
l Main profile: This profile was originally intended for the broadcast industry and for
backup purposes. It has become less popular since the development of the "High
Profile" for this purpose.
l High profile: This profile is used for broadcast and backup applications, and it is
also used sometimes in the HDTV industry (High Definition Television). This profile
is used for HD-DVD and Blu-ray Discs, for example.
Level: H.264 defines various levels. The level determines which bit rate and resolution
are possible for the video. With the "Auto level" option, the encoder determines the level
automatically on the basis of the set video format, the specified bit rate and the profile.

Frame type
"Picture type" specifies which parts of a frame should be used as the basis for the
encoding:
l Progressive Frame: A single image from a video sequence, also called a fullscreen.
l Interlaced Field: This is half an image. Two of these are combined to produce a
frame. Read more about this explanation regarding "Interlace".
l Interlace Frame: The encoder creates a „Frame field“ which is the basis for the
encoding.

Field order

Note: This parameter is only available if the setting "Field" is selected for "Frame type".

In case of interlaced streams, the half-image sequence is set. Read more about this
explanation regarding "Interlace".

Slice count
A frame can be divided into multiple slices for encoding. Specify the maximum number of
slices are permitted. If set to "0", then the number will be determined automatically.

300 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Rate control
The bit rate indicates how much data per second is saved in the video (playback speed).
This makes the bit rate the deciding parameter with regard to the file size and quality of
the video to be encoded. A higher bit rate means more quality but also a larger file size.

Mode
Constant bit rate: The constant bit rate should only be used if the device used to play
the video supports constant bit rates.
Variable bit rate: The bit rate varies. For faster movements in the video, the bit rate
increases, and for still images or slow pans, a lower bit rate is sufficient for creating the
video in constant quality.

Pass
Here you can choose whether you want to manually perform one-pass or multi-pass
encodings (2-pass, multi-pass)
Note: The 2-pass option in the main dialog of the MPEG-4 export is recommended. This
automatically performs two encoder passes.

If you want to perform 2-pass encoding manually, you must select "Multi-pass analysis"
in the first pass and "Multi-pass encode" in the second pass.
l Single pass: The encoder process takes place without prior analysis. This requires
the least amount of time.
l Multi-pass analysis: Analysis data is calculated during encoding and used for multi-
pass encoding.
l Multi-pass encode: Assumes that an analysis has already been performed. The
analysis data is used during encoding to optimize the results.

Bit rate (Bits/s)

l In "Constant bit rate" mode: Exactly those values entered are applied to be able to
calculate the size of the video precisely.
l In "Variable bit rate" mode: The values entered here are applied to the video as an
average as a guideline. The size of the video to be exported can only be
approximated.

HSS rate
This is the maximum bit rate that should be present in the video stream, i.e. maximum
number of bits that may be transferred to the decoder.

301 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Note: This option is only available in "Variable bit rate" mode. "Use HRD" must also be
activated.

Aspect ratio
"Aspect ratio" refers to the ratio of the two sides of the screen. In the film industry, this is
an indication of the ratio between width and height of a rectangle, monitor, or screen.
There are 3 different sizes available:
l Picture Aspect Ratio (also Display Aspect Ratio, DAR): This indicates the desired
aspect ratio of the video to be exported. Here are some examples of typical aspect
ratios: at home 4:3, 16:9 (typical for TV sets), or 16:10 (widescreen flat screens,
widescreen notebooks), 3:2 for 35 mm films and photos. In cinemas you mostly find
1.85:1.
l Pixel Aspect Ratio (PAR, pixel aspect ratio): Indicates the aspect ratio of individual
pixels. The majority of computer monitors have quadratic pixels (PAR=1:1), for
analog television monitors (PAL at 4:3) 128:117.
l Sample Aspect Ratio (SAR, also Storage Aspect Ratio): Aspect ratio of the saved
resolution (number of pixels), e.g. 720:576 at PAL. It also calculates picture aspect
ratio and pixel aspect ratio: SAR = DAR / PAR.
Note: In the standard case, the "Aspect ratio" remains set the way it is. You should only
change the settings if the resulting video is exported distorted or stretched or if you need
to correct the video because it is in the wrong aspect ratio.

GOP structure
Max GOP length: Determines the maximum GOP length. High values mean improved
compression. Lower values create stronger security protection and enable improved
access to individual frames for processing the video.
Max B-Frames count: The number of B-Frames. Several applications, e.g. video
conferences, require a setting of "0" for this, i.e. no B-Frames, in order to enable the
shortest possible reaction times for transfer.
Scene change detection: If this option is activated the scenes will be detected during
encoding, thus allowing you to insert an I frame after a scene change.

302 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

MPEG-4 simple, Advanced video settings

Generic

MPEG-4 preset
Different presets located within the encoder.
(A)SP@L0-L5: (Advanced) Simple Profile in Level 0-5
(Q)CIF (Common Intermediate Format): CIF is a video format produced as soon as
1990 with the video compression format H.261. At that time, the format was used for
video telephone conferences. The "Q" in QCIF stands for "Quarter", and since resolution
is halved in terms of height and width compared to CIF, the entire size is only a quarter of
CIF.
(Half)D1: D1 corresponds with MPEG-2 DVD. HalfD1 has exactly half of the entire
number of pixels, meaning that the pixel number of the height and weight is 2/3 of D1.
720p: Video stream with a resolution of 1280 x 720p (progressive).
Apple iPod: Apple iPod-compatible stream.
Sony PSP: Sony PSP-compatible stream.

Profile/Level
Profiles: Profiles define the encoder properties that are supported.
Level: The level determines which bit rate and resolution are possible for the video.

Picture type
"Picture type" specifies which parts of a frame should be used as the basis for the
encoding:
l Frame: A frame is a single image from a video sequence, also called a full image.
l Field: A half-image, two of which combine to produce a frame. Read more about
this explanation regarding "Interlace".

Field order

Note: This parameter is only available if the setting "Field" is selected for "Frame type".

In case of interlaced streams, the half-image sequence is set. Read more about this
explanation regarding "Interlace".

303 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Slice count
A frame can be divided into multiple slices for encoding. Specify the maximum number of
slices are permitted. If set to "0", then the number will be determined automatically.

Rate control
The bit rate indicates how much data per second is saved in the video (playback speed).
This makes the bit rate the deciding parameter with regard to the file size and quality of
the video to be encoded. A higher bit rate means more quality but also a larger file size.

Mode
Constant bit rate: The constant bit rate should only be used if the device used to play
the video supports constant bit rates.
Variable bit rate: The bit rate varies. For faster movements in the video, the bit rate
increases, and for still images or slow pans, a lower bit rate is sufficient for creating the
video in constant quality.
Constant quality: Similar to the "Variable bit rate" mode, the bit rate varies according to
the video material. The quality depends on the selected profile and can be changed.
Constant quantizer: In this mode, a fixed colour quantization is used for the macro
blocks. Under Advanced settings, a value between 1 and 32 can be set independent of
the respective frame (I-Frame, P-Frame, or B-Frame). The higher the value, the stronger
the quantization: small values produce qualitatively high-quality images and the data rate
increases, and larger values produce a reduction in data, but the quality suffers.

Bit rate (Bits/s)

l In "Constant bit rate" mode: Exactly those values entered are applied to be able to
calculate the size of the video precisely.
l In "Variable bit rate" mode: The values entered here are applied to the video as an
average as a guideline. The size of the video to be exported can only be
approximated.

Max. rate
This is the maximum bit rate that allowed to be present in the video stream, i.e. maximum
number of bits that may be transferred to the decoder.
Note: This option is only available in "Variable bit rate" mode.

Pixel aspect ratio

Specifies the page ratio of the individual image points (pixels).

304 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Meaning: Different television norms and the standard pixel ratio. Select a setting and the
results are displayed as "X" and "Y".
X/Y: The actual pixel ratio. If under "Meaning" the setting "Custom" is selected, then a
custom ratio can be set.

GOP structure
Max key interval: Determines the maximum GOP length. High values mean improved
compression. Lower values create stronger security protection and enable improved
access to individual frames for processing the video.
B-Frames count: The number of B-Frames. Several applications, e.g. video conferences,
require a setting of "0" for this, i.e. no B-Frames, in order to enable the shortest possible
reaction times for transfer.
Scene change detection: If this option is activated the scenes will be detected during
encoding, thus allowing you to insert an I frame after a scene change.

Audio
Under "Audio", "AAC" is preset. If you have chosen an AVCHD transport stream from the
presets, "AVCHD audio track" will be available.

AAC
AAC was developed by MPEG, the Moving Picture Experts Group, as an audio data
compression process that was specified as a further development of MPEG-2
Multichannel in the MPEG-2 standard.
AAC is equally suitable for encoding general audio information and not especially
optimized for certain types of audio material.
AAC audio can be encoded with a sample rate of 8000, 16000, 24000, 32000 or 48000
Hz in either mono or stereo. By default, the sound is set to 48000 Hz stereo. The higher
the sample rate is, the larger the resulting file and higher the audio quality. You can use
the technical specifications of your playback device to help with this.
Advanced audio settings:
l The bit rate can be set between 6 and 192 kbit/s. 160 kbits/s is active by default.
The higher the value is, the larger the resulting file and higher the audio quality.
After a certain limit, additional improvements to audio quality will not be perceived.
Bit rates under 64 kb/s are not recommended.
l As an MPEG version, set MPEG-4 or MPEG-2 format.

305 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

l For the File Header Type, choose either RAW or ADTS. The "Header" indicates an
explanatory head for the beginning of the file segment, which in fact takes up extra
space, but is required for decoding under circumstances.
l RAW indicates material which does not include a file header in audio format.
The audio material is therefore transferred directly without any special
additional information (raw). This requires that decoding routines are able to
process the material without the explanatory file header. Especially in case
"exotic" sample rates are set, this can lead to problems during RAW encoding.
l ADTS indicates a file header type which contains information for encoded
audio material. In case of doubt, select this file header type, since fewer
problems can be expected in this case.
Profile:
l Low complexity: Data is present in a form that hinders different decoding
algorithms (noise replacement), but enables others (temporal adjustment noise
formation).
Note: For example, Apple iPod requires "low complexity encoding". However, you don't
need to worry if you select the right preset for Apple iPod in the export dialog.

AVCHD audio track

If you have chosen an AVCHD, AVCHD transport stream, or Blu-ray (H.264) from the
presets, "AVCHD audio track" will be available.
Note: 5.1 surround is only available in Plus/Premium.

Multiplexer
Output format
MPEG-4 file: This is an MPEG standard (ISO/IEC-14496) with the original goal of
supporting devices with less computing performance. Currently, MPEG-4 has reached a
wide bandwidth of application, from HD video to support for mobile telephones.
JPEG2000 file: DCI (Digital Cinema Initiative) has been replaced by the JPEG2000
format for encoding movies. The current distribution and presentation of films has been
taken over by digital projectors that play back high-resolution Mj2 streams in outstanding
image and sound quality.
3GPP file: A standard supported by plenty GSM and UMTS mobile telephones. 3GPP is
very similar to the MPEG-4 standard, but also supports formats that are not permitted by
MPEG-4.

306 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Streamable format
Activate this option if you would like to create files that can be integrated into and played
back on websites. This way the file can be played back without having to be completely
preloaded.
Note: This setting is recommended if you choose the option "Export as website".

For Sony PSP

Switch on this option if the video should be played back with the Sony PSP.

For iPod
Switch on this option, if the video should be played back with the Apple iPod.

307 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Index
'

'Burn' interface 236

'Edit' interface 37

10-band Equalizer 153

16-bit 232

360° videos 217

3D distortion 125

Add Noise 117

Analog Video Recording 85
Animation 133
Artistic filter 112
Audio 87
Audio cleaning 154
Audio effects 148
Audio effects in the Mixer 153
Audio mixdown 147
Auto Mastering 158
AVC-Intra 78
AVCHD 78

Backup copies 76
Backup project 233
BPM Wizard 205
Brightness and Contrast 108
Broadcast colors 117

308 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Burn Wizard 245

Camera/zoom shot 123

Chroma key 111
Cleaning Wizard 68
Color 109
Color correction 110
Compressor 154, 157
Create titles without a template 101
Creating titles using a template 101

DeClipper 155
Deep Color 232
DeHisser 157
Delete chapter markers 184
DeNoiser 156
Distortion 113
DV Camera 81
DVCPRO 78
Dynamic titles 101

Echo 152
Effects 101
effects curves 133
Effects masks 130
Equalizer FX rack 157
Export movie, Menu 253

Film and project settings 64

309 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Find gaps 204

Four-point editing 201

Gaussian Blur 119

Glow 119

HDV Camera 81
Histogram 194

Import audio CDs 171

In & out points 185

J-L Cuts 195

keyframes 133

LAB color 119

Layer masks 132
Lens Correction 125
Lens reflection 120
Levels 120
Limiter 162

managing video projects 64

Markers 182
Mask Generator 121
Mastering Suite 158
Measuring instruments 187

310 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Media Pool 42
Menus 271
Mixdown 147
Mixer 162
Mono objects 154
Movement templates 126
Movies 21
Multicam Editing 213
Multimax 160
Musical editing adjustment 204

Object handles 98
Object trimmer 197
Objects 21, 95

Parametric 6-band equalizer 159

Playback markers 182
plug-ins 128
Position/Size 122
Preview rendering 210
proDAD Mercalli 2.0 115
Program and source monitor 38
Program settings 69
Project management 76
Project markers 183
Project window 48
Projects 21
Proxy and preview rendering 66

Range markers 185-186

311 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Record 78
Reverb 151
RGB Parade 193
Rotation/Mirror 124

Scene markers 186

Screen 92
Scrubbing 171
Section 123
Settings 64
Sharpness 113
Shortcut 258
Shot match 116
Simple crossfade 202
Simple cut 194
Single frame 90
Snap markers and transients 183
Source tracks 214
Speed 114
Split 194
Stamp forms 118
Start dialog 68
Stereo FX 158
Stereo processor 161
Surround/Multichannel 165

Three-point editing 200

Timecode 105
Timestretch/Resample 150
Title 101

312 / 313
 Activating and using codecs

Title Editor 102

Toolbars 52
Transitions 202
Transport control 40
trim 194
Two-point edit 198

Unsharp mask 121

Vectorscope 190
VEGAS Video Stabilization 114
Volume reduction 147

Waveform monitor 191

Wizards 173

313 / 313